
&v* 









VVi* A 










J- " 7 * -^I^S'" *^ 




T7T* A 



* 



' °o > ♦♦ 



* «f> 


















* 








•••• ^ 



.•* .0° ^ ** 



te V 




Jv ***** 




«0 > ^. *T7»* 














© 




N 9 



A 



,o^. 




^o 1 

4 o 







1 






THE 






ELEMENTS 



OF 



GREEK GRAMMAR, 



WITH NOTES. 



BY R. VALPY, D. D. F. A. S. 



** Nequaquam me poenitet hujus studii, quod per hanc recen- 
sionem in tractatione veterum Grammaticorum consumsi. Imo 
tantum eo me adjutum sentio, non modo ad hoc opus, sed ad om- 
nem facultatem linguae Grsecae, neminem ut arbitrer in Greeds 
scriptoribus intelligendis proficere posse, nisi simili cursu lectionis 
preecepta illorum collegerit, et ad optimas rationes examinaverity 

WOLFIUS, Proleg. ad Homer. 



FIFTH AMERICAN EDITION. 



BOSTON 



PUBLISHED BY CUMMINGS, HILLIARD, AND CO. 

Boston Bookstore, No. 1, Cornhill. 
1825. 

A 







-1 






xV* 



DISTRICT OF MASSACHUSETTS, TO WIT : 

District Clertfs Office. 
BE IT REMEMBERED, that on the fourteenth day of April, 
A. D. 1814, and in the thirty eighth year of the Independence of 
the United States of America, Jacob A. Cummings of the said dis- 
trict has deposited in this office the title of a book, the right where- 
of he claims as proprietor, in the words following, viz. 

" The Elements of Greek Grammar, with Notes, by R. Valpy. 
First American from the last London edition, with corrections and 
additions. — Nequaquam me pcenitet hujus studii, quod per hanc 
recensionem in tractatione veterum Grammaticorum consumsi. 
Imo tantum eo me adjutum sentio, non modo ad hoc opus, sed ad 
omnem facultatem lingua? Graecae, neminem ut arbitrer in Grsecis 
scriptoribus intelligendis proficere posse, nisi simili cursu lectionis 
praecepta illorum collegerit, et ad optimas rationes examinaverit. 
Wolfius, Proleg. ad Homer." 

In conformity to the act of the Congress of the United States, 
entitled, " An act for the encouragement of learning, by securing 
the copies of maps, charts, and books, to the authors and proprie- 
tors of such copies, during the times therein mentioned ;" and also 
to an act, entitled, " An act supplementary to an act, entitled, An 
act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of 
maps, charts, and books, to the authors and proprietors of such cop- 
ies during the times therein mentioned ; and extending the benefits 
thereof to the arts of designing, engraving, and etching historical 
and other prints." W. S. SHAW. 

Clerk of the District of Massachusetts. 



FROM THE CODMAN PRESS, ANDOVER. 

Flagg and Gould, Printers. 



Advertisement to the London edition* 

The reasons, which obliged the author of this 
Grammar to prepare it for publication, are known to 
several of his friends ; to the public they would be un- 
important. 

His path was clearly traced. His Latin Grammar 
had found its way into general use ; a similar plan there- 
fore would not be unsuccessful, if the execution were 
equal. He has now given it a decisive trial among his 
pupils ; arid the event of that trial has exceeded his 
most sanguine expectations. The rapid sale of the first 
impression, and the testimonies of its utility, which he 
has received from several experienced teachers, have 
induced him to make considerable additions, and, he 
trusts, improvements in this edition. 

It is the chief design of the work to simplify and to 
explain. The rules to be committed to memory by 
the young pupil will be found concise, and yet compre- 
hensive ; the Notes to be read by the maturer student, 
as full and minute as the limits of the book would per- 
mit. 

In the Declensions, the plan adopted by the best la- 
ter Grammarians has been followed. The unnecessary 
and perplexing number of declensions, given by Gle- 
nard and some other writers, has been justly rejected 
by Rhodomannus, Verwey, Vossius, and Weller, 



IV 

who have reduced them to three. In France that 
number has been sanctioned by the Port Royal au- 
thors, and in Scotland by Moor. In this country the 
great Busby, whose metrical Grammar is one of the 
noblest monuments of industry and knowledge, has 
made five declensions ; but the two last are branches 
of the third, and were admitted in consequence of the 
author's plan to assimilate the Greek and Latin lan- 
guages in every respect. If each contracted form of im- 
parisyllabic nouns is to constitute a distinct declension, 
the number might be considerably increased, and the 
memory of the learner unprofitably burdened. For 
this last reason, in the words of the judicious Sharpe, 
" the formation of such nouns as are called Diminu- 
tive," of which Caninius has reckoned more than thirty 
forms, " Amplifying, and Possessive, is thought to be 
better acquired by use than by a multitude of rules." 

In the number of Conjugations a still greater differ- 
ence has been made. Some Grammarians have in- 
cluded all Verbs under one form ; others have extend- 
ed the number to thirteen. The plan of the former 
produced obscurity ; that of the latter, prolixity, if not 
confusion. To avoid these defects, a middle way has 
been attempted, and justified by the success which has 
attended it. The distinction of Conjugations of Verbs 
in co by the termination of the First Future, must be al- 
lowed to be simple and easy. To the objection that 
may be made, on account of the difficulty of finding out 
the First Future, it may be answered, that the same 
difficulty exists in finding out the Infinitive Mood, the 



drily distinction of Latin Conjugations. And yet the 
youngest student is not at a loss to distinguish them. 
The plan in the present Grammar will be found, on 
experience, to simplify the subject, and facilitate the 
acquisition of this important part of grammatical knowl- 
edge. 

A still greater innovation will appear in the Contract- 
ed forms of Verbs. No Synopsis is given, because 
that Synopsis seldom leaves accurate traces in the mem- 
ory of the young student. If he is made to give the 
rules and examples in this Grammar, when he meets a 
Contracted Verb, he will in a short time become per- 
fectly versed in the principle and practice both of con- 
tracted and uncontracted forms. 

The list of Irregular Verbs will be found copious, 
and, it is hoped, satisfactory. It would have been short- 
er, if the system of Hermannus had been followed, 
who banishes the obsolete and fictitious roots in ew, and 
considers the Futures in ^aw, and the Perfects in ^xa, 
as Attic forms from Verbs in ei. However sagacious 
this observation may be, considered abstractedly, yet in 
an elementary book, professing to give the easiest meth- 
ods of forming the tenses for the young pupil, it cannot 
be adopted in practice. Indeed, he himself justifies 
the method observed in this Grammar : " Patet cur 
Grammatici dte&'oD finxerint ; dke'^co non poterat aliter 
formatum habere futurum vel Aoristum Primum, vel 
Perfectum, nisi tanquam ab ale^eco^ 

On the Syntax the best classical authorities are al- 
ways produced. If examples are not taken from the 
1* 



VI 



New Testament, the omission arose partly from a 
wish that greater respect may be shown to the style of 
the Holy Scriptures, when it is found so generally au- 
thorized by quotations from the purest writers. On the 
meaning and construction of Prepositions much labour 
has been employed, and it is hoped that both deficien- 
cy and prolixity have been avoided. The metrical table 
has been found of singular advantage to the learner, who 
is required to give the example suited to the passage., 
which he is to explain. No precepts are given on the 
Prepositions in composition, for no class of Greek stu- 
dents can be strangers to Bishop Huntingford 5 s\Erer« 
cises, in which the fullest and the clearest directions are 
given. In the course of the Syntax it will be observed, 
that the principles of Dr Moor of Glasgow, and of 
that great etymologist, Horne Tooke, have not been 
disregarded. The use, now become general, of Pro- 
fessor Dalzel's Jinalecta has furnished the student 
with the most valuable rules on Greek construction, de- 
livered in an agreeable and interesting manner. 

The Prosody is short and easy ; it is intended to in- 
vite the young scholar to a strict application to that ob- 
ject. If he is conversant with the few rules here given, 
practice and attention will soon raise him to a high de- 
gree of metrical accuracy. A key is placed in his 
hands, by which he may enter the fields of poetry, and 
cull the fairest flowers of taste and genius. In these 
pleasing excursions he will derive great advantage from 
the directions of Valckenaer, and of Professor Por- 
son, in their Notes to Euripides, and of Brunck to 



Vll 

Aristophanes and Sophocles ; and from the criticisrns 
of Dr Charles Burney. Many ingenious and impor- 
tant observations will be found in Bishop Cleaver on 
the Rhythm of the Greeks, and in Bishop Horsley on 
the Prosodies of the Greek and Latin Languages. 

The rules for Accents are general. More particular 
observations will be found in the last edition of Bell's 
Greek Gramma*, which contains the comprehensive 
rules of Port Royal. An enlarged and analogical view 
of the subject will be supplied by Mr N are's Elements 
of Orthoepy, a book which ought to be in the hands of 
every student. 

For a more minute knowledge of Dialects, the stu- 
dent is referred to Mattaire. It is hoped that the 
Tables given in this Grammar, of the changes of let- 
ters, will be found interesting. 

An accurate account of the nature and powers of the 
Digamma will be found in Dawes' Miscellanea Criti- 
ca, edited by that profound analogist, Bishop Burgess; 
in the instructive essay of Dr Foster on Greek Ac- 
cents ; and in the learned disquisition on the Greek Al- 
phabet, by R. P. Knight, M. P. The observations 
on the pronunciation of the Digamma have received 
the concurrence of an accurate investigator of ancient 
forms of language and of classical antiquities. To the 
list of digammated words in Homer, Professor Heyne's 
laborious researches have amply contributed. The 
edition of Homer, now preparing by Mr Kidd, will 
throw considerable light on the subject, and on the gen- 
uine readings of the poet. 



Vlll 

The concluding system of the Formation of the lan- 
guage is that, which was suggested at the same time by 
Hemsterhusius in Holland and by Lord Monboddo 
in Scotland, It has received considerable illustration 
from Lennep in his Analogia Graeca, and from our 
countryman Burgess, in his appendix to Dawes, and 
in his Essay on Antiquities. 

The great object of the author has-been utility. He 
has endeavoured to explain the meaning of terms, and 
the causes of constructions, and to enliven the rules by 
analogical allusions to the other languages ; a mode of 
comparison best calculated to illustrate and familiarize 
the subject. If his explanations are not always satis- 
factory, they will at least engage the reflecting mind of 
an attentive student to investigate the origin, to trace 
the progress, and to extend his knowledge of the pur- 
est and most copious of languages. 



FIRST AMERICAN EDITION. 

Notice of the publishers. 

From the general dissatisfaction, which exists res- 
pecting Greek Grammars now in use in this country, 
and from the repeated solicitations of many of our most 
respectable instructers, we are induced to publish this 
Grammar, which has been received with much approba- 
tion, and used with great success in England. In this 
edition some of the deficiences mentioned in the pre- 
ceding preface are supplied, and several examples of 
declension of nouns, a paradigm of contract vejbs, a 
few rules in syntax, a synopsis of parsing, &c. have 
been added. It is presumed, this Grammar will fully 
obviate the difficulties, which have so long been a sub- 
ject of complaint among teachers. 

CUMMINGS & HILLIARD. 
Boston, March, 1814. 



FIFTH EDITION. 

This fifth American, is from the fifth London edi- 
tion, and comprises the valuable Notes recently add- 
ed by Dr Valpy. It is prmtea witn a new and beauti- 
ful type, and some errors in the preceding editions have 
been corrected. 



There are twenty-four letters in Greek. 



A a 

B $6 

Ty r 

Jd 

Ee 

ZX, 

Hr) 

ii 

K* 
Al 

Nv 
3% 
Oo 

2 a, final s 
Tv 

f 

St ca 



Alpha 
Beta 


a 
b 


Gamma 


g 


Delta 


d 


Epsilon 
Zeta 


e 
z 


Eta 


e 


Theta 


th 


Iota 

Ka PP a ^£u 
Lambda 


i 

k 1 

1 


Mu 


m 


Nu 


n 


Xi 


X 


Omicron 


o 


Pi 

Rho 


p 

r 


Sigma 


s 


Ta% *' 


t 


Upsilon 

Phi 

Chi 


u 1 

ph 

ch 


Psi 

Omega 


ps 
o 



1 K is in Latin generally changed into c ; T into y, as 
nvnvog, cycnus. 



12 

Of these, seven are vowels. 

€, o, short, 1 
% co, long, 2 
a, i, v, doubtful. 3 

There are twelve diphthongs : 

Six proper : at, ccv, si, £v, ot, ov. 4 

Six improper : «, ^ &, y)v, vi P iov? 



1 The letters * , o, u, and co, were called ei, ov, v, and cu, 
without the adjective, daring many centuries after the 
Christian era. 

In e psilon, o micron, u psilon, i is long. But the names of 
these letters have, since the adoption of the distinctive ad- 
jectives, been pronounced in this country as single words 
with the English accent, epsilon, omicron, upsilon. Some 
persons have lately resumed the former pronunciation. For 
the same reason, omega should be called o mega. 

The addition ofpsilon to u appears unnecessary, as that 
vowel is not, like e and o, distinguished from a correspond- 
ing letter. 

2 Anciently e was used for y, and for co or ov ; thus 
KOPEZfoT KoQtjg, SEONfov Saw, and HEPOAOfo? 
'Hgwdov. The long mark was then placed over € and 0, 
thus f , 0, for rj, co. • f 

3 They are called doubtful, because they are long in some 
syllables and short in others. 

4 Av is in Latin changed into ce ; rarely at, as Mala, 
Maia ; at, into i, sometimes into e, as Mrfieia, Medea ; 00 
into ce ; ov into u. 

5 In the formation of the proper diphthongs, v and v are 
placed after a, e, or 0. Hence t and t> are called Subjunc- 
tive* and the rest Prepositive. 

In the formation of the improper diphthongs, t, and v are 



13 

Of the seventeen Consonants, nine are mutes, 
divided into 

Three soft, n, *, t; 

Three middle, /?, y, <?; 
Three aspirate, <p, %, #. 
Each soft mute has its corresponding mid- 
dle and aspirate, into each of which it is fre- 
quently changed ; thus, n has /3 for its mid- 
die, and cp for its aspirate. 1 

2* may be called a solitary consonant, 
which, placed after the mutes, assists in form- 
ing 

Three double letters ; thus, 



placed after the same vowels made long, a, r\, or co. The 
1, then become silent, is subscribed, or placed under the 
former vowel. For the same reason vi is sometimes writ- 
ten y. 

The silent v was anciently either omitted, or added to the 
former vowel, as appears from Inscriptions and ancient MSS. 
thus, APAN or A PAIN for dgav. It is still sometimes 
joined to capital letters, thus, At, 

Perhaps in strictness av and vo should be considered 
sometimes as proper, sometimes as improper, diphthongs, ac- 
cording to the quantity of the former vowel. 

When two vowels, which generally coalesce into a diph- 
& thong, retain their separate sounds, two dots are placed 
over the latter vowel, and form a diaeresis, as avnvog, 

1 When two mutes come together, they must be both ei- 
ther soft, middle, or aspirate ; thus ttvmvcui, hvcp^v, not 
T£TV(fTa(,, irvTi&tiv 

2 Called Sigma in the Ionic, San in the Doric, dialect. 

2 



y 



77C, 


fit, 


*s, 


ys, 


fs, 


% 



14 

tpg, form if* ; 
%l, form |; 
#s, form £. 
And four are liquids, A, fi, v, p. 1 
There are two Breathings, one of which is 
placed over every vowel or diphthong begin- 
ning a word : 

The soft ( ' ), the aspirate ( e ). 2 



3 J 1 before y, «, £, /, is pronounced like y ; thus ccyyeXog 
is pronounced avyehoQ, like n in angle. 



iy before y, *, £, jj; 



A 7 is changed into < ^ before /?, ff, 7r, cjp, 1// ; 
( A, p, and o before A, p, a. 
Thus, lyyQacpoi for ivygaqco ; ippulvco for ivfiaivu) ; gvja- 
{dvo) for ovvpevco ; so in Latin, impedio for inpedio ; illudo 
for inludo, &c. and anciently aggulus for angutus* &c. 

iV" is added to Dative plurals in w, and to Verbs of the 
third person in e and *, when the next word begins with a 
vowel ; thus, i'teyev avxw for tleye avzol. 

The negative ov is used before a consonant, ovx before a 
soft vowel, ovx before an aspirate : i£ before a consonant 
becomes in : oirco, Si^Q^ and i**XQt< before a vowel take £, 
as ovtwq t(fr\. 

2 The aspirate has the force of h : thus, 6 is pronounced 
ho. 

Tand q at the beginning of a word have always the as- 
pirate. If two q come together, the former has the soft. 
the latter the aspirate : thus, tQQtov. 

Anciently, H was the aspirate in Greek, as it is in Latin ; 
thus, HEKATON YW& written for ixarov. The parts of 
the H were taken to denote their breathings. Thus the 
mark of the soft was H, of the aspirate K This form was 
afterwards simplified into - 1 and L ; and lastly rounded into 
the present shape, ' and \ 



15 

Apostrophe (') shows that a vowel is cut off; 
as, ccXX iyca for dkkd tyco. 1 

When an apostrophe takes place, a soft 
mute before an aspirate vowel is changed into 
its corresponding aspirate : thus for dno ov, 
du ov is changed into dcf ou. 

There are three Accents : the acute (' ), the 
grave ( v ), and the circumflex ( ~ ). 2 

The acute is placed on one of the three last 
syllables of a word. 

The grave is never placed but on the last 
syllable. 



The JEolians, who avoided the aspirate, used another 
sound, similar to a V or a W, to prevent the hiatus occa- 
sioned by the meeting of vowels in different syllables ; this 
was called the Digamma, because its figure resembled two- 
gammas, one over the other ; thus, F or f. Thus, feontQu 
for iantgu, cofov for eJoV, tovto fldov for rovxo 'idov. 
Hence the Latin vespera, ovum, video, &c. 

1 The vowels thus cut off are a, e, i, o, and the diphthongs 
av and Ob ; but negl and tiqo never, and datives of the third 
declension seldom, lose their final vowel. 

These vowels and diphthongs are sometimes cut off at 
the beginning of a word by the Attics : thus, cj 'ya&i for 
oj dya&e. 

Two words are sometimes joined in one by Crasis; as 
Mjtyw for %ccl iyco, Kara for xalehcc, avrig for 6 uvt}& 
ova for 6 «c, tova for a) avcc, iyojdcc for iyoj oldct, xh^a- 
Tiov for to Ifiaxtov, cpQovdog for ngo ddog, &c. 

2 The circumflex was first marked * , then n , lastly . 



16 

The circumflex is placed on a long vowel 
or diphthong in one of the two last syllables. 1 
There are only four Points or Stops : 
The comma, like the Latin Q 
The note of interrogation (;) 
The colon, or point at top (•) 
The full stop, like the Latin (.) 

PARTS OF SPEECH. 

There are eight species of words, called 
Parts of Speech : Article, Noun, Adjective, 
Pronoun, Verb, Adverb, Preposition, Conjunc- 
tion? 

The four first are declined with Gender. 
Number, and Case. 

There are three Genders : Masculine, Fern- 
inine, and Neuter. 

There are three Numbers : 

The Singular speaks of one ; 

The Dual, 2 of two, or a pair. 



1 Words accented on the last syllable are called oxytons 
or acutitons ; words not accented on the last syllable are 
called barytons or gravitons. 

2 The Interjections are included by the Greeks in the Ad- 
verbs. 

3 The Dual, which adds to the precision of the Greek 



17 

The Plural, of more than two. 

There are five Cases : Nominative, Geni- 
tive, Dative, Accusative, Vocative} 

The Nominative and Vocative are frequent- 
ly the same in the singular, always in the dual 
and plural. 

The Dative has always i, either final, or in a 
diphthong in the last syllable. 

The Genitive plural always ends in wr. 

The Dual has only two terminations, one for 
the Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative ; 
the other for the Genitive and Dative. 

Neuters have the Nominative, Accusative, 
and Vocative alike ; and in the plural those 
cases end in a. In the Dual they are the same 
as the masculine. 



language, is not used in the iEolic dialect, nor in Latin. It 
is not found in the New Testament, in the Septuagint, nor 
in the Fathers. In the corruption of the language by the 
modern Greeks, it has been omitted. Thus it was used in 
that copious language, the Arabic, and does not exist in the 
Persian. 

1 An Ablative was admitted by ancient grammarians ; but 
as it is always the same as the Dative, it is generally dis- 
used. 

2* 



18 





ARTICLE. 








0, rf, to, the} 






Singular. 


Dual. 




Plural. 


M. F. N. 






M. F. N. 


"N. o,^ ifc to x 


M F. N. 


N. 


°h a h T ^ 


G. TOU, TfJQ, TOV, 


N. A. rw, ra, rw, 


G. 


TCOV, rc3*>, XCOV, 


D. tco, tiL rqj, 

A. T0*>, T^V^TO. 


G.D. tow, tcuv,to7v. 


D. 
A. 


tg?£, ra?£, ro?£, 
rouV, rcig, tcx. 



NOUN. 

Declensions of Nouns are three, answering 
to the three first declensions in Latin. 

'The first ends in a and ?} feminine, and in ag 
and r)s masculine. 

The second ends in oc, generally masculine 
and sometimes feminine, and ov neuter. 

The third ends in «, *, iy neuter; co feminine; 
v > £> Pj ^ V 7 °f a ^ genders ; and increases in the 
Genitive. 2 



1 The article usually answers to the definite article the 
in English. When no article is expressed in Greek the 
English indefinite article a is signified. t Thus, av&Qconoq 
means a man, or man in general ; and d civ&Qconog the man. 
This article, which does not exist in Latin, has been found 
of great utility in modern languages. 

2 Ancient Grammarians give ten declensions. Simple ; I. 
«£, fjg. II. a, r\. III. o£, ov. IV. cog, cov. V. a, £, v , i>, p, 
£, £, t//. — Contracted ; I. ??£, *£, 0£. II. *£, t. III. *uff, f£, 
a;. IV. w, cog. V. «?, (>«£. — The four first are parisyllabic ; 
the Test imparisyllabic. 



19 





DECLENSIONS. 1 








First Declension. 






ij [iovgcc, a muse. 




Singular. 




Dual. 


Plural. 


N. Movo-a, 






N. 


MOVG-OM, 


G. IWovG-rjg, 


N. 


A. V. Movg-cc, 


G. 


MOVO-WV, 


D. Movg-j$~* 


— 




D. 


MovG-aig, 


A. Movg-ccv, 


G. 


D. Mqvg-cuv. 


A. 


Movo-ctg, 


V. Mouo-a. 






V. 


Movg-cw. 


Nouns in 


da, 


&a, §ct> and a 


pure? make 


i 




Singular. 




I. 




II: 


III. 


N. cc, rj wg, yg 




og, op N. 






G. «£-?;£ 1 ou 




ov 




og 


D. a-fi 

* i' 




ft) 

• 




V 


A. av-fjv 




ov 




a-v 


V. a-7\ 




t, OV N. 










Dual. 




N. A.V. a 


1 


ft) 


€ 


G. D. mv 


\ r 


01V 


OIV. 






Plural. 




N. cu 




oi, a N. 




sg, «N. 


G. oxv 




wv 




wv 


D. a*s 




0££ 




01 


A. ag 




ous^ 




ag, a N. 


V. M 




ov, a 




eg, a N. 


2 The two firs 


t Declensions subscri 


be i 


v in the Dative 



singular. 

3 A vowel is called pure, when it follows a vowel ; im- 
pure, when it follows a consonant. In the former case it is 



20 



the Genitive in ag, and the Dative in a, and 
the rest like Movoa : l thus, 





7? <pMa, friendship. 




Sing. 


Dual. 




Plur. 


N. $dl-a, 




N. 


(flXl-ai, 


G. (fiXi-ag, 1 


N. A. V. yili-a, 


G. 


tyikt-dSv, 


D. qikl-a, 




D. 


(fckl-aig, 


A. (ftXi-av, 


G. D. wM-cuv. 


-ff" \ftU-ag, 


V. cpi\l-a. 


% 


V. 


<piXi-cu. 


Nouns in y 


make the accusative in tfv, and 


the Vocative 3 


in ^, and the rest like Movaa : 


thus, 


7) Tipr}, honour. 






Sing.^ 


Dual. 




Plur. 


N. TLll-n 




N. 


rip-al, * 


G. T^M-?]?, 


N. A. V. t^-«, 


G, 


Tl/ll-CJV, 


D. t^-*?, 




D. 


T(,jLi-oc7g, 


A. Ti\.i-r\v, 


G. D. Tl[*-a7v. 


A. 


Tip-dg, 


V. Tlll-7]. 




V. 


Tlfl-CCl. 



called pure, because it forms a syllable of itself, without be- 
ing mixed with a consonant. 

The termination in a, which makes ag in the Genitive, is 
generally long. Hence words in a contracted, as 'j^^ra, 
(A.va, Sac. make ag. For the same reason, tvkdxa makes 
evXdxag. But QMav&a, whose final a is short, makes dv.dv- 
&rig. 

1 From this Genitive in ag, is derived the ancient Geni- 
tive of the first declension of Latin nouns, as Paterfamilias, 
From the Dative in at or a, is formed the Dative in ae. 
The similarity between the Accusative in av and the Latin 
am, is obvious. 



21 



Nouns in ag make the Genitive in ov, 1 and 



the Dative in 
thus, 



a. 



and the rest like Movoa 



N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 



Sing-. 
xccfil-ag, 

XUfll-QV, 

xapi-cc^ 

XCC[ll-CCV, 
TCC/Al-CC. 



Tcx(iCaQ > a steward. 

Dual. 



N. A. V. Tdfii-cc, 
G. D. Tccfti-aiv. 



N. 

G. 

D. 

A. 

V. 



Plur. 
x up i -at, 

TCipl-aiQi 

Tcc[At-ag, 
xafxl-av. 



Nouns in yg make the Genitive in ov, the 
Accusative in yv, and the Vocative in ??, and 
the rest like Movoa : 2 thus, 



1 Some nouns in ag make the Genitive in a as well as 
ov ; as, IIv&uyoQag, G. -ov and -«. UaxQulojug, G. -ov and 
-a. Some keep a exclusively ; as, Gcopag, G. Gco^a ; 
BoQQag, G. Boypa ; JEaxavag, G. JZaxctva ; ndnnag, G. 
rtdnncc. These Genitives in a were the Doric form. 

2 In order to form the V. the termination of the N. is 
commonly shortened. Hence the following make the V. in 
a : nouns in xr\g ; .compounds in nrjg, as nvvomrjg ; nouns in 
f}g derived from [aztqw, 7iwAw, xglfto), as yeopexQrig ; or de- 
noting nations, as Tltgarig Persian, V. HtQGa, but IIfooi]g 
the name of a man, IltQat} ; "kayvr\g^ (uevalyjirig, nvQtt'mirig 
also make a. But Air\rr\g, alvaoixY\g^ y.alltkafAnixi}g make 
^?. Nouns in (sxr\g make a and r\. 

The iEolians and Macedonians adopted the termination 
a, even in the N. of these nouns : thus, Innoxcc for iti n 6 xrjg, 
v6<f*foiyeyexa for vscpehriyeQtxrig. Hence the Latin N. Po'z- 
ta, Jlthleta, etc. 



22 



c 




tsXcqvy)?, a publican 


• 


*r s J n £- 


Dual. 


Plur. 


N. re Xoj v-tjg, 




N. 


zeXoiv-ai, 


G. TeXoJV-OV, 


N. A. V. xeXo\v-tx, 


G. 


TeXwV-ODl., 


D. reXcov-rj, 




D. 


TeXwv-ccig, 


A. Ta\o*v-7}v, 


G. D. TeX(f)V-CLVV, 


A. 


zeXoiv-ag, 


V. zeXcov-f], 




V. 


reXoiv-cu. 


< 


Second Declension. 






6 Aoyog, a word. 




Sing. 


Dual. 


Plur. 


N. Xoy-og, 




N. 


Xoy-oi, 


G. Aoy-oi>, 


N. A. V. Xoy-co, 


G. 


Xoy-ow, 
Xoy-oig, 
Xoy-ovg, 


D. Ao/-w, 




D. 


A. Ady-o^,-- 


G. D. Xoy-oiv. 


A. 


V. Xoy-e. 




V. 


Xoy-ot,. 1 




to tepov, a temple. 




Sing. 


Dual. 


Plur. 


N. leg-ov, 




N. 


leg-a, 


G. leg-ov, 


N. A. V. leg-m, 


G. 


hg-OJV, 


D. fep-w, 

A. ££0-0 J/, 


G. D. leg-oiv. 


D. 
A. 


leg-dig, 
hg-a, 


V. leg-ov. 




V. 


leg-ct. 


o Aecot 


£ /Atf people. Attic form. 


Sing. 


Dual. 


Plur. 


N. Af-ojff, 




N. 


Xe-w, 


G. Af-co, 


N. A. V. Af-cJ, 


G. 


Xe-wv, 


D. /£-<?, 




D. 


Xe-wg, 


A. Af-wV, 


G. D. Af-coi/. 


A. 


Xe-olg, 


V. Xe-oyg. 




V. 


Xe-co. 



1 The second declension of Latin nouns is analogous to 
this : thus, Xoyog, Dominus, anciently written Donunos ; 
Xoyov, Domini ; Xoyco, Domino, anciently Dominoi ; Xoyov, 
Dominum, anciently Dominom; Xoye, Domine, etc. 



23 



to evyccov, 1 fertility. Attic form. 



„ Sing. 


Dual. 




Plur. 


N. tvye-cov, 




N. 


tvye-o), 


G. tvye-w, 


N. A. V. evye-w, 


G. 


evye-wv, 


D. evye-co, 




D. 


wye-tog, 


A. tvyt-ow, 


G. D. evye-wv. 


A. 


evye-co, 


V. evye-oov. 




V. 


evye-o). 




Third Declension. 






6 ocojyp, a saviour. 




Sing. 


Dual. 


Plur. 


N. Gwrrjg, 


^ 


N. 


GOirfio-tg, 


G. O(t)ir,g-og. 


N. A. V. Gwx^g-e, 


G. 


GCOTtjg-OJV, 


D. OWT?J^ 


rv w ■*. ' 


D. 


Gcorrjg-Gi, 


A. orcor?J^-a, 


G. D. owzrjQ-oiv. 


A. 


GwrrjO-ag, 


V. 60)T6Q. 




V. 


GO)i?iQ-eg. z 



1 One neuter in ojs, %Q6wg, a debt, is found. 

2 The correspondence of the third Declension of Latin 
nouns with the third of the Greek is obvious. In the plural 
of the three Declensons, it is striking. 

It has been conjectured that all nouns of this Declension 
originally ended in g, and that the genitive was formed by 
the insertion of o before g, as it is still in oqig, oqiog ; (ivg^ 
fivog ; ijpwg, ijgwog, etc. thus yvvaixg, og ; ugufig, og ; kv- 
aXwng, og; priyg, og; yvng, og, etc. On this principle, the 
terminations were ilnldg, og ; nvgg, og ; iltqavrg, og, etc. 
The effect of time on language is to abbreviate words, par- 
ticularly those which occur most frequently ; hence ifidvTg 
has been abbreviated into l(A<xg, ngdyfuaxg into ngdypct, 
nodg, into novg, etc. Sometimes one, and sometimes the 
other, of the two final consonants is dropt ; thus (lUQxvgg is 
softened sometimes into fudgrvg, and sometimes into pag- 
ivg; dilqivg, into dflqh and delqig. 

This analogy takes place in the Latin third declension, of 



Sing. 
N. ooZ^a, 
G. ocofia-Tog, 
D. ow^u-xt,, 
A. aou/ta, 



24 
to 6G>/ua, a body, 

Dual. 



N. A. V. oat^a-re, 

G. D. 60)[AU-TOlV. 

ACCUSATIVE. 



N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 



f Pluiv 

GWfilCC-TOJV, 
OMflU-GV, 
GGjfAa-TCC, 
GO)[ACl-T<Z. 



Nouns in ^ vg, avg, ovg, whose Genitive 

ends in og pure, change § into v, 1 as ftotpvg, 

a bunch of grapes, fiorpvog, A. fioxgw? 

Barytons in ig and vg, whose Genitive ends 
in og impure, make both a and v ; as iptg^ 

strife, G. t'gidog, A. £<p*(5a and I'giv? 



which the termination was 5, and which formed the Genitive 
by the insertion of i, as it is still in sus, mis ; plebs, plebis ; 
heros, herois ; and in pacs, pacts ; regs, regis, etc. Hence 
nods has been abbreviated into nox, lacts into lac, mppellec- 
tils into suppellex, etc. On the same principle the termina- 
tions were lapids, is ; dents, is ; vers, is ; leons, is, etc. It 
seems indeed as natural that orbis should be formed from 
orbs, as urbis is from urbs. To pursue the analogy to the 
end, arbors, honors, labors, are softened into arbor, and some- 
times into arbos, etc. 

1 Hence the Latin Accusative of the third Declension 
in n and m. 

2 ylccag also makes laav ; Alg, Atog, makes Ala ; ygovg 
makes ygoa. The Poets frequently use the regular termi- 
nation in a. 

3 Ktelg, nleidog, has both terminations. Ar^QGyjiv-rig 



25 
VOCATIVE. 



The termination of the Vocative either, 1. 
shortens the long vowel of the Nominative, as 
"JExtg)?, Hector, V.'Exzop; or 2. drops c, as 
fivg, a mouse, V. juv ; or, 3. changes g into y, as 
tccAccs, miserable, V. taA&v. 1 



THE DATIVE PLURAL 



is formed from the Dative singular by insert- 
ing g before c ; as, ocoiijp^ a saviour P Gcojrjgt, 6co- 
rrjpac ; yvip, a vulture, yunl, yvyL But d, #, v> rj 
are dropped for the sake of softness, as Aa/Lind- 
di, Aa/maoi. Ovti is changed into ovgi ? as w- 



nrovxiy Tv/ijovoi, 



makes ea and r\v. X&gig, a Grace, has ^dqixa ; yuQig, fa- 
vour, has yaqiv. 

1 The consonant preceding the g final of the Nominative 
had been dropt, but re-appears in the Vocative, which is 
thus shortened, as zaXotvg, V. xctkav. 

Some Vocatives remain the same as their Nominatives : 
as, 

1. Participles. 2. 'Odovg, and itovg ; but Oldlnov and /«A- 
motiov are sometimes found. 3. Oxyton Nouns in eg and vg, 
as iknlg, %\a[ivg. 4. Nouns in r\v, as noifir^v. 5. Oxytons 
in cdv, as JSctpnrjdoiv. 6. Agxyiq, ftr\Q, THr\o, etc. 

But the Poets, in many of these, prefer the termination 
shortened either in quantity or in the number of letters. 
Nouns in eig, evxog, make the \ T . in et and tv, as ^aQiug, 
V. %aQut, and %ugitv. rivai% makes yvvm\ cival often 
makes avu. 

3 



26 

Words ending in $ after a diphthong, add i to 
the Nominative Singular; as Tvnelg, being 
beaten, Tvnelci. 1 

Nouns syncopated make the Dative in aai ; 
as 7iaxrf^ p a father, rcar/pi, nctTpl, nctTgaoi? 

CONTRACTION. 

Two syllables, in which two or more vowels 
meet together, are often contracted into one. 

A contraction of two syllables into one, 
without a change of letters, is called Synare- 
sis ; as td^i, t*//*«, a wall. 

If there is a change of vowels, it is called 
Crasis ; as lefyeogj refyovg. 

Contraction takes place in every Declen- 
sion. 

In the First Declension, ea is contracted in- 
to fj ; as, 



1 Except xras, v.T8Gi; dgopsvg, dgo^iaL ; vhvg, vuac ; 
ovg, dal ; nov^ goal ; which are regular from xrm, dgo- 
ju*T, vlti\ cJr?, noot. Tgelg makes rgcoL 

2 This is done to avoid harshness. Thus in dvdgdoi, d 
is inserted, because g never follows v. FaaTtjg retains ya- 
avtjgoi, Xdg makes X € 9 ^ ^ rom tne P oet i c X*Q*- 

These rules apply to adjectives and participles, as well 
as to substantives. % 



27 



yea, yi}, the earth. 





Sing. 


N. 


yta, yn x 


G. 


ytag, yrjg, 


JD. 


7 e ft-> 7Vi 


A. 


ytccv, yrjv, 


V. 


yea, yr\, etc 



Pea, and all other terminations, drop th 
former vowel ; as, Igda, ipa, the earth, G. ipz* 
as, ipas, etc. d/zAoTf, dnArj, simplicity, G. djiXo- 
r^g ? djiArjg, etc. 

In the Second Declension, if the latter vow- 
el is short, the contraction is in ov ; if long, 
the former vowel is dropt ; l as, 
6 voos; the mind. 

Dual. 

I 

N. A. V. i/-ow, w, 

G. D. V-OOIVJHV, 




N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 



v-oog, ovg, 

V-OOVj ov, 
v-6co, a>, 
v-oop, ovv, 

V-OS, OV. 



G. 
D. 
A. 

V. 



Plur. 

V-OOl, 01, 

v-owV) wv+ 
v-6oig, o7g, 
v-6ovg, ovg* 
v-oot, ol. 



Contracts of the Third Declension. 
1. Nouns in v$, vog, have only two contrac- 
tions, veg and vag into vg ; thus, 2 



1 The compounds ofvoog and Qoog are not contracted in 
the Neuter Plural, nor in the Genitive : thus we say, evvoa, 
evpocov, not evva, tvvcov. 

2dog is contracted thus : j^ing. N. odog, awg, A. odor, 
6mv : PL A. adovg, Gaag, Goig ; Gaa, a«. 

2 Nouns in ovg also contract the same cases : as fiovg, 



23 



N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 



Sing. 

fiOTQ-VQQ, 
ffOTQ-Vlr, 
pOTQ-VV, 
fiOTQ-V. 



ftojpvs, a bunch of grapes. 

Dual. 



N. A. V. pOTQ-ve, 

G. D. fiOTQ-VOW. 



N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 



PJur. 

fiOTQ-Vtg, VQ. 
fiOTQ-VGl, 

fioTQ-vag, vg. 



2. Nouns in eg and i have three contractions 
it into i, itg and tag into ig : thus, 
6 optg, a serpent 

Dual. 



N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 



Sing*. 
oy-tg, 
oy-iog, 
ow-ii\ t 
ocp-iv, 



N. A. V. o<p-te; 
G. D. ocp-lotv. 



N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 



v Plur. 

Sq-ictg, ig, 
ow-itg, ig. 



Neuters in t make the plural in ia > c. 
to <jlv7)7ii, mustard. 





Sing. 


Dual. 




Plur. 


N. 


oivT]7l-t) 




N. 


Giviqu-va, i. 


G. 


Gwr\n-iog, 


N. A. V. Givrin-it, 


G. 


Givrjn-iwv, 


D. 


GWTjTl-U, I, 




D. 


GlV7\ll-lGl, 


A. 


Givrin-t,, 


G. D. GCVf]7l-iotV. 


A. 


Givrin-iu, I, 


V. 


oivrin-i. 




V. 


GlV7]7lHCC^ £. 



PL N. A.^otg and /?o'«e, /ftw. iVai/s makes in the PI. A. 
vuag, vctvg. 

1 This form in eg, tog, is properly Ionic. Nouns in vg are 
more commonly inflected in tog, D. ti\ ti. Dual. N. tt, G. 
*W. PL N. V. teg, tig, G. tow, D. *aj, A. tag, teg. But 
the most usual form of the Genitives is the Attic, in twg 
and sow. 



29 



3. Nouns in co and cog * have three contrac- 
tions, oog into ovq, oC into o?, and oa into co : 
thus, 

*? aidag, modesty. 
Dual. 

N. A. V. a/^cJ, 

G. D. aid-o7v. 



Sing. 
N. «^-w^ 
G. ald-oog, ovg, 
D. aid-6L o7, 
. ctio-occ, w, 
V. aid-ol. 



Pluf. 
JNT. «#-of\ 
G. aid-wv % 
D. ald-olg, 
A. ald-ovg, 



4. Nouns 
Genitive £os, 
«* into ^, ees 



Sing. 
N. Saod-tvg, 
G. fiaod-fog, 
D. paod-t\\ 67, 
A. fiaod.-ia, 
V. 6aod-6v. 



Sing. 
N. mfax-ug, 

G. TltXtK-tOQ, 

D. 7i£A£x-f/', ££, 
A. ntken-vv, 
V. mfex-v. 



in **;?, 2/c, and i/, making, in the 
have jftmr contractions, «t into *?, 
and *as into *fc : thus, 

o ficcoiAeug, a king. 
Dual. 



N. A.V. fictod-ie, fj, 
G. D. (laod-tow. 

6 ne'Aexvg, an axe 
Dual. 

N. A. V.TuAfWf,??, 

G. D. nslw-toiv. 



Plur. 
N. flcccd-teg, e7g* 
G. @aod-60)v, 
D. @aod-6voi, 
A. fiaod,-eag, e7g, 
V. ft cod-teg, e7g< 



Plur. 
N. mte'x-eeg, eig, 
G. nekey.-tayv, 
D. ns kin-eat^ 
A. nektyt-eag, 6ig^ 

V. 7T6kbX^66g, 61Q. ; 



1 These terminations are similar to those of the Fourth 
Latin Declension, gc/w, gradus. 

2 The V. Singular ends in o7. These nouns are used on- 
ly in the Singular. 

3* 



30 



Neuters in v make the N. A. and V. PL in ea, i^ 







to <x6Tv, a city. 








^Sing. 


Dual. 




Plur. 


N. 


aar-f, 




N. 


aOT-€Ct, t] r 


G. 


Ct6T-£0g, 


N. A. V .aar-«, ??, 


G. 


(XOT-8COV, 


D. 


a6T-€l\ ££, 




D. 


KGT-tGl^ 


A. 


aox-v. 


G. D. UGT-tOW. 


A. 


CCOT-eCi, Tj* 


V. 


CCGT-V. 




V. 


a<7T-£«, 7\. 



5. Nouns in r^g, eg, and og, are contracted in 
every case, except the N. and V. Sing, and 
the D. PL thus, 

? J 9 i} 19 7 1?> a galley ivith three banks of oars. 

Dual. 



Sing. 
N. TQUjo-iig, 
G. TQiiiQ-eog r ovg, 

D. TQlTiQ-a)\ et, 

A. rp^/p-ec*, ?;, 
V. TQirjo-eg. 



N. A. V. TQll}Q- 

G. D. TQiyo-eoiv, 
olv. 



Plur. 
N. TQiriQ-eeg, ecg^ 
G. TQiriQ-itav, wv, 
D. TQiriQ-eoi, 
A. TQiriQ-eug, sig t 
V. TQMjQ-eeg, eig. 



Neuters in es and oe make the N. A. and V. 
PI. in e«, ??. * 



1 Proper names in nX&ig are doubly contracted : thus, 
*HQOMl-trig, fjg, G. 'HgccuX-eeog^ iovg, -tog, oug, etc. 

Nouns and adjectives in ->ig pure, contract the A. into a, 
as well as into rj : thus, tvcpvrig, A. tvcpvia, evcpvri and £u- 

* Avr\Q, AyiuqxriQ, and &vy&TiiQ, are syncopated in all cas- 
es, except the N. and V. Sing, and the D. PL So also ap*?V r 
ugivog, agvog ; hvcov, v.vovog, kvvoq. To these may be 
joined naxriQ. [tyTriQ, and yaorriQ ; but they are not synco- 



« Sin 2- 

N. rny-og, 
G. xely-eog, ovg, 
D. ^/^r, **, 
A. reTy-og, 



31 

TO T€l A /°S> a V)ttlh 

Dual. 

N. A. V. TitjpUi y, 

G. D. T€tX" eocv ^ 
olv. 



Plur. 
N. ra'/-*«, q, m 
G. Tfcy-tojv, cdv, 
D. Tfiy-eo^ 

A. T£ //-£(*, r\, 

V. reiy-ea, -jy.j 



6. Neuters in as pure and pas are both syn- 
copated and contracted in wery case, except 
the N. A. and V. Sing, and the D. PL thus, 

to xegag, a horn. 

Sing. 
N. xtg-ctg, 
* G. xeg-caog by syncope %eg-aog by crasis nig-wg, 



D. nig-axi 


iteg-ai 


- K*0-£, 


A. xejp-a?, 






V. itig-ag. 


Dual. 




N. A. V. xto-ar* 


x£g-ae 


x/jp-tf, 


G. D. xf^-aro^ 


xeg-aow 
Plur. 


xep-wV. 


N. aeg-ara 


utto-aa 


- xtg-a 9 


G. xfp-aicov 


Xf^-aGOP 


xeg-cSv. 


D. xejp-aat, 






A. xtg-ciTct 


Ktg-cta 


xsjp-a, 


V. Meg-ma 


Ktg-ctet 


xtjp-a. 



7. Some nouns are contracted in if?er^ case : 
thus, €«p^ ??£, £Ae springs iapos, rfpog, etc. ^ ; 
Aa^ # stone, kaaog, Xaog p etc. 



pated in the A. Sing, in the G. or A. PL to avoid the similar- 
ity with 7i«rp«, firjTga, and yuoigct, of the first Declension. 



32 



IRREGULAR NOUNS. 
Some nouns have different genders in the 
singular and in the plural. l 

Some have different declensions. 3 



1 Masculine in the Sing, and neuter in the PL dlcpp-og, 
-a ; igez^-og^ -d ; £vy-og, -a ; /w-f/p-os, -a ; /mo#A-os, -a ; 
vtoT-og^ -a ; pim-og, -a ; GiT-og, -a ; ora&fi-og, -a ; rag- 
rap-os, -a; rgdyjil-og^ a. This neuter comes from the 
obsolete Sing, in ov. 

Masculine in the Sing, masculine and neuter in the Plural, 
deo^i-og^ -ol and -a ; xvxl~og, -oi and -a ; Aii#*>-0£, -ot and -«. 

Feminine in the Singular, feminine and neuter in the Plu- 
ral, xtlevd-og, -ov and -a. 

2 Some have different terminations in the Nom. as May- 
orjg and Mwoevg; vllg, vuvg and vlog; paxaQ, [Auttagg and 
fiandgiog ; ddngv, ddngvov ; nXavog, nlccvri ; arzcpavog, ore- 
opdi/rj ; oxgarog, crgarla ; nkaorrjg, TiXaoxrig ; <J7ra*>/£, (ma- 
vicc; devSoog, dtvdgov ; cie&koV) dtdkiov ; ftlg, &lv ; dogv^ 
do gag ; yo^f and yo-ya, etc. So we find iir\\a and, ^Acrra, 
TTQofiavoig and ngofiao^ yegovroig and ytgovot, etc. Thus 
in Latin ihematis for thematibus, etc. 

Some admit different inflections from the same Nomina- 
tive, as tlyg-ig, -tog and £&>£; ftttA-ig, -idog and -tozog; 
0ctk-r]g, -ov and ->?Toe ; " Ag-iqg, -ov , -* 0£ and -??ro£ ; the 
compounds of novg make in the Gen. nov and Tiodog, etc. 

Some nouns are declined from obsolete Nominatives, as 
yvv?], yvvctMOQy.from yvvuvi) ydlu, ydkaxzog, fromyuXa'Z; 
$nag, ijjiaiog; gpp*'ap, cpgiazog ; vdwQ,vdazog, s*£ 

'irjoovg makes 'Jtjoovv in the A. and Jiqoov in the other 
eases. 

Aiovvg makes Avovvv in the A. and Avow in the other 
cases. The name of Jupiter is thus varied : 

N \ ^j&j*** G. . D. , A. Zevv, V. Zev. 

I or B&evg, ^ ' ' 

Z*iv, Zr\vog, Zr}vi) Zyva, 

Alg^ Aidg, Au, Ai&, — ■ — 



33 

Some are undeclined. 1 

Some have one case only. 2 

Some have but two cases. 3 

Others have only three cases. 4 

Some have no singular, 5 others no plural. 6 



1 Aptots : dw for dupa ; xapa ; the names of the letters ; for- 
eign names not susceptible of Greek inflections, as ' A$Qoi.d\i. 

2 Monoptots : in the Sing. N. dug. V. eo zdv. In the PL 
N. xctTct%Xc!)'&eg. G. idoov. V. co nonot. 

3 Diptots : ctficpw, dfi(po7v ; (p&oleg, <p&oiag ; I7g, Xlv. 

4 Triptots : G. dklrjkoov, D. ciklrjl-oig, aig, oig, A. «A- 
A*jA-oi;£, ctg, a. — These have only the N. A. and V. fighag, 
dtfuag, fa'nocg, otlag, tfdog, ovccq, ocpelog. 

5 The names of festivals ; some names of cities, etc. 

6 'Alg, yfj) ehaiov, tivq, and many others known by the 
sense. 



Patronymics. 

From the father's name the Greeks form an appellative for 
the descendants, generally according to the following rules : 

1 . To form the names of Men, the termination of the G. 
of the father's name is changed mtoidtjg, as Kqovqv, Kqo- 
vlfyg ; *Ax(jtog, 'AxQtidrig. From names of the First De- 
clension, or which have t in the penult, the change is into 
ccdrjg, as Boq£ov, Bogedd^g ; ' HXiov, 'llkiddqg. If the pe- 
nult, is long, the change is into ladrig, a& TskufAorvog, Tekct- 
[uoviadrjg. 

The Ionic form is w*>, the Aeolic diog ; as Kqovimv, Kqo- 
vldtog. 

2. To form the names of Women, the termination is chang- 



34 
ADJECTIVES. 

Adjectives are declined like substantives. 

Declensions of adjectives are three : 
The first of three terminations ; 
The second of two ; 
The third of one. 

1. Adjectives of three terminations end in 




M. 



OQ 



F, 



N. 

OVl 



~J 


"> 


vr 9 


°?> . 


v> 


Q 


&$y 


CCGCC, 


ar; 


«?j 


aivct > 


ar; 


m? 


ewe*. 


*v ; 


fc<t, 


€G60C, 


sv; 3 


m 


etva, 


ey; 



ed into ag, ig, ivi], and wvri ; as IlQidpov, ITgiafilg ; ' Akqi- 
oiov, * Akqusiwvyi* 

A vowel is sometimes added, as Ilrjleiddfjg for Urilei- 
drjg ; or dropt, as NtjQivi] for Nrigtivri. 

1 Eog, f«, eov is contracted into ovg, «, ow, as ugyvg-eog^ 
ea, eov into dgyvg-ovg, «, ouy. 

^ 2 Oo£, 0*7, ooi/, and £0£, £?/, *o*>, are contracted^ into ou£, 
r\,ovv\ as a7r^~o'o^, 077, 00 v into dnl-ovg, 77, ouv ,• %qvg- 
eog, trj) hov into ^gva-ovg^ *?, ovv. 

3 MtltT-oeig, 0£<raa, oev is contracted into pefoT-ovg, ovg- 
G&i ovv j Tip-rjtig, ritGGu, r\zv into rip-rig, i}GGa, r\v. 



35 



ovg, 

ovg ? 

vg, 

vg, 

cov 9 

cov p 

caVj 

cos, 



OV6CC. 



ovaoa. 



eta, 



voce, 



ovoa< 



coaa, 



ovoa. 



C06CC. 



via. 



or 



ov; 



v ; 

VV) 

ov ; 
cor; 
ovv 
cog; 
og. 



Adjectives in og pure and pog make the fem- 
inine in a ; other adjectives in og make it in 
tf : x thus, 



Sing. 

N. [tCMQ-og, a, ov, 
G. [lCiXQ-0V,CCg,0V, 

D. /uaxp-aJ, «, co, 
A. {acm@-ov,civ,ov, 
V. (icMQ-e, a, oV 



Sing; 
N. nccl-og, *}, oV, 
G. nctl-ov, 17$, oiJ, 
D. xaA-co, ij, CO, 
A. xaA-ov, tjv, ov, 
V. xcU-i, 77, ov. 



fiaxpog, long. 
Dual. 

N. A. V. (ACMQ-Q) r 

a, w, \ 
G. D. iianQ-oiv, 
cuv, olv. 

xaAog, beautiful 



Plur. 

N. fJlCMQ-ol, Offc «, 
G. [ICiKQ-OW, 

D. fLtaxy-ojg,a7g,o7g, 
A. (ACMQ-ovq, dg, d, 
V. (tccxQ-ol, at, a. 



In the Dual and Plural like paxpog. 



1 Adjectives in *os and oos, not preceded by p, make the 
Fern, in f}. 
The Middle and New Attics use the termination og for 



36 



Four adjectives, aUog, t^lxovtoq, toiovtoq, 
Toaovrog; and four pronouns, 6g relative, avrag, 
and its compounds, ovrog, ixetvog 3 make the 
neuter in o. * 



nag, all. 

Singular. 

. nag, ticcgcc, nav, 

G. navTog, Tiaoyg, navrog, 

D. navrl, 7ido7j navrl 

A. Ttctvra, Tzaaav, nav, 

V. nag, naGa, nciv. 

r Dual. t 
1$. A. V. ncLvrz, -uuGcc. ndvre. 
. JJ. navxoiv, naacuv, nav 

TO IV, 

Plural. 
N. jictvTtg, nuocu, -navrcc, 
G. navxoyv, naocov, nccvron^ 
D. nave* TtdGctig* naGi, 
A. navxug, naaag, navra, 
V. ncivzeg^ ticcgcii, ndvxa. 



IxtXag, black. 

Sing. 
N. fiek-ug, aiva. av, 



G. tiil-avog, ulv>)g, avog, 

D. ^iX-avi, ahy, aw, 

A. ixtX-ava, aivuv, av, 

V. fiek-av, cuva, av. 

Dual. 
N. A. V. fit'X-ave, cmW, «i/£, 
G.D./U6A-ai/o^^, aivaiv^ dvocv. 



N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 



Plural. 

(Atk-aveg, aivai, ava, 

{lel-ccvcop, aivwv, dvwv, 

[ttX-aoi,, alvaig, ccai, 

fiek-avag, aivag, ava, 

fxtk-aveg, cuvat, avcc. 



N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 



xvndg, having been 
struck. 

Sing: 

Tvn-tlg, uGa, fV, 

Tvn-tvTog, eiGiig, tvrog^ 

Tvn-tvTt,, *ioi t h twit, 

Tvn-tvxa. eiGav. iv, 



TVTl-€ig, €IGCC, 



€V. 



masc. and fern, particularly in compounds and derivatives. 
Thus quis is used by Plautus for masc. and fem. 



1 ToiovTov, togovtov, and xaviov, neuters, are some- 
times found. 



37 



Dual 

N. A. V. TV7l-evie, eiGU, Ivie, 

G. D. ivn-iviovv, eiGctev, iv- 
xoiv. 

Plur.^ 
N. ivn-ivieg, elGat, evict, 

G. TVTT-iVTCDV, eiGOJV, iviWV, 

D. ivn-eiGi, eiGctig, e?Gc, 
A. ivn-evictg, eloag, evict, 
V. xvn-ivieg, eHooti, evict* 



Xapfeig, comely. 

Sing. 
N. %uqI-hq, e ggci, ev, 
G. %ctQi-eviog, eGGrjg, eviog, 
D. %ctQl-evu, e'ooy, evil, 
A. %ctQi-evict, eGoctv, ev, 
V. %ctQi-et, or-ev,eGOct, ev. 



Dual. 
G. D. %otQi-eviot,v, eGGctcv, iv- G 



ii^y}v > tender. 



Slug. 




N. Ttg-riv swot, 


ev, 


G. leQ-evog, ilvrjg^ 


evog, 


D. ieQ-evi, Hpiji 


evt,, 


A. TeQ-evct, eivctv, 


ev, 


V. TtQ-tV, etVOt, 


ev. 


t Dual. 




N. A. V. xeg-eve, elvct, eve. 


G. D. ieQ-ivotv, elvcttv, e'von 


Plur. 




N. lep-eveg, eivat, 


cVCt, 


G. xeQ-tvojv, eivcHv, 


evcov, 


D. itg-eGi, elvcug, 


eGi, 


A. ley-evag, elvctg, 


evct, 


V. itQ-eveg, eivotv, 


evct* 



TOW. 

Plur. 
N. %ctQi-evieg, eGGca, evict, 
G. %ctgi-evio)v, eGGwv, eviwv, 
D. %uQi-eiGi,, eGGctig, eiGi, 
A. %ctQi-evictg, eGGctg, evict, 
V. %aQi-evieg, eGGcti, evict* 



dovg, having given. 

Sing. 
&)f£, do v Get, dov, 
doviog, dovGtjg, doviog, 
D. do vie, dovurj, do vie, 
A. $6ira, dovGctv, dov, 
V. dovg, dovGct, dov. 

Dual. 
N. A. V. do vie j dovGa, do vie, 
G. D. doviotv, dovGctiv, dov- 

TOW. 



38 



N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 



Plur. 
dovitg, dovacu, dovrct, 
dovzcov, dovacav, dovrcov, 
do voi,, dowuig, doiai,, 
dovrag, dovaag, dovrct, 
dovrtg, dovocti, Sovtu. 



N. 
G. 
D. 

A. 
V. 



N. 
G. 

D. 
A. 
V. 

N. 
G. 



N. 

G. 

D. 
A. 



N. 
G. 



G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 



TiAaxovgj a cake. 

Sing. 

ft) °i*» M 

7lXcM~0VG, ovgg<x, ovv, 

TzXaK-OVVTOg, 0VG67}q, OVV 
TllctK-OVVTl, OVGGfy OflT£,lN 

nXccH-ovvxa, ovggocv, ovv, 
nlan-ovv otoV)OvoGct,ovv* 

Dual 
A. V.jiXctH-ovvre, ovggcc, 

ovvre, 
D. nkax-ovvTOiv, ovggcuv, 

OVVTOIV* 

., Plur. . 
nXayc-ovvreg, ovggcu, ovv- 

7l).aK-0UVTQ)V* OVOGU/V.OVV-'^ 
MOV, ** 

nXcM-ovai, ovGGcug, ovgl^ 
TtXaK-ovvrug, ovGGctg, ovv-A> 

nXcM-ovvreg, ovggcci, qvv 



o£ug, sharp. 

Sing. 
oi-ygf eicc, 
ol-tog, eiag, 

0%-vvf tiav, 



*og, 



3 Dual. 

A. V. d|-«, */«, £e, 

D. 6%-toiv, eiuiV) iow. 

Plur. ■, 

o%-ug, e7g, *7o£, *«, 

d|-*W, */«££, *CF£, 

o£-a*s, *7e, */«£, *«, 



levyvvg, joining. 

Sing.^ 
Cevyv-vg, vgcc, vv, 
&vyv-vvTog, vGtjg, vvxo 
£evyv-vvTi y vcy, vvTt, 
Cevyv-WTct) vGav, vv, 
^evyv-vg, vg&, vv* 



1 The Masc. form of Adjectives of this termination Is ap- 
plied to fem. nouns, as rjdvg ampi], Horn. 

s These adjectives sometimes form the ace. sing, in £or, 
as svgict novrov, Horn. 



39 



Dual. ,G. TV7t-ovvTog< ovoqg,ovvroQ, 

N.A.V. fevyp-vpxe, wa, i;fr£,D. xvn-ovpxi, ovGrj, ovvxi y 

A. TV7Z-0VVTCI) OVGCCV, OVV, 

V. Tun-cop^ ovoa, ovv. 

Dual. 
N.A.V. xyn-ovvTt, ovgci, ovv- 

X6* 



G.D. &vyp-vvxoiv, vgquv^ vv 

TOW. 

, Plur ~ 

N. &Vyv-VVT£Q, VOCCl, VPXCt, 

G. Cevyv-vvrwV) vgouv, vptcov, 
D. £avyv-vGi, vGaig,vGi, 
A. ^evyp-vvxeg^ voag, vvxcc, 
V. &vyp-ypxtg, vgou, vpxa. 



ixcov, willing. 

N. ix-MV) qvgci, oV, 

G. i%-ovxog, ovGrjg, ovxog, 

D. ix-ovxi, ovarii opxi, 

A. * c x-d*>ra, ovguv, oV, 

V. «x-a;v, ovGcc, 6v. 

Dual. ' 

N.A.V. £K-6vT£, OVGCC, QVXt, 
G. 15* tH-QVTQlV^ OVGQUV, op- 
TOIV. 

Plur : 
N. ix-ovxeg, ovgcm, ovxa, 

G. £K-0VX(OV^ OVGCOV, OVXOJV) 

D. in-ovGi, ovGaig, ovgi, 
A. £x-ovxag, ovGag, ovxcc, 
V. in-ovxeg, ovgcu, ovxcc 



G. D. xvn-ovvxoiV) ovguw % 
ovvxoiv. 

Plur.^ 
N. xvn-ovvxeg* ovgcu. ovvxa^ 

G. XV7l-OVPXO)PftVGQ)V,OVVXOi)P, 

D. xvn-ovGij ovGoug, ovgi, 
A. xvn-ovvxag, ovGag, ovvxa. 
V. xvn-ovvxtg, qvgui>, ovvxa 



tvixgov, about striking. 

N. xvn-ow^ QVGU, ow, 



ti(icov p honouring* 

Sing x 
N. Tift-ajV) caffw, cUy, 
G. xifi-mvxog^ oia?]?, wvxog, 
D. xi{i-a)vxi) €ua?y, coWf, 
A. xifi-covxa* wGav. cJv, 
V. xift-top, cu(y«, w^. 

Dual. 
N.A.V. xifA,-a)vx6) cJ(7«, cuW*. 

|G. D. Xl[.l-OJVXOlV) WGCCIV) wv- 

xow. 

Plur. 
N. xift-cuvxeg, waai, aipxa^ 
G. xifA-awxcop, coffoJV, aWaw, 

D. Xlfl-COGl, OJGCtig, CO(7J, 

A. xip-aivxag, wGag, mpxa, 
V. xifi-oivxeg, wa«(, o3Wa. 



40 



ictmg, having stood. 



iEjv(fo)Q > having struck. 

N. xexv(p-tog, via, og, 

G. xexvcp-oxog, vlag, 6xog y 

D. xexvy-oxi, via, oxi, 

A. xexvcp-oxa, vlav, oV, 

V. xtxvcp-tog, via, 6g* 

Dual ; 
N. A. V. xtxvq-oxe, via, oxe, 

G. D. xexvcp-oxoiv, vioav, 6- G. D. iax-toxoiv, daunt, cJ- 
t(w. row. 





, ( SiD ^ 


\ 


N. 


tGT-MC, 


to a a, 


w Sf 


G. 
D. 


iox-mxog, 
tax-ant,. 


toarjg, 


cotog, 
toll) 


A. 


iax-toxa, 


toaav, 


o}g, 


V. 


i ax-tog* 


W(J«, 


OJ£. 




. Dual. 




N. 


A. V. £(77- 

- f 


d)X6. CuGCi 

' 1 


, fore, 



Plural. 
N. xexvcp-oxeg, viai, oxa, 



Plural. 
N. iax-toxeg, toaai, toxct, 



G. X£XV(f-OXtoP, VltoV, OTtoVyG. iax-toXtoV, toOtoV, toXtoV, 

D. xzxvy-oai, victig, 6a v, D. iax-toai, toaaig, con*, 

A. x£xvqs-6xag, vlag, ox a, A. iax-toxug, to'aag, toxoc, 

V rexvqp-oxtg, vluv, oxa. V. £Gi-cor££, waa^ cJrof. 



2 Adjectives of two terminations end in 



M. F. 

OS, 

vg P 

GOV; 

cop, 
<0£j 



N. 
ov: 
av ; 

€*} 

ov i 

(OV. 



41 



&So£og, glorious. 





Sing. 


Dual. 


Plur. 


N. 


ivdo£-og, ov, 




N> ivdo^-Qi, Of, 


G. 


ivdo^-ovj 


N. A. V. ivdol-o), 


G. ivdo^-oDV, 


D. 


ivdoj;-w, 




D. ivdo^-oig^ 


A. 


k'vdo'£-ov, 


G. D. ivdo%-oiv. 


A. ivdoi-ovg, «, 


V. 


tvdo'£-e, ov. 




V. evdo'g-oi, a. 




deivag, perpetual. 




Sing. 


Dual. Plur. 


N. 


a€iv-ag 1 uv, 




N. aelv-avreg, avxu. 


G. 


aeiv-avTog, 


N. A. V. deiv-avze^ 


G. a£iv-avxtav % 


D. 


aeiv-uvxi, 




D. ccflv-aoi) 


A. 


auv-avxa, «*>, 


G. D. aeiv-avtoiv* 


A. cc6tv-ccvTag t ccvra. 


V. 


cceiv-av. 




V. aeiv-avT€g 1 avxa* 




(xqqtjv, male. 


• 




Sing. 


Dual. Plur. 


N. 
G. 


cipQ-tvog, 


N. A. V. aQQ-tve, 


N. app-eveg, evcc* 
G. aQQ-tvwv, 


D. 


H «QH v h 




D. CKQ@-€6l, 


A. 
V. 




N. G. aQQ-a'voiv. 


A. aQQ-evug, evu, 
V. uQQ-veg, tvct. 



Sing. 

N. akrjd-jg, Jgji 

G. akr}6-eog,ovg, IN. A. V. dk^d-ie^^ 

D. uXrid-ti\ *7, 



aty&rjg, true. 

Dual. Plut\ 

N. aktid-teg^7g,ea,rj. 



A. dkfjd-ia, f}^ eg. 



G. D. dknd-iow, oiv, 



4* 



G. uXrid-tojv, cov, 
D. akrid-tGi, 
A. dkr]d-tag,67g^ctty 
V. ukrid-eeg^g^atf, 



42 



Sing. 

N. ^vx a Q 1 ^ h 
G. *i!/ap--£ro£ 5 
D. evyay-M) 



evx<xpi?i acceptable. 

Dual. 



Plur. 



N. A. V. €V%UQ-l,T£, 

G. D. evxccQ-lzoiv. 



G. evj^ccp-iTODv^ 

D. £V%aQ-MJl, 
A. £U/ap-m*9l, £T«, 



dinovs, two footed. 

Sing. Dual. 

N. din-ovg, ouv, 
G. din-odog^ N. A. V. &W*, 
D. din-odi, 

G. D. dtnod-ow. 



A. dm-oda^ov^ovv^ 
V.din-ovgftv, ovv. 



Sing. 

G. <*&*xp-i;o£, 
D. cx^axp-f/", 
A. uda%Q-w A v, 



Plur. 
N. dln-odeg, oda, 
G. dtn-odcov, 
D. din-OGi, 
A. dtn-odag, oda, 
V. din-odeg, odu. 



adaxQvg, tearless. 

Dual. Plur. 

|N. a#aKp-i>££,i>s,t*a, 
N. A. V. a&xxp-t'f, IG. aefax^-ucui', 

D. dSoMQ-VGI,) 



G. D. oidoMQ-vow. 



eccHfgooV) sober. 

Sing. Dual. 

G. oojq.(j-ovog, N. A. V. oaxpQ-ove, 
D. oajtyQ-opi, 

A. ocoqrp-oi'a, oi>,jG. D. GwcpQ-ovoiv. 
V. owyg-ov. 



A. dSdx^-vag^vg^va^ 

V. uddMQ-VlQftQ) V(X. 



Plur. 
N. Gto<f>g-ov£ £, ovoi % 

G. GOSCpQ-OVCOV, 

D. <FaJ<jp£-o<?£, 
A, ffco^-c^c<^, o^a, 
V. GmcpQ-oveg^ ova. l 



1 In the same manner are declined Comparatives ; but 



43 



(ityaAifTcop, magnanimous. 

Sing. Dual. Plur. 

N. A.V. (xeyulriT 

QQt, 

G. D. fi(yalf]T-o 
ooiv. 



G. fAtyakriT-Qjjog, 
D. tAtyakriT-OQi, 
A»(A£yukr]T-o@cC) op, 

V. (4€ydht]T-0()i 



N. [itycdtji-OQeg, op<* f 
G. (ifyafotT'OQODV) 
D. ft€ya?>qT-o@oi) 
A. [teyaXrjTOQag* oqcc, 
V. fteyaXrjT-QQeg, oqcc> 



JSing. 
N. evye-wg, wv, 
G. evye-co, 
D. evyt-cp, 
A. evye-cov, 
V. evye-wg, tov. 



evytGog, fertile* 
Dual. 

N. A. V. svye-oo, 

G. D. evys-opv. 



„ Plur ' 
N. £%-qi, co, 

G. ivye-cov, 

D. £l//6-0)£, 

A. evyt-wg, w, 
V. evye-co, co. 



Adjectives of one termination are, — the 
Cardinal Numbers from nevie to ixaroV, both in- 
clusive. Some are Masc. and Fern, only : * 
such are, 1. those formed with a noun unal- 
tered in the last syllable, as evptv, fiaxpav^v, 
/uaxpdxeip. 2. derived from naify and /MJTfjp 9 
as andicop, o/uofiiJTcop. 3. in ^s, ^tos, and g>s, «- 



they syncopate and contract the A. Sing, and the N. A. V. 
Plur. thus, 

Sing. A. [t6i£-ova, oa, o>. 

PL N. V. peiC-oveg, otg, ovg, — ova, oa, <o; 
t A. peiS-ovctg, ocxg, ovg, — ova, oa, w. 

1 The neuter is expressed by another adjective ; thus, 
for the neuter of agna^, uquuktmov is used. 



44 



jog 9 as <idfir}§i tJilh&v^Qj dyvcog. 4. ending in £ 
and ip 9 as apna£ 9 /acovv^ aiyi'Aiif/. 5. in ag 9 apog* 
and tg 9 tdog 9 as tfvydg 9 dvccAxtg. 



IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. 
Miyag and nokvg have only the Nom. and 
Voc. Masc. and Neuter of the Singular, and 
borrow the other cases from /utydA-og, rj 9 ov 9 and 
noAA-6g 9 gi, 6v : thus, 



fieyag 9 great. 

Sing. 
N. META2, p*yilq 9 ME'- 

TA, 
G. peydl-ov, yg 9 ov, 
D. (A€yd?-cp, r\, w, 

A. ME! TAN, txeyaXriv, ME'- 

TA 
V. ME'TA^eyd^META 



Dual. 
N. A. V. fifydl-co, 
G. D. iAeyul-cw 9 



a. 



CO. 



tuv, Qiv 



Plur. 

N. [teycxl-oi) ca 9 «, 

G. (jt6yal-(0v 9 coi/, co*>, 

D. peydl-cug, aig, <w, 

A. ntydl-ovg, ctg, a, 

V. i*eycd-oi 9 at, a. 



noAvg 9 much. 

Sing. 
N. IL0Af2 9 TioMh no- 

at;\ 

G. ttoAA-ou, ??<?, ou, 

D. TTOH-CO, ^f, cS, 

A. nOAT y N 9 nollnv, TLO- 

at; 
v. no at, noUn, no at! 

Dual. 
N. A. V. 7ioAA-co, a, co\ 
G. D. TCoAA-on', «7^, qiv> 



Plur. 



N. 7ioAA-ot, 
G. ttoAA-coV, 
D. 7tokl-o7g 9 
A. 7roAA-oi;?, 
V. 7roAA-ot 






4» 



c<. 



2 



1 The Poets decline the Masc. of nolvg like d$i/£* 
s To these may be added juaxap, ^«K«^« e 



45 
COMPARISON. 

The Comparative is formed by the addition 
©f repog, the Superlative by the addition of ra- 
jog, to the Nominative ; as yiaxdp, fiaxap-Tepog, 
fiaxap-Tccjog. 

Adjectives in og drop g; as /uaxp-og, orepog, 
ouxTog. If the penultima is short, o is changed 
into co ; as oocp-og, coiepog, coraiog. l 

Adjectives in ecg drop i ; as x a P^ €l ^ e^Q ^ 
cojaiog. 

Adjectives in ag, ^ and v$, add rtpog and ra- 
rog to the neuter ; as /Ltt'A-ag, /ueAav-iepog, raiog : 
Adjectives in cov to the Nom. Plur. Masc. as 
oaxppcov, acocppovea-T^pog, xaxog. 2 

IRREGULAR COMPARISON. 

In icov, larog . 3 
Base, aieypog, at6%icov, aioXiorog. 



1 Otherwise four short syllables would come together. 
To avoid three. Homer sometimes lengthens a short one. 

2 Tftncov forms nenuixeQog ; nicov, nwiegog ; ptaog, jie- 
GMTtQog, peoaiTctiog. 

3 Bct&vg, Pgadvg, fiQayvg, ylxwvg, ridvg, naivg, ra%vg, 
etc. make icov, covog, as well as rsgog, zarog. ITgefyjjvg 
and touvg sometimes form the super!. nytofiiGrog, dixiorog. 
Some of those also change the last syllable into gowv ; as 
ffu&vg, pdooow ; ylvnvg, yhvoGwv ; tol%vq, daGOM^ etc* 



46 



Hostile, 


eX&pog, 


iy&lcj&v, 


i'X&i6Tog. 


Fair, 


xaAog, 


TcaAAcoov, 


xccAAiorog. 


Glorious, 


xvdiog, 


xvdicov, 


xvScorog. 


Easy, 


pad tog, 


pacov, 


paorog. 


Delightful, 


jepnvog, 


TZpjlVlCOV, 


jepnvioTog, 


Friendly, 


cftkog, 


(fikt(OV p 


(ptAioTog. l 



In tarspog, caxarog. 

Loquacious, AaAog, AaAiorepog, AaAiaraiog. 
Few, oAcyog, oAtyiorepog, oAcycararog. 

Ravenous, apna§, dpnayiGTepog. 
Stupid, fiAa£, fiAaxioTccTog. 

Lying, yevdrjg, ipevdtoxccTog, 

etc. 2 



1 These are formed from the substantives e'x&og, Hallos, 
etc. epilog makes also epil-xsQog, xaxog. 

2 Some are formed by the Attics in cuztQog, aixaxog ; 
some by the Attics and Ionics in sozegog, eaxazog. 



47 



Good, ceya&og, 



r CCfJlGlVCdV, l 
CCp€lCOV, 

XgtlGGlDV, 
XgUTlCdV, 

Aqicov, 



aptGTOg. 

Tcpariaiog. 4 

AcblaroSj 5 
Acpdiog. 
(peprarog, 
yegiGTog, 
(pepriGTog. G 



1 From a^vog, amoenus. * Ayv.fttoxu.TQg is rarely found. 
Thus Varro has used bonissimus and malissimus* 

2 From"j4QtiQ) valiant as Mars, or from uql, eminent* 

3 From ffovhopai, to wish ; as optimm from opto* 

4 From xgdrvg, brave. 

5 From Aw for &tlw, to wish. 

6 From yegw, to bear. 

In the application of these different words to ciya&og, 
that adjective must be understood to signify not only good, 
but strong and brave; qualities which were thought the 
most desirable in the early ages of civilization. Thus, 
among the Romans courage was thought the first and most 
manly virtue ; hence called Virtus, from Fir. 



48 



f xaxcorepog, 

n i <. j xaxtcov, 

Baa, xaxog, < 

Xetpwv, 

[ yepeiwv, 
Long, uaxpog, < * f * * 5 ' 

°f * * ^ (JLCCGGCQV, 

Great, [xeyag, fxet^cov, 



f fjLtxgoiegog, 
J (xetoiepog, 



Small, (iixpog, 1 fidcov, 

I IXdoocov, 
y rjoocov, 



xaxtOTog. 



%6lptGT0g. 

(laxpoictTogj 

fJLl^XlOTOg. 2 

fueycGTog. 



fitlGTOg. 

iAd/iozog. 3 

TjTUGTOg. 4 



Many, noAvg, < ^ ^f' > nAciarog. 5 



1 From %*(M*g z filth. 

2 From ptjKog, length. 

3 From elayvg, small. 

4 From */Wco, to sit low ; or from rjxct, lowly. 

5 From nleog, full. 

6 Sometimes a double comparison is found ; as from %tl- 
Qixiv, worse, is formed yjiyoTftJog; thus, in Shakspeare, uors- 
er. From fAeltov, less, ^eiore^og^ lesser ; from ctyelwv, more 
valiant, dofcozegog ; from x&kkt&v, fairer, xalXiajiepog ; 
from AcoiW, 7/iore desirable, faiurtpog ; from Trpdz^og, /or- 
mer\ nQOTtguicfijog, etc From iXaynnog is formed &a#£- 
GroTf^oV; from i'oycc^og, ioyarcoTufog ; from Kvdioxog, *v- 
diOTUTOQ ; from :rr^o~ro£, jfirs*, ngojTLGTog, Thus in the 
Psalms, Jkfo^i Highest, to express the superlative excellence 
of the Supreme Being. 



Comparisons are also made from nouns : 



49 



edyog, 

fiaoikev 

iraiQog, 

Geog, 

xapd-og, 

nltm-rig, 



vkylcov, akyiatog. 
g, rtQog, TCiTOg. 

irac^orarog, 
Gewregog, 



iqjv 



lorog. 
toTcctog. 



nkeovexr^g, nltovwrlGTCiTog. 
7ik7jXT-r]g, lorarog. 
nor-rig, iararog. 
fiy-og, iojv, lorog. 
vfiyiorrjg, v^QtaroreQog. 

CptoQ, tyOJQOTaXQg. 



avoy, 
acpuQ, 

£<J(W, 



Thus, in Latin, oculissimus* 

From a pronoun : 
avrog, ipse, avrorarog, ipsissimus. 

From adverbs : 



eyyvg, 



UVQ)-T8QOg, 

acpccQ-regog. 
ioto-rtgog, 
i^oi-regog, 
i tyyv-regog, 



TCCTOg. XCCTO) 

no QQ 



•yy~tO)v. 



xv.xog. 
rarog. 
rciTog. 
corog. 



YMTCD-T8()0g, rarog. 
, 7l0QQ0J-T£Q0g, TCiTOg. 
TZQO 6CO, 7ZQ0O0J-T£Q0g, TCCTOg. 

noct)i\ iiQOi'iat'tepog. rarog, 

071100). 



onto co-re @og, rarog. 
\v\pi, -> vxpiorog. 

From prepositions : 
ttqo, nyo-raQog, raxog, by sync and contraction nQwrog. 
xmeg, imsQ-Tagog, rarog, by syncope vnarog. 

The relation existing between certain adjectives of fre- 
quent occurrence in all the European dialects, in a similar 
irregularity of comparison, is remarkable. The following 
list, confined to one adjective, will prove that there is a 
stong analogy among them. 

Latin, bonus, melior, optimus. 

Welsh, da, gwell, gorau. 

Armoric, mat, guel. 

Irish, maith, niossfearr* 

Russian, xorote, lytchio. 

German, gut, besser, beste. 

English, good, better, best 
The two last seem of the same origin as dya&og, short- 
ened into 'yaft', fitkrfQog, ffalriorog. Similar to this com- 
parative is the Persian behter. The French, Italian, Por- 
tuguese, and Spanish, are not mentioned, as they are deriv- 
ed from the Latin. 

b 



50 



One. Sing. 
N. fig jti/a, IV,^ 
G. iv6g,fitag,ivoQ, 
D. 



tva. 



/iu«, evi) 



NUMERALS. 

Two. Dual. 

N.A. $uo 2 or dvw, 
G.D. dvo7v or dvelv. 3 



Three. Plur. 
N. rp£?s, rp/a, 



Two. Plur 

G. dvwv, 
D. <W. 



2^ 



jco^. 



G 

D. TQlOl, 



TOtft. 



Four. Plur= 

N. %£(5GaQ-S$, 

G. r£<7(T«pcyz/, 

D. raooapou 

A. TtGGaQ-aQ) 



1 Thus, oi!$a£, ovdef.ua) ovdlv ; and/ui;&?£, ju^dfyua,^* 
da'v- Aristotle uses ov&slg ; Homer, ou'r^. Ot-tf* *?£, ^w^- 
&' ev are used emphatically. From ejg is formed treQ-og, 
a, oi> ; and from ovdelg and (ar^dalg) ovdazegog and p?idtT6- 
gog. 

2 ^o is always used by the Attics ; it is an aptot in Ho- 
mer and Herodotus. "^u(£co is sometimes used in the same 
manner. 

3 Avelv is generally used as Gen. dv oh as Dat. From 
Sio is formed dtvrtQog and demarog. 

4 The numbers, according to their notation by the Greek 
alphabet, are as follows : 



sis, /, a, 1. 

<$uo,//, P\ 2. 

rtaoageg, 1111, 0, 4. 
TnWf, IT, *, 5. 

SB, n/, *, % 

«W, IT//, f, f 7. 

omtoi, IT///, 17, 8. 
*W«, IT////, #,9. 
fo'xa, -J, i, 10. 
IWexa, ^/, ta, 11. 



9to&Xa 9 All) i($\ 12. 
rptaxai&xa, Jf///, */, 13. 
T60Gagaxaid6xa)AJIJ/)i$ ,14. 
mvTtxaidaxa) AH) ie\ 15. 
iKKaldsxci) All!) §g\ 16. 
inxaxaldexa) AUlI) i?, 17. 
oxreoxatcfexa, ATLIIl)iri^ 18. 
ivveaKaideyM) A UIII1)W ,19. 
axo(K, ^4^, x', 20. 
nxoat efg, ^^4/, xa, 21. 
rptaxovra, AAA) t) 30. 



51 



reaoccQattovxct, AAA A, \i ,40. 

7t£VT1]K0VTCC) ]2[, V , 50. 

i%r\Y.OVXa, ]££A, ^ 60. ^ 
ipdo^ovxa, J^[AA, o, 70. 
oy8or\v.ovxa, ]3 AAA, n , 80. 
ivvtvriKovxa, JE^AAAA, 3, 

90. 
ixccxov, H, q , 100. 
diccxoGi-oi, ui,a, HH^ a , 200. 
rpjaxoffjo^, HHH, x , 300. 
XSXQCMOGlOl,, HHHH, i5, 400. 
TTeVTCMOOlO^ ]B[, <p', 500. 



inxcwoaioh, W.HH, i//, 70Q. 
oxT«xd r ^o* , ^HHH, ai, 800. 
ivvtwoGioi, ^HHHH, 5J. 

900. 

^a^o^, JC, a, 100 0. 
bwtiUoh, XX, p, 2000. 
ii€VTCwto%ifooi, ]x[ *, 5000. 
pv(>eo*, J/, *, 10,000. 
diopvQioi, MM, *, 20,0000. 
nevxamofxvgooc, J5j5^i>, 50,000, 

[100,000, 



i$ctKOGioi, 13^, # 5 600. 

To express the 9 units, the 9 tens, and the 9 hundreds, 
the Greeks used the letters of the alphabet. But as there 
are only 24, they used g, called inlay \iov, for 6 ; £, called 
nonna, for 90 ; and ®, called <J«V th, a n covered with an 
inverted Q, for 900. 

A mark is placed over the letters to express the numbers 
Placed under them, it expresses thousands : thus, i is 5, e is 
5000. The figures of the present year are awxf, 1825. 

In the Capitals, 



/, 1, is the mark of Unit ; 
IT, 5, the initial of ILivxt 
A, 10, ... Aina; 



77,100, is the init. of .fifocazw; 
X, 1000, . . . Xttm; 
itf, 10,000, . . Mvqioi. 



Each of these may be repeated four times : thus, IIII, 4 ; 
AAA, 30 ; MM, .20,000, etc. II inclosing a numerical 
letter, multiplies it by 5 : thus, EE, 50, etc. 

From 10 to 20, the large numbers may be placed first or, 
last, dixa dvo or dwdsna, 12. From 20, the largest num- 
ber is placed first, ii'xoai dvo, 22. From 30, the conjunc- 
tion is inserted, xqiomovxc*, xal dvo, etc. 

Of the ordinal numbers, ail under 20, except second, sev- 
enth, and eighth, end in xog* From thence upwards all end 
in ooiog. Thus, 1. ngojxog and nQOtegog. 2. devxtgog, 
3. xglxog. 4. xtxaQxog and xixQuxog. 5. nifinxog. 6. i'x- 
xog. 7. i'pdopog and ifidofjiaxog. 8. oydoog and oydouxog. 
9. i'vvccxog, tvaxog^ and uvaxog. 10. <5Vxaro£. M.ivdina- 
xog, 12. dojdinaxog, dvcodixaxog, and dvoKaidinazog, etc. 



52 



PRONOUN. 

Pronouns are divided into 
1. Personal. 



Ij*», I; 

6v, thou ; 
ov, of him 



3. Relative. 
°Si ty °9 who ; 
avr-og, rj, o, he, she, it. 



4. Demonstrative. 
ixeiv-og, ?), o, that ; 
ovrog, avTfy tovto, this. 



2. Possessive. 
ifi^o8 9 y 9 ov 9 my; 
&o£j g?}, gov, thy ; 
og or 6-oc, 7f, oV, Aw. { 5. Reciprocal, 

*friK«£«?, «, ov, our, o/w two; l ^ avxo ^ °f™y sel fj 



GCfmteQ-og, a, oi>, 2/cw/r, of you 



two, 

iy(i€T£p-os 9 a, ov, our ; 
v/uGT€p-og, a, or, your ; 
ocpo- S , & or, ) ^ . r 

G<p£T€p-Og,CC,OV, ) 



oeavrov, of thyself ; 
iaviov, of himself* 



6. Indefinite 
rig, tI, any ; 
delve*, some one. 



20th. ehoGTog. 21.,. eTg nctl tfooorog, juia %al erAOorrj, 

H'AOGTOg TlQWTOQ* 

30th. TQiaxoGTog. 40. TSGGapaKOGTOQ. 50. nevrrjKOGTog. 
60. £'£r}%OGTog. 70. ipdo/uyxoGrog. 80. oydorjxoGTog. 90. 6i/- 
vsvrjxoGTog. 100. ixuxoGiog. 200. diaxoGioGzog. 1000. #*- 
^o<jro£. 10,000. (.wQioGTog. + 

The Greeks have used the letters of the alphabet in 
their natural order, to express a consecutive series, or marks 
of division. Thus, the 24 books of the Iliad and Odyssey 
are marked by the 24 letters, as the stanzas of the 119th 
Psalm are by the Hebrew letters. 



53 



AT • ^ ing - 

N. tyw, 

G. ipov or jwou, 
D. ifiol or ^o*, 
A. ipi or |U6'. 



Dual. 



N. A. i>coT, i/fo, 
G. D. 



Plur. 

G. rfficov, 
D. ^jtt*i>, 
A. ?? t u**£- 







aiv, /^0Z£. 








Sing. 


Dual. 




; Plur 


N. 


ai>, 


i 


N. 


vutig. 

C ' 1* 


G. 


GOV, 


N. A. (FqpcJr, <J<jf m, 1 


G. 


vixmv, 


D. 


(JO?, 


G.D. GCpLOlV^OtyMV. 


D. 


t)(UV 9 


A. 


(Tf. 




, A. 


vfiag. 






ov 1 of hrm* 








Sing. 


Dual. 




Plur, 


N. 






N. 


(Hptjg, 


G. 


o?}, 


N. A. aqtoni, ocpe, 


G. 


0(fO)l/, 


D. 


of, 


G. D. oqonv,(jcplv. 


D. 


oqtoii 


A. 






A. 


oqag- 



Sing. 
N. o£, i?, o, 
G. op, w£, oi?, 
D. co, K, 



ciV, ajr, ^ wAo, which, what. 

Dual. 



CO. 



A. 6*>, >;i>, o. 



JN. A. co, «, co, 
G. D. oTv, cuv, ofv. 



Plur. 
N. to, ai, a, 
G. coy, cuj>, coy, 
D. ofs, afc, oTg. 
A. oos, a?, a. 



1 From acpcf) is derived the Latin vos, as from W, no*. 



54 



Avrog and txetvog are declined like os, ^ o. 
Oitwg, avxr), tovto, is declined, and prefixes t. 
like the article : thus, 

ovrog, this. 



N. ovrog, 

G. XOVXOV, 

D. rourco, 
A. xovxov. 



N. A. Tourw, 

G. D. XOVXOIV, 

N. OVTOl, 
G. TOVTCOP, 

D. xovxoig, 

A. TOVTOVQi 



Sing. 
avrt], l 
xavxrjg, 
xavzy, 
xavxr\v, 

Dual. 

XCCVXCC, 

Plur. 

XOVXQJV, 

xavxuig, 
xuvxag, 



TOVTO, 
XOVXOV, 
XOVXO), 
XQVXQ* 



XOVZO), 
TOVTOIV. 

xccvxa, 
xovxow, 
xovxoig, 
xavxcc. 



From the Personal Pronouns and avxog are 
compounded 2 

iiictvx-ov, of myself, } 



oeavx-ov, of thyself > i]G,ov, 
iuvx-0V) of himself ) 



ro, ^, o>, 



ov, ^v, o. 



Of these the last alone has a plural 



1 av is used in the words, in which there is neither o , 
nor w . 

2 Homer never uses the reciprocals, but i t ue auroV, os 
uvtqvi and e avxop or «JroV, etc 



55 



G. tavt-wv, of themselves, D. o??, «7?, o7g, A. ovg, «?, «. 1 





T#, «^. 






Sing. 


Dual. 




Plur. 


N. Tig,rl,2 




N. 


xiveg, riva, 


G. XWOQ, 


N. A. Tivt, 


G. 


ZIVVOV, 


D. Tm, 


G. D. TLVOiV. 


D. 


XlOl, 


A. r£i/a, tj. 




A. 


Tivdg, Tivcc.^ 



delva, some one. 

N. ds7va and delg, 
G. delva, dalvarog and delvog^ 
D. delva, deivaxo and &n>£, 
A. delva. 



1 For aeccvrov we often find by Oasis, aavxou ; and for 
iuvTOv, avzov. The latter is used by the Attics in the 
three Persons. 

2 7Vs, r/, who? what? is marked with an acute accent, 
and always on the first syllable. 

3t, Oe and jig are often joined, and signify whoever ; thus, 



ogxig, f]Ttg^ on, 



etc 



In the neuter 6 is often separated from ti, with or with- 
out a 'comma, to be distinguished from the conjunction on. 

Ovv, with the signification of the Latin cunque, is added 
to compound Relatives, and takes the accent, as devigovv, 
whosoever. 

To the Demonstratives l long, accented, is added ; as oi?- 
tool, hicce, celui-ci; even if ys is affixed, d&TOvioyL 



56 

VERB. 

Verbs are of two kinds : 1. in Si, 2. in ML 

Verbs have three Voices : Active, Passive* 
and Middle. l 



1 The Middle Voice is so called, because it has a middle 
signification between the Active and Passive. It implies 
neither action nor passion alone, but an action reflected on 
the agent himself. It signifies what we do, I. to ourselves ; 
11. for ourselves. 

I. Thus, qofte'a) Active signifies I frighten another person ; 
tyofieouai Passive, I am frightened by another ; but yofteo- 
pea Middle, I frighten myself, I am afraid, or / fear. <Pv- 
IdiT a), I guard another; tyvXaTTOncu, I am guarded by an- 
other ; but in the Middle, I guard myself, or / beware. Aovoi^ 
I wash ; lovoiiai, I am washed; in the Middle, I wash my- 
self, or J bathe. In this sense the Middle combines the Ac- 
tive and the Passive, I frighten and am frightened, etc. We 
find the same signification in the Hithpael form of the He- 
brew, in the reflexive of the Sanscrit, and in the recipro- 
cal Verbs of the French. The ;analogy may be traced in 
Latin ; in vertor, pascor, moveor, cingor, etc. a middle sense 
is easily traced ; and if no difference of inflection existed in 
Greek, a distinction would be as unnecessary as in Latin. 

II. When the Middle verb is followed by an accusative, 
it implies that the action exerted on that object is intended 
for the benefit or pleasure of the agent, Thus, Xveiv xvva 
signifies to set a person at liberty ; but when Chryses is said 
Kvead'cto his daughter, he is understood as setting her at lib- 
erty, as redeeming her, to gratify his own feelings. In a 
slave-market, fiio&GJGaQ was applied to the person who let 
out slaves ; fie^ca^oo^epog, to the slave who was hired ; and 
{UG&ojodiievog, to him who hired a slave for himself. Uo- 



57 

Five Moods : Indicative, Imperative, Opta* 
tive, Subjunctive, Infinitive. 

Nine Tenses : Present, Imperfect, Perfect, 1 
Pluperfect, First and Second Future, 2 First 
and Second Aorist* and in the Passive, Pau- 
lo-post Future. 4 

Three Numbers : Singular, Dual, and Plu- 
ral. 



Xefxov noirjocci signified to attack by war ; but noiT](sa(5ftai, 
to make war in self-defence. The latter is in more frequent 
use, perhaps, because all states profess to make war on- 
ly in defence of their rights or liberties. 

To this class may be referred what we procure to be 
done to or for us by another. Thus a father is said dida'ga- 
c&at, his son, when he has sent him to a master to be edu- 
cated. 

1 The Perfect expresses that which has existed and still 
exists. 

2 The Second Future seems to be an old Attic form of the 
First, and has consequently the same sense. 

3 The Aorists are called indefinite in time ; but in general 
they refer to something past^ and may therefore be called 
Historical tenses. They are so similar in signification, that 
there are few verbs, in which both forms are used. More 
verbs have the first than the second. 

4 The Paulo-post Future expresses that which is on the 
point of being done. «» 



58 

The verb elfxl, to be. 

INDICATIVE MOOD 

Present Tense. 



Sing. 




&S or el, * 


3 1 

£6TL, 




I am, 


thou art, 


he is, 


Dual. 2 




5 > 


iorov, 






you two are, 


they two are. 


Plur. 


lo/Lter, 


3 ! 

£(7T£, 


etoi. 




we are, 


ye are, 


they are. 3 


• 


Imperfect, ?jv, I was. 






S. 7JV, 


yg, ?} or 


* 4 




D. 

P. 7J/U€V. 


jjrov, rjrrfv. 

7JT€ 9 TjGCCV 


5 

6 



1 The latter is more used. 

2 When the First Person Plural ends in {iiv, the Dual has 
no First Person. 

3 In the Present, Perfect and Future Indicative, and all 
the Subjunctive, the Third Person Plural ends in ov or xai \ 
and the Second and Third Dual are the same. 

4 The latter is more common. 

5 The Imperfect, Pluperfect and the two Aorists Indica- 
tive, and all the Optative, form the Dual in ov, yv. 

6 In the subsequent Moods, the Imperfect is the same as 
the Present, and the Pluperfect is the same as the Perfect. 



59 



Future, ! eao/icu, I will be. 

S. iao/btai i'orj, iaexac 9 

D. Ig6[A6&oV) i'oeo&ov, ia€G&ov ? 
P. ioofiie&a, io€6&€, iaovxccu 

Pluperfect, faqr, I had been. 

S. r\t*r(V, rjvo, 7Jxo, 

D. rjjbLt&ov, nqo&ov, r)o&r)V 9 
P. rjjue&a, iJ6&£, rjvxo 



2 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Present and Imperfect, io&i, be thoxi 

S. io&i or £60 ) i'oxco, 

D. ioxov* eoxcov, 

P. £gt£, ioxcaaav. 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 
Present and imperfect, ^v, I might be. 

Sis •»/ *f 

D. zirfiov, etrjrrfv^ 

P. elijfieV) elrjre, eitfaav or efcv. 



1 This is also called the Future Middle, and the Pluper- 
fect the Imperfect Middle. 

2 r\[i7\v and r\vxo are generally used in the sense of the 
Imperfect. 

3 thv is also used for the third person singular in the 
sense of i'oxo), let it be so, be it so. 



60 

Future, iooifi^v, I would be. 
S. iaoi/Li^Vj £6oco, iaotTO, 

D. l60ifJL€&0V) iootoihov, iaoia&ifv, 
P. lcoi[Ji£&a, I'60i6&e, iaoivio. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present and Imperfect, *», I may be. 

D. 7JTOV, TjTOVi 

P. £Q[l€V, 9JT€j COOl. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present and Imperfect. 
elvai) to be. 

Future. 
eaea&aij about to be. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present. 
N. <»V, ovocc, Sv, being. 

G. ovrog, ovorjQ, oviog. 

Future. 

N. ioo/uiwog, ioofievi}, ioo/ievov, about to be. 
G. ioofi&ov, £60[Atvr)S, iaofievov. 



61 

Verbs in SI. 

There are Four Conjugations of Verbs in <o 9 
distinguished by the termination of the First 
Future. 

The First Conjugation in ipco, as tvktcq, tvijjco. 

The Second in £<#, as Aeyco, AQco. 

The Third in am, as tico, rtoco. 

The Fourth in a liquid before a>, as -yaklco, 
jf/aAco. 1 



1 For those learners who may give the preference to the 
Conjugations by the characteristic, or the letter preceding 
w, the principles of that system are here added. 

For the sake of analogy and simplification, it may be ob- 
served, that the Mute consonants are divided, with refer- 
ence to the organs of speech, into 

Labials, pronounced by the lips : tt, /?, op. 
Palatals, by the palate : x, y, %. 
Dentals, by the teeth : r, d, #. 

The characteristic letters 
Of the First Conjngation are the Labials, with tit ; 
Of the Second, the Palatals, with xr and o<j ; (rr by the 

Attics ;) 
Of the Third, the Dentals, with f or a vowel ; 
Of the Fourth, the Liquids, X, [a, v, q, with (iv. 

First Conjugation. 
Pres. Fut. Perf. 

71, TtQTtW \ CrtQXpCi) \ (TtTtQCfU. 

q), ygaq;a){ ^ \yga\pco £ ^ jytygaya* 

71V, TVnZCDJ \TV\pOJ ) \TtTVCpU. 



62 

ACTIVE VOICE. 
1. The Principal Parts. 

Pres. tvtitco. 1st Fut. jvifjco. Perf. jirvcpa* 
2d Aor. ixvnov. 



1 

Pres. 


Second Conjugation. 

Fut. Perf. 


y, ktyco 




a a, 6qvgg(o or | 


XT, OQVTIW 


J L opi>£co J Icopt^a. 




Third Conjugation. 


r, avvrcj 


^ f" «ViI(Jcu ") (ijyvxa* 


d, (idco 

#, 71 A ^9^ CO 




f, q^-afco 


qgaow | ntqyuna. 
J L r/aco J IrmKa. 


capure, as i/oj 




Fourth Conjugation. 


A, i^aAAoj 


"j A f cjraAco "| { iipcdna. 
\ v \ qavfo [> x <J ntqayxcc. 


(A, 1/£jUC0 

?', qalvo) 


(), OJltlQO) 


p omgcj 1 fajra^xw. 


py, Th\xvia 


J /u L Tf^ucu J {.Teie'fArjxci. 



The old Grammarians formed six Conjugations, distin- 
guished by the characteristics : thus, 

I. The Labials, with tit, as A*//?co. 

II. The Palatals, with xr, as Aapot. 

III. The Dentals, as TiA^xfro. 

IV. f and utj, as qga^o). 

V. The Liquids, as q/aivco. 

VI. The Fouyefo. as Tiudcj % t/co, cWoj. 



63 





Indie. 


Present 


TV JIT CO } 


Imperf. 


Itvtttov ) 


1st Fut 


tvvj-co 


1st Aor. 


trvxpa 


Perfect 


TtTVCpCX, 


Pluperf. 


tTSTVCptlV 


2d Aor. 


txvnov 


2d Fut. 


tvtz-co 



2. The Moods and Tenses, 

Imper. Opt. Subj. Infin. Part, 

■cov 



-cov 

-COQ 

-COV 
-COV 



TVTITS 


-OlfAl 


-co 


-evv 




-01 fit 




-evv 


TVlp-OV 


-aifiv 


-co 


-at, 


TtTVCp-t 


~Ol[U 


-co 


-even 


TVTl-e 


-OVfAV 


-co 


-6 IV 




-OlfiC 




-&v 



s. 

D. 
P. 



S. 
D. 
P. 



3. Numbers and Persons. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present, I strike. 



TVTIXCD, 



TVJlTOfieV. 



xvnxacg, 

XV/IX6WV. 



TV 71X61 €, 



TV7lX€t, 



xvnxexov 



XVRXOV6L 



Imperfect, / was striking. 



6.XV71XOV, 



£XVIlXO[l£V, 



£TV7lX€Q y 

Ixvnxexor. 



£XV/TX£l£. 



ervicte, 
ixv7ix£xrjv p 

£XV7lXOV. 

% 



1 The natural, and probably the original, form of the 3d 
Person Plural is ovti, from which the Latin is formed. The 
penultima of this Person is generally long, except in the 
Imperfect and 2d Aorist Indicative Active ; two tenses, 
which have such an affinity, that some grammarians be- 
lieve that the 2d Aorist, when it differs in form from the 
Imperfect, is the Imperfect of an obsolete verb of a kind- 
red form, as hvnov from tvtico, exayov from xctyco, &c 



64 



/ 


rnsi x 1 mure, i snail bit 


IKt. 


s. 


Tvifjco, Tvyatg, 


Tvyj€i fi 


D. 


Tvy'troy, 


TUlp6TOVj 


P. 


TVI/S0/U6V, Tl/y/fTf^ 


TVXfJOVOl. 




First Aorist, / struck 


• 


S. 


irvif/a, eivipag^ 


ijvyje, 


D. 
P. 


hivipaTOVy 


i'rvifjav. 




Perfect, / have struck. 


S. 


lixvcfa, T€TV(pag, 


rejvcpe, 


D. 


l£TV(faTOV, 


TezvcpaTOVj 


P. 


rerv(pa/u6v 9 jezvcpare^ 


rexvcpaot. 




Pluperfect, / had struck. 


S. 


ijeivcpea^ iTiTvcpetg, 


irexvcpsi^ 


D. 
P. 


IjtivcpetTOVj 


lj£TV(f€LTr)Vy 

ireivcpetoccv. 1 




Second Aorist, / struck. 


S. 


zxvnoVy iruTieg, 


I'tvtiz, 


P. 


izvueiov, 
iiV7io t u€v, irvmre, 


IjvjidxrfVy 
ixviiov. 



1 The common form in the ancient Greek writers is ire- 
rvqtour. 



65 

Second Future, I shall strike. 



s. 


TVJIWy 


tu nets. 


TVTl&Li 


D. 




TvnaiTOV, 


TvnelioVj 


P. 


TUJZOVfiaV, TV7l€lT£, 


0» 

jvnovau 






IMPERATIVE MOOD. 1 






Present strike. 




s. 


r 
TV >71T 6 _, 


iv mix co ^ 




D. 


tv major. 


TVmeiCQV, 




P. 


1V7lT6t€) 


Tvmdcooaotv. 






First Aorist, strike. 




S. 


TVljJOV, 


TVlpCLTCOj 




D. 


tvijjcctov. 


TVlpCCTCQV) 




P. 


Tvipaie^ 


TUtyCtZCOOCtV. 






Perfect, have struck. 




S. 


jdxvcpe, 


xexvcfeicoy - 




D. 


T£TV(paiOV, 


X£TV(f£lCjQV, 




P. 


T€TV(p€r€, 


T£TU(p€ZCOGaV. 



1 It may appear strange that the Imperative should refer 
to a pas^ and not to a future time. To solve a part of the 
difficulty, some have called the First and Second Aorist the 
First and Second Futures., By the Present the Future also 
is signified. And the Perfect enjoins a thing to be done pri- 
or to a specified time ; as, 1 order you to have done this be- 
fore I return. 

2 The third persons of the Imperative have an w in eve- 
ry tense of every voice. 

6* 



66 

Second Aorist, strike. l 
S. rune, zv n it co, 

D. tu a erov, tvji drcoV) 

P. Tvnere, rvnficooav. 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 
Present, I may be striking. 

S. TVJlXOt^ JVHTOtg, .. TV71TOI, 

D. TVJITOLTOV, TVJlTOlTffV^ 

P. TU/nOl/bt€V, TV7ZTOlT€, 1V71TOUV. 

First Future, I may hereafter strike. 

S. TUyJOlfll, TVyOLQ; TVlfJOL, 

D. TV7pOlTOV p TVlfJOLiyV, 

P. TVl^Ol/U€Vj TVljJOLTa, Tviftoiev. 

First Aorist, I may have struck. 

S. TVlfJCU/blLj TVtfJCCig y ivipai, 

D. rvyjaiTOVj rvyaiTifv, 

P. Tvipai/uev, Tuyjcuic, Tvtyauv? 




1 This tense appears to be the root of the verb ; thus, 
rvnf ot % Tvnf-ca or tvtiim, kccfit of hupflccvco, \)tg of rl&rjpi, 
&c. The first use of language is to express a want, hence 
the Imperative was naturally the first object of speech. 

2 The JEoYic form of this Tense is frequently used, par- 
ticularly by the Attics, in the second and third Persons Sin^ 
gular, and the third Plural. 

S. rvipttu, Tvyjfiag, Tvxptie* 

D. Tvxpelurov^ TV\jJ6ictzr]v^ 

P. TVipeiufxeV) Tui/se/are, xvxpzwv. 



67 



Perfect, Imay have been striking. 



s. 


XtXVCfOLfll, T£ZVq)Oig, T€lUifOl, 


D. 


j€ ivcfotcov p leivcpoiirjv. 


P. 


Tsxvcpoifiev, xexvcpoix^ rexixpoiw. 




Second Aorist, / may have struck. 


■S. 


TVROIHI, TVJlOlg, TVTIOL, 


D. 


TVTIOLTOV, TVnOLTYfV, 


P. 


TUJlOl/ULtV, TVJIOIT6, TVROlEV. 




Second Future, Imay hereafter strike. 


S. 


Tundi/u,. Tunolg, tv not, 


D. 


tvtloitov, rvndiTrjV) 


P. 


Tvndifiev, rvnoive, tvjiouv. 1 



s. 

P. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present, I should strike. 

TVJITCQ, TVTIXXJQ^ xvux^ 

rvjixrjxoVj TvnxyxoV) 



xvnxcofA£V p 



TV 



71TTJTS, 



TVTIXWOl. 



1 In the English expression of the Tenses, much precis- 
ion is not to be expected. Their use and signification de- 
pend on the conjunctions and particles, to which they are 
joined. The optative, for instance, is seldom used in the 
Potential sense without «V. 



68 
First Aorist, I should have struck. 

S. xvyco, xvrpqg, rw}/r), 

P. TvifHofiev, i&ffrfte, jvijjojoi. 

Perfect, / should have been striking. 
S. xeivcpco, xexvpyg, xezvcpT), 

J). TeiVflfTOV, T£TV(pJ]TOV; 

P. T£TV(fCO[Jl£V, TaTV(f?jT€j XEXVCfCOOU 

Second Aorist, / should have struck. 

S. XV710J, XVRT)Q p XVTiri, 

Jj. xvnrjxov, xvnr)iov y 

P. xvnco^iev ? xvurjie, xvrwgi. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Present, xvjixttv, to strike. 
First Future, xvyuv, to be going to strike. 
First Aorist, xvipcu, to have struck. 
Perfect, xeiuyevac, to have been striking. 
Second Aorist, zvRttv, to have struck. 
Second Future, zuwuv, to be going to strike. 

PARTICIPLES. 
Present, striking. 

N- XV71TCOV, XVRTOV<5<X y XVJXXOV, 

G. xvjitoyiog; xvjiTovorjQj xvniovzog, &c< 



69 
First Future, going to strike. 

N. TVljtCQV, TVipOVGCC, TV^OV, 

G. TVlpOVTOQ, TVlfJOUOf)?, TVXfJOVIOQ. 

First Aorist, having struck. 
N. rvyag, rvifjaoa, tviJjccv p 

G. rvif/avwg, TurfsdaifS, rvipavxog. 

Perfect, who has been striking. 

N. jexvcpcog, jexvq)vta y ttxucpog, 

G. X£TV(fOTOQ y J€TV(pvtag^ T€TVfOJOg. 

Second Aorist, having struck. 

N. tvrojv, Tvnovoa, tvrov^ 

G. rvnovTog, TVROvorjg, rvRorxog. 

Second Future, going to strike. 

N. TVTICDVy TVJlOVOa, TV ROW, 

G. TVKQVVXOg, TUKOVGyg, TVROVVTOQ. 

AUGMENT. 1 
Of the Nine Tenses, 
Three receive an Augment continued through 
all the Moods : the Perfect, Pluperfect, and 
Paulo-post Future. 



1 The Augment serves to prevent ambiguity ; else the 
Imperfect rimre would be confounded with the Imperative, 
and the First Aorist rvipuQ with the Participle. 

It is probable that no Augment existed in the origin of 



70 

Three receive an Augment in the Indicative 
only : the Imperfect and the two Aorists. 1 

Three receive no Augment: the Present and 
the two Futures. 

There are two Augments; the Syllabic? 
when the Verb begins with a Consonant; the 
Temporal, when the verb begins with a Vow- 
el, 2 

The Syllabic Augment is e prefixed to the 
Imperfect and the Aorists, as arvmov, irv- 
ya, eivRov. 3 When it is continued, it re- 



the language. In the ancient Ionic dialect none is found. 
E was first prefixed to all augmented Tenses for the Tem- 
poral as well as for the Syllabic Augment : thus, aayov, 
£ekm£oi>, £6ttoc£ov. Ea was contracted into??, aa into ?? and 
sometimes at, and ao into w. Hence tuyov became r\yov, 
likm^ov ijItu£ov, and toua^ov oirra^ov : hence ee%oi' be- 
came fi%oy. The Attics sometimes preserve £, forming ia- 
yov from Syh\ to break, probably on account of the inser- 
tion of the Digamma. 

1 Etmo continues the Augment of the Aorists aina and 
iiTiov. The latter is more usual. 

2 The. Syllabic is so called because it adds a syllable to the 
word ; the Temporal, because it increases the time or quan- 
tity of the syllable. 

3 It has been conjectured that the Syllabic Augment is 
• formed from the Imperfect rjv. Perhaps the Ionic form ea 

is a more probable origin. In the Sanscrit language the 
Banoe Syllabic Augment, e, is prefixed in the formation of 
the Pan Tense. In the Celtic, some tenses are also formed 
by prefixes. 



71 



peats the initial consonant of the Verb, as 

If the Verb begins with a Vowel, the Tem- 
poral augment is continued. 

If the initial Consonant is an Aspirate, it 
must be changed into the corresponding Soft, 
as fruco, re&vxa. 2 

The Temporal Augment changes 

a into tj, as ayco, rjyov. 

€ into r), as iAni^co, fJAnt&v. 
^tt into c as 'ixdvco, "i xavov. 

o into co, as 6nd£m y corta^ov. 
** v into v, as € vfipi£<x>, u vflpi£ov. 

ai into J), as atpco, i]pov. 



1 The repetition of the initial consonant in the continued 
Augment is called Reduplication. It sometimes takes place 
in Latin ; do, dedi ; pungo, pupugi ; tango, tetigi, etc. 

When the Verb begins with a double letter, with a join- 
ed to a mute, or with yv, no reduplication takes place, but 
the Syllabic Augment is continued. So in a Verb beginning 
with 0, when q is doubled in the augment ; except in poet- 
ry, where p is sometimes single. So also /?A«7irco, y^yo- 
Q80), diccyXvqio), tf'Aacw, xa&a(jl£oj, xielvoj, nQognarrcifavoj, 
nrtpoco, nriGooj, nrotoj, mvooco. Xrdo^iac makes emrjftcit, 
and nexTtiitai. 

9 An Aspirate Consonant beginning two successive sylla- 
bles, as fteftiwa, would produce a harshness, which the 
Greeks generally avoid. 



-i i 



72 

av into r)v, as avgdvoj, rfv^avoy. 
*m£u into t]u , as tv'/opai, yuxofupr. 1 
o* into «, as oixlQcq, cpxt^or. 2 

e is in some verbs changed into ei, as I'yw, aTyov. 3 
fo is changed into eco, as eogja&j tcopia&r. 

Verbs compounded with Prepositions, take 
the Augment between the Preposition and the 
Verb, as npog^aAAco^ npoga'fiaAAov. 4 



1 In the old Attic dialect, ccv and 6v have no augment. 

2 In some Latin Verbs a Temporal Augment takes prace, 
as ago, egi ; emo, end ; fbdio, fodi, etc. 

3 The following change £ into e i : 

*aw, fA/acrw, enojuac^ igvoj^ 

e-do), tkxeoj, i(j?oj, iGrtao), 

e/.co, £7ico, sorrow, eoj. 

4 Some Compound Verbs, which retain the same meaning 
as those from which they are compounded, are considered 
as Simples, and take the Augment in the beginning. 

Some take an Augment both before and after the Prepo- 
sition, asaW/oaaf, quiijiiiriv ; o.voq&ooj, rivwy&oov j ivo- 
y/.to). *;ro)/),fui> ; naootvto), tnuQojvtov, etc. 

Some take it either before^or after, as xadtvdoa, exd&tv- 
dov or 'Aa&itidov ; Ttpodvpovjucu, inood^v/biovjuf]^ or tiqov- 
[) t u(n u),i\ etc. 

-\iany have no Augment; those beginning with vowels or 
diphthongs not mentioned in the rule ; many beginning in 
o/, particularly those compounded with o/af, olog, olxog, 
oiiog, and oioivog ; also «w, «iw, drjdl&fKu, drfttoao)* ig~ 



73 

Verbs compounded with «J and dvg, if they 
are susceptible of the temporal Augment, take 
it in the same manner, as evopxeoo, evoopxeov. 

A Preposition in composition before a Vow- 
el, loses the final Vowel, as ani%& from ano 
and %%co. 

If, after this elision, the Preposition comes 
before an Aspirate, it changes its Soft into an 
Aspirate, as dcpaigeoo from ano and aigdco. 

Ex in composition becomes i£ before a Vow- 
el^ as ixcpe'pco, i&'cpepov. 

*Ev and ovv, which change the v before a 
Consonant, resume it before a Vowel, as ififid- 

VCO) iv£(l€VOV. 

Svv sometimes drops the y, as av^reca. 
P is doubled after a Vowel, as diaQ^eco. 



firjvevw, €vg!<Jxto. But w#ao, civeofia^ ovQito take the 
syllabic augment. 

Ev in some instances is changed into |j, as 6ixcc£ov. 

These have no Syllabic Augment in the dialogue of Tra- 
gedy ; ncc&t&pai,, xu&tjpuii (jmvdw. 



%\ 



G 
O 
xn 
Of 

Pm 



74 

« 

FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 
Present P. — Present M. 

( Pluperfect. 
Perfect ) ( Php- P. 

iFnfnro J ) Perf. P. < Paul. p. Put 

( ( 1 Aor. P—l Pat P. 

1 Aor 1 Aor. M. 

1 Fut. M. 

2 Aor. P.— 2 Fut. P. 
2 Aor. M. 
2 Fut.— 2 Fut. M. 
Perf. M.— Plup. M. 



2 Aorist 



The Imperfect 

is formed from the present, by prefixing the 
Augment, and changing co into ov, as twito, c- 

TVRIOV. 

The First Future 
is formed from the Present, by changing the 
last syllable l in the 

First Conjugation into ^o?, as tvuxcoj tvxvco ; 



1 The First Future is really formed by the insertion of a 
before to, as Xtlfico, Ifi^aco or Xeiipo) ; keinto, kelnoco or 
falipw ; Af'/tt, Itytm or A*£co ; r/w, t/<tco. To soften the 
pronunciation, a consonant is frequently dropt ; as adw, «- 
go) ; qroafco, qtpadco, etc. For the same reason the ff is 
omitted after a Liquid ; but it was formerly retained, and 
vtfia) made vtfiaou We still find xthoai from Milco, xilaov 
from t&a> 9 6'paw from 6'pco, particularly in the Doric dialect. 



75 

in the Second into |a>, as ^a?, ^g? ; 
in the Third into oca, as tM^ rloco ; l 
in the Fourth, by circumflexing the last sylla- 
ble and shortening the penultima, as yjdlAco, 

Verbs in aco, eco, and oco, change a and e into 
?f 9 and o into co ; as Tifiaw, rifjirfoco ; (ftkdcoy (pttyoco ; 



This analogy extends, in some measure, to the Latin. 
The Perfect of the Third Conjugation is formed from the 
Present, by changing o into si, as scribo, scribsi ; dico, dicsi 
or dixi ; figo,Jigsi or jixi ; demo, demsi ; carpo, carpsi, etc- 
To avoid harshness a letter is frequently left out, as parco, 
parsi ; ludo, lusi, etc. The s too is frequently omitted ; and 
sometimes, in that case, it is resumed in the Supine, as scan- 
do, scandi, scansion ; verto, verti, versum, etc. 

1 Some Verbs are of the Second and Third Conjugation, 
making £w and gm ; dpndCco, /?a£co, Pqi^o), iyyvaU^o), nm- 
fw, yeldco, etc The former is the Doric form. 

Some Verbs take y before § ; «A«fw, xAa/|w, from nldy- 
yco ; nld£w, nkdy'ga). 

2 The following are excepted : 

1. Verbs in aoj, preceded by 6ort; Verbs in law and 
qccco pure ; with diqpdat, Sgdco, aldco, (ndco, vdoj, nsrdco^ 
Gndco, cpXdo). 

2. These in 6co ; ctxeco, a^icpuo), uQKtoy, ecu, £to), %to), vcu- 
ica, vetxeco, ge'co, IXtw, Grogew, re )Joj, xgeco • and Verbs 
which form others in vvco, vvpi, and gxw. 

Some make €Goj and ^goj ; aidtojuac, aivam, dxio^iav, d- 
Xtw, a\cp£a),a%&to[A(u, (3deco, XTjdtw, nojitw, HOQtoj, nortoj, 
y,cc%ionai, oCm, no&toj, noveco, GTiQiw, cpogio), (fQoviw, 



76 

Four Verbs change the Soft of the first syl- 
lable into an Aspirate breathing : 

The First Aorist 

is formed from the First Future, by prefixing 
the Augment, and changing co into or, as jvyjco, 

A doubtful vowel in the penultima of the 
First Aorist of the Fourth Conjugation is made 



yjoQto). Aeo) makes drjoco, dtdwa. Kaleo) makes xaA/trw, 
if'/aA^Ka, by Syncope xtxiqxu. 

The following make the First Future in evoca ; #/co, 
Tdt'to), Tivfw* veo), pea*, yew. Xcdco and xlulo) make avGOj. 

3. Verbs Primitive in ow ; d$6w,(36cx), ipoo), o^o'co, ovdco ; 
and Verbs which form others in vvoj and gkco. 

1 The Present of these Verbs should begin with an Aspi- 
rate : thus, 6/cu, ftotqcoi &Qtyo), -frvyw ; but as the Greeks 
seldom suffer two aspirated syllables to come together, the 
first is changed into a soft. The reason ceases to operate 
in the Future, which ends in £ go, and therefore resumes the 
Aspirate in the first syllable. This is proved by the Per- 
fect, which in the Active is r^rpf'qca, and not Te&Qtcpa, but 
in the Passive Tt&gapftcu. For the same reason &ol £ makes 
TQiyog in the G. — But no change is produced by the Passive 
termination &r]v, except in iTt&yv, hvftriv ; nor by #£, ftev \ 
nor if a consonant intervenes, as ftiode, ftaq&tl$. 



77 



long, a is changed into ??, and € into ei, as *gt- 

vd>, expiree - if/aAS, ityqAa; fievco > i'petva. 1 

Ema and rjreyxa are formed from the Pres- 
ent; Tjxa, i&?}xa r edcoxct, from the Perfect. 
The following drop the a of the Future : 



anew, 


7]X€ICC, 


xeco, 


exeia ? 

ioevcty 


xalco, 


k'xrjcC) 


yjco, 


t'yea. 



The Perfect 

is formed from the First Future, by prefixing 
the Continued Augment, and changing, in the 
1st Conjugation, ipco into ya, as Tvipw, reivcpa ; 

in the 2d, |a> into %a, as //|«, Xikeya ; 

in the 3d, gco into xa, as tigco, xixixa ; 

in the 4th, « into xa, as yaAco, eyaAxa. 2 

Dissyllables in Aco y vcq, p<», change the e of 
the First Future into a ? as gxcAS, aotakxa. 



1 If the penult, of the Pres. has cu,, that of the 1st Aor. in 
the common Dialect has a, in the Attic, yj ; as Gyualvw, Gr r 
peevo), ioimava, Attic ia^uTj va. 

2 Verhs in po) are formed from f«£a>, as vipo). vtvtw/M. 
from vtfitcj, vepqGco. 

7* 



78 

Dissyllables in eivco^ way, and wco, drop the 

?', aS -XT6.VCD, i'xTccxa. 

The Pluperfect 

is formed from the Perfect, by prefixing e to 
the Continued Augment if there is a redupli- 
cation, and changing a into eiv, as xhvcfa, he- 



rvffetv. l 



The Second Aorist 



is formed from the Present, by prefixing the 
Augment, changing co into ov, and shortening 
the penultima, 2 as tvruo, irvnov. 

The Penultima is shortened : 

1. In Vowels, by the change of 



1 The Pluperf. often drops the initial e in all the voices, 
especially in the later Attic writers. 

2 In Dissyllables which take the Temporal Augment, the 
penultima necessarily remains long, as «/oj, rjyov. So also 
where the penultima is long by position, as itaXna), t&al- 
nov ; ixolqutq), tfiaQitrov. But in many of these a transpo- 
sition takes place to preserve the analogy : thus, ntQftay 
makes in poetry enga&ov ; depxo), i'dtjaxov, etc. A resolu- 
tion and a reduplication produce the same effect: thus, r t dov 
is made tudov ; riyov, rjyayov^ etc. 



79 
<° imto^asl 7 ^ fn»i 

at (paivco, €<pccvov ; 

av J L nccvco, eaaov $ 

ei into i, as Aeinco, i'Amov ; 

ev into v, as (ftvyco, ipvyov. 

In Dissyllables of the Fourth Conjugation, 
e and £c are changed into a, as cfc'po, edagov ; 
cneigcoi iojiapov. 2 In Polysyllables e* is changed 
into f, as ayeipco, rjyepov. 

2. In Consonants, by the omission of r, and 
of the last of two liquids, as tutmcd, irvnov; 
rpaAAo), i'y/ccAov. 

Some Mutes are changed into others of the 

same order : thus, 

^Xanxcoy I'ftkaflov ; 

n into /3, as <J xaAvTiTco, ixaAvfiov $ 
xpvTijco, i'xpufiov. 3 



1 IZA^affw, to strike the hody, makes enktjyov ; to strike 
the mind, i'nkayov. 

2 This takes place in some words beginning with a Mute 
and a Liquid, as Titaxw, i'nkaxov ; xA^Vrrtu, i'xkctnov ; so 
oiQecpG), 8GTQa(pov ; but (tXtnca and cpXiyca are regular. R)*^ 
v(o makes ezafAOv and i'refiov. 

3 Formed from /2A«/?co, xaAi!/?<o, xqv(}q), 



80 



amco, 
fian ico, 
& a tit oi, 
n into cp, as \ QariTco, 
oxamco* 



ico. 



X into y, as 



pen 

OftVX™, 



TjCfOV '* 

i/Sacpor j* 
i'xaifov ; 
eQQacfov ; 
ioxacpov ; # 

£QQl(fOV y 

idpvcpov* 

eofivyov $ 
eyvyov. 



Dissyllables in £<» and ooco of the Second 
Conjugation form the Second Aorist in yov ; 
of the Third, in dov $ as ngdoooj, ngd^co, inpeeyov $ 
<ppa±ojj eppaoco, i'eppecdov. 

Verbs in aco and eco change aco and eco into 
ov, as /uvxacoj efjLvxov • evgeco, evgov. 

The following have no Second Aorist : Poly- 
syllables in £to and ooco ; Verbs in aco and tea 
after a Vowel.; Verbs in oco; Polysyllables in 
aivco, wcO) avco, tvoo P ovco/ vco^ vico. and many 
others. * 

The Second Future 

is formed from the Second Aorist, by dropping 



* These are seldom found. 
' Hxoov, from cckovco is poetical. 



81 

the Augment, and changing ov into co circum- 
flexed, as irvnov, xvnco. l 



Present 
Imperf. 
Perfect 
Pluperf. 
P.p.Fut. 
1st Aor. 
1st Fut. 
2d Aor. 
2d Fut. 






s. 

D. 





PASSIVE VOICE. 






The Moods and Tenses. 


Indie lmper. Opt. Subj. Infin. Part. 


zymogen, } 

tTVnXO[ll]VK 


xvnx-ov 


-otfAtjV 


•a)f.iai 


-aoftai 


•optvog 


xtxvuuai f 


TtTV-XpO 


-pfitvog 


~(,l[AlVOQ 


-cp&ui 


-fiptvog 


£T£TV{AtA7}V ) 




tir\v 


CO 






xexvip-opai 




-ol\ir\v 




-soften, 


-oftevog 


irvq)&iiv 


xv^pd'-rjxc 


-tir\v 


-co 


-rival 


-HQ 


TVCp&riG-opui 




-oipriv 




-eo&at 


-opevoG 


ixvnrjv 


TVTt-rj&l 


-H7\V 


-co 


-rjvai 




TVnrjO-opcci, 




-olf.irjv 




-eoftai 


-optvog 



Numbers and Persons, 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present, / am struck. 



JV7lTOfiai ? 



rVJTTTj^ 



TV7116TCCI, 



ivmotie&oVy rvmeo&ov^ ivnTeo&ov, 



Tvmofjie&ct, 



TV7ll€6&€, JVJlTOViai. 






1 It is originally the same as the 1st Fut. Tvnxm made 
Tvnzoco, or zimaco i. e. xvipco. The former in the Ionic di- 
alect becomes rvma), and in the Attic xvtioj. Thus from 
Ityco^ ktytGoj for Aj'/ctco, i. e. li£oj, became leyeco and A^co. 
The Fourth Conj. has only one form : from xpaltaw, xpa- 
fa'w was made ipahw. Hence in reality a 2d Fut. does not 
exist. 

2 The formation of this person was originally inecrctf; 



82 

Imperfect, / was in the situation, or cus- 
tom of being struck. 
ezuTiTo/Lirjv, ixvtixov, txvnxexo, 

D. irvRTo/Lie&ov, ixvnxea&ov, ixvnxea&rfv, 
-P. ixvjxxo{ie&a, ixv/xT€6&£, ixviixovxo. 

Perfect, I have been struck. 

S. T£TV(A[A.ai, Z€XV1pai ? T€XV7lTai, 

D. T€Xv/u/ll£&0V) rixvcpfrov, rexvcp&oy, 

P. TexviAiAefrcCj xdxvcp&e, rexy/ufie'voi etaL 



thus xvnxofxai, 6Gcu, excw. The Ionians, who delight in a 
concourse of vowels, dropped the a, and made it xvnxzai. 
The Attics, who love contractions, shortened it into xvnxei, 
which the common language of Greece changed into riW- 
Trj. The Attic contraction had the advantage of distin- 
guishing the Indicative from the Subjunctive Mood; it was 
universally adopted in /?oiU*6, otti, dipei. 

The same observation applies to other tenses ; thus in 
the Imperfect, ixvnxeao became ixvuxeo, and was after- 
wards contracted into ixuirxov. So xvnxoioo became xvn- 
roio ; iivxpctGO) ixvipao and ixvipw. 

Some Verbs retain the original form; thus (fayo^at makes 
cpayeocu. Thus also is formed the Passive of Verbs in pi, 
as Yoxa-[A,ai,, Yoxa-oat ; xl^e-pai, xl&e-aat, &c 

1 The third person plural is formed from the third per- 
son singular by inserting v before xai s as xtngixcci, yJkqiv- 
rai, probably from the old form xenglvKapxcci,. But when 
a consonant comes before xat, the insertion of v would pro- 
duce an inharmonious sound. Hence a periphrasis is form- 
ed by the addition of the verb il(u to the Perfect Participle : 
thus, i£xv{i[JitvQi eial for xtxvnvxat. 

The Ionic dialect forms the 3d pers. plur. in the Ind. and 
Opt. by changing v into a, the soft into the aspirate mute, 



83 
Pluperfect, / had been struck. 

S. ixeTvfJLfJirjV^ ixdivyo, ixiivnxo, 

D. ix€XV/U/bl€lhoVj iT€TU(p&OVj ix£XV(f&r)V £ 

P. ixexvfifie&cc, lxexv(p&^ xexvpi/ievoi ijoav. 

Paulo-post Future, / am on the point of being 

struck. 
S. xexvyjofxai, xexvipr^ xexvifjexai, 

D. xexvifJOfJLe&ov, jarvyea&ov, xexvyeG&oV) 

P. X£XVTf/0{A,€&CC 9 X£XVJp£G&€ ? XGXVIfJOVXCtl. 

First Aorist, / was struck. 

S. itvcpfrriv, ixvcp&TjSf ixvcpfrr], 

D. ixvcpdnrfiov p lxv(f\h]xr)V ? 

P. irv(p&?)[i€V, hvcp&r)T€ ? ixvcpihjGCCV. 

First Future, I shall be struck. 

S. Tvcp&ijoofjiac^ rv(p£hr]<rr) xv(p&i)G€xaij 

D. JV(f&rfOOfia&OV p XV(p&t]G€G&OV y XV(p&f}G£G&OV 9 

P« TV(p&*}GO(jl€&aj TV(p\fr)G€G&€, XVCp&TjGOVXCU. 



Second Aorist, I was struck. 

S. ixvm\v y lxvn^ > itVJlTJ^ 

D. ixV7l7)XOV > ixVTLTjXqVj 

P. £xvnrf[i£V, ixv7irfie > ixvw^Gav. 



and v\ into e ; as Tervcfctxcci, Xbk^axav^ HQiurw,, ioxcitctxo $ 
toyiitctTO) uyoiaxO)kc. So by the change of a into d^m- 

tpQCtd&TCCl. 



84 



Second Future, I shall be struck. 

S. xvn^aofxai, 'tjif&fp$, xvntjaeicu, 

D. Tvm)G6 t ued-ov, xvn^aeo&ov, xvnJ)Q£ofrov, 

P. %v7iT)a6fi£d-a, xvn^oia&E, xvn^aovxau 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 





Present, be struck. 


s. 


xvnxov, xviniad-to, 


D. 


■xvnxeo&ov, xvnxeo&av, 


P. 


ximxea&e, xvnxiad-coaav. 




Perfect, have been struck. 


S. 


X&XVtyO, T£TVf&G>, 


D. 


tervfd-ov, xsTV f&eov, . 


P. 


xexvpfre, xexvpfrcooav.. 




First Aorist, be struck. 


s. 


rvpihjTi, 1 xvf&i}xeo f 


D. 


xvffrqxov, xvpfryxav, 


P. 


TiKp&rjte, %v<pdTjT(ooav. 




Second Aorist, be struck. 


s. 


xynyfri, xvnr)xa>, 


D. 


xvnrjxov, xvnqxoov, 


P. 


xviirjXi, xvnrjuooav. 



i For rvf&ri&i, two successive syllables of which would 
begin with an aspirate. 



85 * 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 
Present, I may be struck. 

S. TV7tTOlflt)V, TVJITOtO, TVTtXOLTO y 

D. TV/lTOl/Li€&OVj TVTITOIG&OV, TVTZTOtG&tjVi 

P. TV7lTOlfl€&a^ TVTCTOIG&6, TVTCTOlVXO, 

Perfect, I may have been struck. 

S. reTV/u/bievog eirfVj £#?£, dfy 

D. rejvfifJidvco P eiffiov, zirjTrjV, 

P. x^TVfifiivot eifffiev, eirjje, eitfoav} 

Paulo-post Future, I may be m the point of 
being struck. 
S. vexvyjOLfjirjv, reivipoto, t€tvi/joito, 

D. TeTvipoifijie&ov, Teivxfjoia&ov^ jeTVJpoto&rfv^ 

P. T€TUyOL/LL£fra, T€TVyJOlG&€j T&TVlfJOLVTO. 

First Aorist, I may have been struck. 

P. Tvcp&etyiuev, rvf&etrfie^ Tvcp&efyoav. 1 

First Future, I may be struck hereafter. 

S. TU(p&q60L/U?]Vj TV(p&^OOtO y TVCp&TjGOLTO, 

D. TVy&rjOOllJltfroV) TV(p&?]GOlG&OV 9 TVCp&rjGOiG&llVj 

P. rvcp&rjGOiimefra) ivcp&rjGO g&£, TV(p&^GOtvio. 



1 The more common form is the Attic contraction, ehov^ 
8 



86 

Second Aorist, I may have been struck. 
S. rvTiefyv, TTHsfyg, Tvjiafy, 

D. xvnelrjTOV) TvnetijrrjVi 

P. 7V7i£irjy.€V, rv7i£fyT€) Tunefyaav* 

Second Future, I may be struck hereafter. 

S. TvmjooififjVj Tvnrjooio, TvmjGOiro, 

D. rvnrjGOtfiexfov^ TvnrjaotG&ov, TVRTjGOtoihjV) 

P. TVfl?]GOL/bl€&a, XVIir)GOlG&£, TVJlTjGOLVXO. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present, I should be struck. 

Sr t f 

XV/IXCO/LICU, TVTCTT), XVTlXJfXai, 

D. !VTlTCO[JL6&OV, TVTITTjG&OV) XVTLXifG&OV^ 

P. xvnxcofie&a, xvtzxt)g&€, tvjixcovxcu. 

Perfect, I might have been struck. 

S. T€TVjU/U€VOS CD, T)Q, tf ? 

D. T€lV/bLfjL6VC0j 7JIOV, IfXOV , 

P. T£XV/Uft€VOl COfieV, ?JT€, COG I. 

First Aorist, I should have been struck. 

S. Tvyfrco, rv(p&rfg^ xvcp&rj, 

D. TV(pih)TOV p XV(f\^T)XOV > 

P. ivcp&ooiiev, TV(f&r)T£, xvyfrcoGi. 1 



1 The First Future is sometimes found thus: 

Sing. Tvq)&r]GW{*ai,, xvcpdriGy, rvg:&rjGt]Ta^ 
Dual Tvy&rjGcofAe&ov, xvq>&r]Gt]GftoV)Xvq)ftr]a7iG'&ov f 
Plur. TV<p&qoa)(.u&<x, xvip^G^G'&e^ xvyftiiGoovxcu. 



87 
Second Aorist, / should have been struck. 

S. TvncO) JVTirjg ™nri, 

P. rvnwfiev, TVJirjje^ xvjkoou 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Present, rvmea^a^ to be struck. 
Perfect, rexvcp&cu, to have been struck. 
P. p. Fut. Tervyao&ai, to be on the point of be- 
ing struck. 
First Aorist, Tvcpfrrjvai, to have been struck. 
First Future, Tv(p&?)666&at, to be going to be 

struck. 
Second Aorist, rvnrjra^ to have been struck. 
Second Future, TVTujoeQ&cu, to be going to be 
struck. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present, being struck. 
N. Tvnrofievog^ rvnxofidvrf^ rvTiTo/uevov, 
G. TVJiTO[A£vbv ? rvmo^evrfg^ rvnjofievovy etc. 

Perfect, having been struck. 

G. TervfifAevov, tgtv ^fxevr^g^ TeivfJi^ievov. 

Paulo-post Future, being on the point of being 

struck. 

N* T€TVrfs6(l€VOg, T€TUyJOILl6)/7jj T£TVty6/U€VOV, 

G. Tejvipofxevov^ reivifjo /nevrfg^ Tervtfjo/uevov. 



88 

First Aorist, having been struck 
M. Tvcp&elg, Tvcp&€i6a, ivcp&ev, 

G. TvcpfrevTog, Tvcpfretorjg) Tvcp&evTog. 

First Future, going to be struck. 

JNT. TV(pd7]<50ft£VOQ ? TV(pfrr)GO[Jl€Vr) ? TV(p&q00/bl€VGV ? 

G ? TVf&fjooibtevoVy TvyfrfjGO/Lieyrjgf Tv(f^(50fiivov $ 
Second Aorist, having been struck. 

G. TvnevxoQy rvneioyg, runevrag. 

Second Future, going to be struck. 

INT. 7VR7fGO/Ll6VOg^ TVTl7]60/Ll€Vfy TVTll^GO^VOV^ 

G. TvmjoofxeroVj ivnrjGOfAevrjQj runrfoo^ievov. 



FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 
The Present 

is formed from the Present Active, by chang- 
ing oj into oftou, as jvtit-oj^ TV7ir-o(.iai. 

The Imperfect 
is formed from the Imperfect Active, by chang- 
ing v into fiyy, as hxynxo-v, hviiTO-fiqv. 

The Perfect 
is formed from the Perfect Active, by chang- 
ing, in the 



89 

1st Conj. (pa into fi/ucci, as xerv-cfa, riiv-iifiat^ l 
in the 2d, /a into y/uai, as k£kt-%a, AeAe-y/icu ; 
in the 3d, xcc into g/ucci, as neppa-xa, nd<pQ<x-<5tiaL\ 
in the 4th, xa into ^ew, as exfJctA-xa, hpak-^iai. 

Verbs of the Third Conjugation in co pure, 
if the penultima of the Perfect is long, change 
xa into /uai, as n^cfikr^-xa^ neq)tkrf-fjLai. 2 

Some Verbs shorten the long syllable of 
the Perfect Active, as ded&xa, dSofxat. 3 

Dissyllables, whose first syllable has rge, 
change e into «, as Tpe/ico, rexgecpa^ T£TQ<x L utJLai } 



1 Perfects in yet impure change it into f(«i, as TiV^-qra, 

TtT£Q-[AV(l. 

2 Except the following, which retain a, axofw, dgavo), 
Mekevoj) xA^/w, v.qovco, nuiw, tituIo}, oelw. 

Some whose penultima is short, change xa into pai', 
ciqqco, ikcia), dea), o^i/co, AJco, maw. 

The Perfect of most Verbs in cuco, aww, afco, eta), evo), 
ow, ovo)^ i;w, originally ended in [acm, which was afterwards 
changed into Oficu. Hence we find 7.tlev^av and xe'kevGfia^ 
yvwzog and yvwozog, &c. 

3 On the same principle tv is changed into v ; thus, x/- 
%tVY.u, Kt%v(5tiaL and Kt%v(iai ; nt(f)av%a,, niapvyum ; oe'oev-* 
xa, oeovftctt ; titzv^u, TtTvy^ai. 

8* 



90 
but they resume it in the First Aorist, i- 

The Pluperfect 
is formed from the Perfect, by changing /uai 



1 Synopsis of the formation of the Per/. Pass, in all its 
Persons. 



I. 



It 



III. 



IV. 



S. TtTVfipCM) 

(for ubrvtyfiai, 

D. T6TVp[A,S&OV, 
P. T€lVpp6&a, 

S. Xtteypcti, 

(for ktksyjLiai, 
D. Itleytie&ov, 
P. XeXeytxt&a, 
S. ntneiapat,^ 



D. 7l6ml(J[A6&0V, 

P. ntneiofAt&a, 

S. n&rfappai^ 
(for ne'qctvfAcci,) 

D. 7l£C[,d[lU€&OV, 

P. mqafApe&cti 



TtTVqOUl, 

X&elat,, 

Xt'keyoat,, 

Xthey&ov, 

(for ntmiooat,,) 

lltll£l(5&OV, 



ntyccvoat, 



TttVTITUt,, 
TtTVJfZCtt,,) 

T€TV[A[*£V0& £l6l. 

UleyTcu,) 
Itkeyftov, 
leXey pivot, eiol. 

ntneiGdov, 

7187161,6 pivOt, €iat 

niopavxa^ 
ntqjav&ov, 



ntyappavoi eiai* 



7lt(pUV&0V, 

ntcpavfte, 

The 2d Person Imperative is formed by changing at of 
the 2d Person Indie, into o, as TtTv\p~ai, it'zvxp-o ; the 3d 
Person is formed by changing e of the 2d Pers. PL Indie, in- 
to CO, aS TtTVty&-€) T6TV(p&-0). 

When the Perfect Indicative ends in pat, pure, the peri- 
phrasis of the Participle with elpl does not take place in 
the Optative and Subjunctive ; but pat, in the Optative is 
changed into pr\v, apat, into alpr\v ; and the Subjunctive, 
jica with the preceding vowel into copat, ; as Indie, rw'^- 
jtectf, Opt. zert,fi7]prjv^ Subj. xtxipcoput,. 



91 

into (irjv, and prefixing e to the continued Aug- 
ment, if there is a Reduplication, as rdivfi/xae^ 

The Paulo-post Future 
is formed from the second Person Singular of 
the Perfect, by changing at into o^ai, as t*- 
rvxp-at) T€TvifJ-o/nai. 1 

The First Aorist 
is formed from the Third Person Singular of 
the Perfect, by dropping the Reduplication, 
changing rat into #^, and the preceding Soft 
into an Aspirate Mute, as -whuniai^ irvcp&rjv. 

Three Verbs assume g, e^mra^ i$Qcio&f)v; 
fii^ivifcai y t/btvtjo&rjy ; ninhyMu, tnAjjo&qv* But 
odocooxai drops it, making ioeottrfv. 

In some Verbs the penultima is shortened ; 
thus dfyjp^rae makes d(prjp6&7jv; evpqrcu, £vpe~ 



1 By some this tense is formed from the First Future 
Middle, by prefixing the Continued Augment, as rvipofia^ 
TixvxpoiKu. Indeed the Middle is generally used in a Pas- 
sive sense. 

No Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation, or with the Tem- 
poral Augment, have this tense. 

s In the Third Person Plural of the Aorists, a syncope 



92 

The First Future 

is formed from the First Aorist, by dropping 
the Augment, and changing v into aofxcu, as 

The Second Aorist 

is formed from the Second Aorist Active, by- 
changing ov into rjv, as iivnoVj ijvjirjv. l 

The Second Future 
is formed from the Second Aorist, by dropping 
the Augment, and changing v into go/icu, as 

%TVTir)V ? TVJWjGOflCU. 



Present 
Imperf. 



Indie. 

hv7lT-6fif]i 



MIDDLE VOICE. 

The Moods and Tenses. 
Opt. Subj. Inf. 



Perfect hirvn-u 



Pluperf. 
1st Aor. 
lstFut 
2d Aor. 
2d Fut. 



€T£T-V7l£l>V 

inm-ojLirjv 

TV7I-0V[*0Cl> 



Imper. 



-ov 



-£ 



TVXp-CU 



TV71-0V 



•oiftrjv 



•01 [At, 



•CO/UCti 



0) 



-cct(iifjv-w^at 

0lfX7JV\ 

'Oifif]v\-a)iiiac 
•oi^rjv 



-eodac 
-(xoOat, 

-£Od(U 

-eodctt, 
-eiodai 



Part. 
■Oftevog 

■wg 

■dpSVOQ 

6(A£vog 
-opevog 
ovpevog 



often takes place ; thus r\ytQftzv for yytpfttiGctv, ix6ofA7]&£v 
for i'AO<J[*r]tfrjGav. 

1 No Second Aorist Passive occurs in dyv, &i]v, rt]v ; or 
from Verbs in co pure, except iaarjv^ iddrjv^ Iqqvtiv, iapvriv. 



s. 



93 

Numbers and Persons. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

First Aorist, / struck myself. 
S. tTvyjctjbLTjv, ixvrpco, irvyjaro^ 

D. irvijjd^e&ov^ iTvtpctG&ov, ivuyjao&rjVj 

P. eTvydft£&a, izvifjao&e, irvipavro. 

Second Future, / shall strike myself. 
. TVTiov/iiai r Ti//r]J, jvnetrai^ 

D. ZV7COV/Li€&Or^ TV7l€lG&OV, TV7l€?G&OV, 

P. TV7lOV(A€&CC, TV7l€7o&€) TV7lOVVl€Ci. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
First Aorist, strike thyself. 

D. Tvifjao&oVj Tvipde&cov, 

P. TVlpa<J&€) TVy/d<J&C06CCV. 



The Tragic Poets preferred the forms of the 1st Aorist; 
the writers of the new Comedy were more attached to the 
smoother forms of the 2d Aorist. 

1 The Perfect and Pluperfect have an Active, the other 
tenses a Passive, termination. 

The only tenses differing from the Active and Passive 
forms of verbs in co are the 1st Aorist Indicative, Impera* 
feive, and Optative, and the 2d Future Indicative. 



94 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 



S. 



First Aorist, I may have struck myself. 

D. Tvifjai/ue&ov, Tvipai6&ov, rvyjatoih^v^ 

P. Tvifjaifiefrot) Tvyaia&€) rvrf/acvio. 



FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 

The Present and Imperfect are the same as 
those of the Passive. 

The Perfect 
is formed from the 2d Aor. Active, by prefix- 
ing the Reduplication, and changing ov into a, 

as irujiov, rervna. 1 

In Dissyllables, if the Second Aorist has a 
in the penultima, from a Present in e or ei, the 
Perfect Middle changes it into o, as ntexco, e- 
tiAccxov, nenAoxa ; auetpo^ eonagov^ ionoga. But 
from the Present in r/ or at, into ^, as-ity'#a?, &la- 
&ov, kdh^a ; (paCvco, ecpavov, necpiyva. 2 

If the Second Aorist has * in the penultima, 



1 Hence those Verbs which want the 2d Aor. Active, 
have no Perfect Middle. 

2 Sdkko), t&alov, makes red^la ; and xAa£w, exAayov, 
makes **a A??y<x. 



95 

the Perfect Middle changes it into o, as i'Aeyev, 
Ae'Aoya. 

If the Second Aorist has i in the penultima, 
from a Present in *i, the Perfect Middle chan- 
ges it into o*, as eiSco, i'dov, oida. l 

The Pluperfect 

is formed from the Perfect, by prefixing % and 
changing a into uv, as rhvna^ hexyneiv. 2 

The First Aorist 

is formed from the First Aorist Active, by ad- 
ding fir^y^ as irvy/a, hvyd-fir)V. 



1 Some retain also the diphthong of the Present ; thus, 
xtv&oi) makes k6K€u&u and xtnv&a ; yevya), niqevya and 
nicpvya. 

£ixm makes iowa ; eknw, eolna ; i'yyw, eopycc. 

AflSco makes dtdowa, to avoid the frequent repetition of 
d in the regular didocda ; so nenoftya. for 7itno[ma ; Xay- 
%uvco makes h&oyyjx. 

The Perf. Act. and Mid. of the same Verb are seldom 
both in use. Indeed the Mid. may be considered as anoth- 
er form of the Act. as it has generally the same sense, and 
as it sometimes assumes the termination of both, as xA^Ww, 
xtVcAa^a and HSKlona. 

2 When the Perfect Middle has the signification of the 
Present, the Pluperfect has that of the Imperfect. 



96 

The First Future 

is formed from the First Future Active, by 
changing co into o/ucu, as tJ^/g?, rvi^o/btac. l 

The Second Aorist 

is formed from the Second Aorist Active, by 
changing v into juyv, as Itvtio-v, hvno-fJLrjv.* 

The Second Future 
is formed from the Second Future Active, by 
changing co into ov/uai, as rv/i-co, xvtz-ovimxu 3 



1 In the 4th Conjugation it is circumflexed, as in the Act- 
ive ; thus, \pa\-w, ijjuh-ovpai ; i. e. xpaliGopou, Ion. ipcde- 
opcu, Att. \pakovf.icu. See p. 57. 

Many Middle Futures have an Active signification, and 
are not used in the Active form, as prjoopai, &av[Aaoofia^ 
Xtfipofica,. 

2 The following are formed in opai ; ido/nai, qpriyopai, 
TilofAat,; likewise fieofnai, and vtopai. 

3 To the class of Middle Verbs may be referred those 
called by some grammarians Deponents. They have the 
Middle form, except in the Perfect, Pluperfect, and Paulo- 
post Future, of which the form is Passive. Their Perfect 
has sometimes both an Active and a Passive sense, as */'p- 
yv.v\\ai from igyaCofAcit,. Some of these Verbs have, be- 
sides a Middle, a Passive 1st Aorist and 1st Future, the sig- 
nification of which is Passive. In the other tenses, a Mid- 
dle sense may generally be traced. 



97 
CONTRACTED VERBS. 

Verbs in aco, aco, and oco, are contracted in 
the Present and Imperfect Tenses. 

Verbs in aco contract aw, ao, and aov, into co, 
as Tt/LiacQ, iifjLw, to honour ; TifJidofxev, rc/uoi/uav ; 
tijuccovgi, Ti/bta)6i; — else into a, as rificcs, ripa ; — — 
e is subscribed, as ri/udoi/ii, ri/LupfiL ; Tipaecg, rtr 
fiag 9 etc. 

Verbs in eco contract at into at, and ao into 
ov, as tplkaa, (piAai; (ftkao^xav, yUovfiav * — else 
they drop a. as cpiAaw, (piAa>, to love ; ftAaatg, (ft- 
kaig. x 



Perhaps it would be more analogical to consider them as 
Defective Verbs whose Active is obsolete, and which want 
some of the Passive and Middle Tenses. The following is 
a synopsis of their form : 



lFut.M. 
lAor. P. 
lFut, P. 



Indie. 

dtdeypav 
idediyiAtiv 



Present, 

Imperf. 

Perfect, 

Pluperf. 

P.p.Fut 

IAotM. £de£d[ifiv 



idiyjfrriv 

dt%'&11G-0[4CU, 




Opt. Subj. 

I 
-ot/ntjv ,-0)[aui 

~yiutvog'--y[A£POQ 

tir\v to 
-oljurjv 
-alptjv -to pat, 

-U7]v -a* 



Infin. Part. 



-eG&M 

-y&cu 

-iG&ai 
-aG&ai 



'GftevoS 

-ypevoQ 

~6(uevog 
-aptvGg 



€G&Ctl -ofitvog 

-ug 
-6(ievo5 



•7] vet i 
tGdcci 



A few of these Verbs have a 2d Aorist jMiddle, as nvv- 

1 Dissyllables in em are contracted in the Imperative and 
Infinitive only. Thus we say nltta, nheopev, and not nlto r 
Tihovpev. 

9 



98 



Verbs in om contract o before a long vowel 
into S, as xp^a>, %qvgw, to gild; — before a 
short vowel or ov into ov, as XP^aoere, xpvaovre; 
Xpvaoavai, xpvaovoi ,•— otherwise into o«, as X9 V0 °~ 
r,g, xpvaols. In the Inf. oW is contracted into ovv. 



to 



* o o 



© o © **> ^ 



£h 5J %g © 



H» *C «*» HH 



ft 



3 o © o cTo *«-$ 



£ „, > •« 3 ■ S « ft * aj -a a_S-s 

•< > H <y Q , ,* s JT ' 8 * ® £ p g 






fk «*T 









3 



~** ^^^C «^r> , sj> vj> £- 

O ^fcp O ^ ** <5 ^ 

*^**« ti>£^£ ^ * 

«> _ «E? J *W *o K» •«• ,» r» 

bfi^c£<£ .3 3 *> © ,^^'S 

.S^2 ™ ^inr hb s ^ ° 

«r s-S-o 3 § § .3 v ^> £ 

*3*3'3 - m * * ° 



^3 



Mj" 



- r«-' 3 oao ^r^o 

Ml ui \u 

^.G^CO ^<N(« r^G^CO 



99 



St 

Mi 

* © © 

2 ** ** 

. 3* © © 

T- 1 © O © 

0-r©-*,-© 






Mi 

f S«s?3 

3 55-m"© 



p- 
o 



Mi 

* © © 
jf sT sT 

-2 ° ° 

© 



Mi 

-1 M 



© 

35 

S> 

Mi 

"© 

GO 










> 
o 

D 

02 



A 




, 




rn 


© 




> 


2k 


w 






*2 


h-3 


© 




H 


Mi 
1 


Oh 


"3 ** 




■— * 


Si 


( ; 


St« t4? 


3 




©^ 


>— « 
H 




■© 




Si 

Mi 

-Mi 

1 





Ci» ?J> C* 

© © © 

** £ £ 

^ * © © 

*H S ° ° 

H 5 » ^ 
® © © 

55~K>*© 

** l£ ^1 

§^ P 52" 

to to to 

•*© £*a 

. * © o 

r v g" ^ fir 

fa to g to 

© © © 

g o © 

O g S 

s ^3 

© © e» 

cc 5f ?J» © 
^ p © ^ 

£ ^ ° 
© ©"© 

sT g ©> 



•ansa's 






6?3'3 ^«^ 

a ^ ^ 3 

t-« 'wo CO 






3- 

S> 

Mi 

I 
it 



CD 

S3 



O 

15 



.lt«S> P 

+-> P © ** 

^-2 ° ? 

I i to 

• ^_«-< s> 

sT ^ ©> 

» to ? 5 
' l 3 © c 

s « « 

S § I 

^ g §- 

l i 

sL r,< 

s> ^> 



>£ *' 

— 8-5 
l I 



1-4 ©^ CO 



$ 




to 

© 




© 


«5 






to 


Q 


.O 




©/ 


o 


^ 


<h>> 


3 


<I 


#» 


■0) 


^ 


V 


3 


Ctt 


© 


* 


to 




s 




©/- 




X 





100 















o 
















*•» 




i* 
















isia l 2 

* © ° 




















s ^ * 




£ aT ^ 
















.s s ° 




© © © 
















C "*g "O 




^8-S-o 
















K> 




*w 
















SO 




<£> 
















o 




to 
































cu 


•"* — ** 

as 




Oh g ^°- 






s» 


«J 








5. 

* © o 




© o 






to 
3 

to 




Q 

O 

o 

a 

> 
< 


Til 


(Jj 

ft 


o Ki O 


ftl 

a; 


g-©~© 

8 yj © 


> 

Pi 
w 


• 
Ph 


o 

> 


to 


© 
<o 
to 


i— < O *g O 




efc 

o 

<^> 

^i w K> w 
s »•>* ..^ «-^r 


^ 


o 
*8i*r2 

k S w *u~© 


to 
J 8^ © 

** r^ •*■ 
H; fcg ^ 


H3 


O 




^ 


s 


S 




3 




*— * 

o 

£ 


ft 




© 
5L 


© 

OS 

5L 


i-h 






0) 

I* 

c3 


i— i 






3 '§ 5 

© k, © 




O Kj O 






3 O fcg o 


Ph 


B 












O "wg -© 








3 








.2 ^ 




*wy r wg ''ky 






to 

«^ «^ ^ *N 










1?a 

s J. § 

3-1 3, 








^ l 3 ? 2 °^ 

-§^ ? 

1 1 « 

^_«^ 2 










^ ©* GO 




T-i e^ eo 






t-* G^ CO 



•a 5 o 

o © o 
~ 5"3> o 

<£> 

5L 

3*^ o 



goo 
it 

to 

3--g © 

2 ° 2 

Q Hi O 



101 



*3*3*3 

£ sf £ 
3 3 3 

*5S "mj w © 



to 



Sh*S 



< 
EH 

O 



P 
Ph 





A 






o 






^ 




- 


to 




^5 d 


* o 


o 


5 ^ i r 

O.g.o 

O wy 


o 




Si 






o 






^> 






*o 






at; 




*3* 




o 


o 


O 


o 


Mj 


o 




O 






fc> 






i T 


<* 


<3* 


o 


o 




•^ 




o 




O 

o 




O 




r-©' 


?iT< 


*4 


<s* 


o 


o 


. o 


© 


© 


fi*T« 


^«W" 


o 


a 


Sk 




CO 


fc? 






2W 






o 


"3- 


o - 




r» 


"r» 


o 


o 


o» 


o 


8 

i 


<*> 
1 


to 


*3 




fc 


©V X 


T-l 


©* CO 



> 

H 
o 

CO 



cu 
CD 



<£ ? 3 
g*3 3 

o H) O 



o 
to 



9k 

o 
<£> 
to 

2 ~ o ~ 

5 s* s? ^* 



o 

5L 



3-3-3 

3-3^3 

£S MJ © 
S^ K © 

s-i s- o 

.5 8 *> ■© 

CO 

o 

5 c s 

3.3*-? 
• S § 

i-» 0< GO 




^ ©* CO 



> 



CD 



** o § 

« H» © 



^ *, to 

to S ** 

q <o »L 

1 A ? 



C^ CO 



9* 



102 

Verbs in ML l 
Verbs in pi are formed from Verbs of the 
Third Conjugation in ««, tco, oco, and va>. 

1. By prefixing the Reduplication with i; 5 

2. By changing a> into /nc ; 3 

3. By lengthening the penultima. 
Thus from ordco is formed tm^fii^ to stand ; 

from fteco, TL&Tj/Lu, 4 to place ; 

from doco, dtdcofii^ to give ; 

from detxvvm, deixvvfii, to shew. 

Verbs in pi have only three tenses of that 
form ; the Present, Imperfect, and Second Ao- 
rist. They take the other Tenses from Verbs 
in co\ thus eJ/<&0/-u*makes deioco, ddScoxa, from 
d6a>. 5 



1 The most striking difference between Verbs in Ml and 
Verbs in Si is in the 1st and 3d person Sing. Pres. Indie, 
and the 2d person Sing. Imperative. 

2 If the Verb begins with a Vowel, with nr or ffr, i aspi- 
rate only is prefixed, as ?o>, Ytjfii ; nraw, imrjfjii, &c. This 
is called the Improper Reduplication. 

The Reduplication takes place in the Pres. and Imperf. 
only. 

3 The form in pi is Old Attic and Ionic ; hence ai is add- 
ed to the 3d Person Sing, of the Present. 

4 For &i&t}pi>, see page 71, note 2. 

5 Verbs in pi have no 2d Future, 2d Aorist Passive, not 
Perfect Middle. 



103 



Verbs in v/nc have neither Reduplication, { 
Second Aorist, 2 nor Optative or Subjunctive 
Moods. 3 

ACTIVE VOICE. 
The Moods and Tenses. 

Indie. Imper. Opt. Subj. Infin. 



Present 



Imperf. 



2d Aor. 



d&licv-tjfii 

iozrjv 
hl&rjv 
id id co v 
iSfluvvv 



~a&i 


-air\v 


-to 


-avat 


-txi 


-U7\V 


-to 


-ivai 


-0&1 


-oirjv 


-to 


-oval 


-vtii 






-VVCM 



Par. 
-ag 

-tig 
-ovg 

-vg 



the rest like the Present. 



eovrjv 


GTTjtfl 


OTCClfjV 


GTto 


arrival 


arag 


I'&TJV 


&te 


S'fhjv 


<&to 


Nerval 


&elg 


tdtov 


dog 


<$oir\v 


dco 


dovvai 


6 ovg 



The other Tenses are regularly formed 
from Verbs in co ; thus, 



1 Fut. 



OT^G-to 


.... 


-Olfll 


.... 


-eiv 


&r]C>-to 


• . . • 


-OlfAl 


* * . « 


-eiv 


d to o- to 


.... 


-Olfil 


.... 


-eiv 


dai^-to 


.... 


-Ol[4,l 


* . «. • 


~€IV 



-cov 

-toV 
-toV 

-wv 



1 With cpato, cprjpl ; dvto, dvpi, etc. and those which are 
formed from trisyllables, as xQepvaa), %Qejivri[ii. 

2 Or the 2d Aorist is the same as the Imperfect. 

3 The Poets change many Verbs in to into \xi\ as yeXato, 
^ilrifAi; i'yto, t%rj[Ai; xraco, KTrjjLii; ovito^ ov^fii ; Ofcfw, 
Sg^rUi $ ipihito, yikrjfii ; X£<*w 5 X&W*i & c « 



104 



1 Aor. 



Perf. 



toirjoa 1 
i'&rjxa 
tdtoxa 
tdet'^a 

eorax-a 2 

T6&£tX~a 

dedcox-a 
dtdtt%-a 



art] G-o v 


-at /At 


-co 


-at 


ftfjx-ov 


-at /it 


-co 


-at 


dcox-ov 


-at (bit 


-co 


-IU 


del^-ov 


-at/ut 


-co 


-at 



-€ 


-Otftt 


-co 


-evat 


-e 


-Ot[Kt 


"CO 


-e vat 


-£ 


-ot/it 


-co 


-evat 


■*£ 


-Otfit 


-co 


-evat 



-ag 
-ag 
-aq 
-ag 

-cog 
-cog 
-cog 
-cog 



eoraxetv 



Plup. 
hs&elxetv iSedcoxetv idtd6l%€tv 3 



1 The 1st Aorist of lortjfit has an active, and the 2d a 
neuter signification. So in (3ulvco. 

2 The Perf. Plup. and 2d Aor. Act. ofiGTtjfit have a neu- 
ter, the other tenses an active sense. The Perf. has the 
signification of the Pres. and the Plup. of the Imperfect. 

3 Some irregularities occur in those tenses of the Verbs 
in ,tu, which follow the analogy of Verbs in co. In the lat- 
ter^ the Perfect preserves the penultima of the 1st Future. 
But Verbs in ^u, derived from eco, change 77, the penulti- 
ma of the 1st Future, into et for the Perfect, as^'w, ftrioco^ 
xi&ttxa. Those derived from aco keep in the Perfect the 
penultima of the Present, as araco, Orinoco, eoraxa.^ But 
toxr\xa is also found. 

In this last a syncope often takes place ; thus, toxaa 5 
hence the participle iozatog, and by syncope iorcog. 






105 



Numbers and Persons, 
Present. 



Sing. Dual. 

iGv-f]^i, tjg, r\Gv, \axov, axov, 

xld-r^ii, r\g, noifexov, exov, 

did-wpi, cog, woijocov, oxov, 

deiav-vfi^vg, vo^lvxop, vxov, 



Plur. 



a\l£V, 

opep, 
v^xtv, 



axe. 
exe, 
oie, 
vie. 



CMU, 
e~lGV, 
OVOl. 
VOL. 2 



Sing. 

tGX-f]V, 7jg, 

wg, 



idid- 



0)V. 



0), 



adeixv-vv, vg, v. 



Imperfect 



Dual. 



Plur. 



\axov. 

\exop, 

0X0P. 



axv\v, 
exnv, 
oxtjp, 



afxev, 
epev, 
opep, 

VfACV) 



axe. 



UOCCP. 



exe, eoap, 
oxe, ooap, 



vie, 



VGCLV. 



Second Aorist. 



Sing. 






eGx-r]v, r\g, 


% 


r\xop, 


tft-Yiv, rig, 


V, 


eX0V, 


ed-wp, wg, 


CO, 


oxov, 



Dual. Plur. 

r\xr\p, r^iev, tjxe, TjGav* 

eX7\P, epep, exe, tGav, 

oxrjp, o^iep, 



oxe, ooap. 



1 \Eox-ctp£v, axe, aGi, &c. are from eGx-r^u. 

2 The Third Person Plural in the Present is the same ai 
the Dative Plural Participle of the same tense. By the 
Attics it is commonly terminated in aoi, as xedeaGt,, didoa- 
gc, deinvvaGt,. 

3 Verbs in fii are seldom used in the Imperfect. They 
generally in this, and sometimes in other Tenses, adopt 
their original contracted form j thus, iGx-aop, cop ; izlft-eov, 
ovv ; idld-oov, ovp ; &c. 

4 The Second Aorist retains the long vowel in the pe- 
nultima of the Dual and Plur. except in xl&qfAi, didcofxt, 
and Yt][a,i. 

w The 3d Person Plur. is often syncopated; thus, tfiav for 
i'P?1Gav, e&ev for sfteGav. 



., Sing. 

iGTCC-itt,, 1 



Sing- 

GXtj&l, 2 OXrjXW, 



106 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present 
Dual 



TO) 



XQV, TQ)V) 



Plur. 

t*, xcogcxv. 



Second Aorist 

Dual. 



GX7JX0V, OTTjTWV, 

fiexov ftexcov, 



V0$1 dOTO), doTOV, dOTCDV 

OPTATIVE MOOD 

Present. 

Sing, 



Plur. f 

GXr}XB r GXrjXWGUV, 

#*r£, fisxcooav, 

dOT£« dOTCUGCCV. 3 



iGxai-riv 
dt,doi-r}v 



Dual. 



f]TOV, 7]Xt]V 



Plur. 



rjfiev^ ^rf, f]Gav and sv. 4 



1 The Poets retain the long vowel, as i'Girj&i, xi$r\xi. 
The syllable &i is frequently rejected, as I'gxu or Ygxtj^ xi- 
&y, etc. 

2 The Second Aorist Imperative ends in #£, except frig, 
and dog ; with ?£, iviGneg, G%sg, tyQtg- 

3 Dissyllables in tyu have a 2d Aor. Imper. as nlv&t,. 

4 The latter form is the more frequent. See p. 85, note. 



107 



Sing. 



Second Aorist. 
Dual. 






W V, 



r\T0V, f]Tt]V, 



Plur. 
rjfitV) r/rf, qGccv and**/. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD- 
Present. 



a, 



Sing. 
d(,d-(S) fog, a5 3 



Dual.^ 

OITQV, CCTOV) 
WTOV. WTOV* 



Plur. 



tufttv, 


«T£, 


C0(7£, 


(Oper, 


T**i 


(OGl, 


wpev, 


WT€, 


0)61. 



<yrw, GTyg, git], 
dug, <%, 



<5e3. 



Second Aorist. 

Dual. ^ Plur. 



GTTJTOV, GTfjTOV, 

datxov, dwTOV) ' 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Present. 

iGTuvcti) Tifievui, didovcci, deinvvvai.® 

Second Aorist. 

GTr\vai, <&e7vcu>) dovvai,. Q 

PARTICIPLES. 
Present. Second Aorist. 



iGT-ccg^ 


«(?£*, 


av. 


GT<xg, 


GTCCGCt, 


Grow. 


zi&-tlg, 


£?(xa, 


£V. 


&fyl 


#£?(!«, 


<&6V. 


did-ovg. 


OVGCl, 


6v. 


dovg, 


dovGct, 


do v. 


dewv-vg, 


VGC6, 


vv* 









1 The Ionic Dialect inserts e , as Ti&eco, and the Poets add 
L, as Ti&elca. So in the 2d Aorist. 

2 The Infin. Pres. has always the short vowel ; the 2d 
Aor. a long^vowel or diphthong, n instead of a, u instead 
of £, and ov instead of o. 



108 



FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 
The Imperfect 

is formed from the Present, by prefixing the 
Augment, and changing pi into v, as rtthjfii* 

The Second Aorist 

is formed from the Imperfect, by dropping the 
Reduplication ; as £ti&?]v, i'frijv ; or by chang- 
ing the Improper Reduplication into the Aug- 
ment, as i6T?]v, ior^r. 

If the Verb has no Reduplication, the Sec- 
ond Aorist is the same as the Imperfect. 



Present 



Imperf. 



PASSIVE VOICE. 
The Moods and Tenses, 






iOT-cc[xai, 
did-o^ou 

lard/nrjv 

ldid6f.ir}v 
id€Mvv[ti}v 



-CCOO \-VA[AiqV 

-eoo \-ti(ArjV 

-000 \-ol[Af]V 

-voo 






-ao&ui -ccfAtvog 
-to&ut, -ffifvog 
-oo&at, -6[A£vog 
-voftai -vpevog 



the rest like the Present. 



109 



Tenses formed from Verbs in <*. 



Perfect 



1 Aor. 



1 Fut. 



Ind. Imp. 
tGr-ccftai -ccgo 

Ted-tipOU -tlGQ 

ded-Ofiai -ogo 
Igtol^v 

Idedeiy^iriv 

( ioTaG-OfAca,' 
< xe&eiG-oiiat, 
( dedoG-ofxat 

tGTU&r}V 

eie&rjv 
ido&rjv 

GvaO^G-Ojuat 

T6drjG-0f,lCtl, 

doSriG-OfAut, 



Opt. 

-Cti{A,t]V 
-Sl[A,t]V 



Subj. 

-OJfACXl 
-OJfUCU 



Inf. 
-StGdav 
-sTgOcu 
-ogSui 



Part. 

-ecjitvog 
-Ofievog 



ti%Qm -eiypevos 



■OlflTjV 
OlfltJV 



-tGQcu 
-SGdcu 
-ZGdai 



GTCC&-f}T(, 


-zirjv 


-(A3 


le&'TjTt, 


-HY\V 


-co 


do-'&rjri 


-eirjv 


-co 



-r\vav 



opsvog 

OfAZVOQ 
OfASVOQ 

-els 
■els 
-elS 
-els 



... 


-olfiriv 


... 


-eGdoti 


» • € 


-oijuyv 


... 


-6g6cu 


. . . 


-oifxriv 


• • • 


•fcdou 






• • . 


-tGdai 



-0[l€V0£ 

-ofAfvog 
-opevog 
-opevog 



iGra- 
ri&e- 
dldo- 
deUvv- 



Numbers and Persons* 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present 
Sing. 



Dual. 



PIuf. 



(Ml) GUI, TOLL 



(xtdov, gOov, aOov r 



(ted a, g6s, vtcti* 



1 In this Person in the Passive and Middle Voices, the Ion- 
ic dialect drops the cr, and the Attic contracts that resolu- 
tion ; thus iGTccGcci, Ion. iGvccai, Att. Ygtti ; &tecjo, Ion. 



«#eo, Att. a&ov. 



10 



110 



lara- 
irifts- 
idido- 
idewvv 



Sing. 



fif]V, GO, TO 



Imperfect. 
Dual. 

ftt&OV, G&OV, G&r}V 



Plur. 



jU£&Ct, (7#£, VTO 



tor a- 
rifa- 
dldo- 
Selxvv 



Sing. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 
Dual. 



go, g&co 



G&OV, G&GJV, 



Plur. 

C&£, G&(OGCiV. 



IGTCKI- 

fodoi- 



Sing. 



OPTATIVE MOOD, 

Present 
Dual. 



MP, o, TO, 



f*6&0V, G&OV) G&tJV 



Plur. 



ftS&CC, G&i, VTO. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present. 

Sing. ^ . Dual. f Plur. 

iGT-mf4(u,£, aTCtc,\ot)fi£dov,ccGdov, ccodov y \(oiu6dcc,aodt,o)VTai, 
Tid-tojicu, ij, r\iai, Wjjuedov, 7\g6ov, i£Gdov,[o>fit6a,fiQ..0£,a)VTCti 
Si,d-^ixai,oj, cjTa^o)f4£dov,d)Gdov, o)66ovjm[A£0u,(Zodt,6}vxu.t f 

INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLES. 



Present. 

YGTaG&ai, 
Ti&SG&at,, 
dldoG&ai,, 
dtiv.vvG&ttt,, 



Present. 



iGTCtpev-OQ, 

Tl&t{l6V-0Q, 

didojutv-og, 
dewvinev-og, 



f] f ov. 



Ill 



FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 
The Present 
is formed from the Present Active, by short- 
ening the penultima, and changing fit into fiac, 

.. i 

as iGTfjfii, iGja/tiai. 

The Imperfect 
is formed from the Present by prefixing the 
Augment, and changing /nai into [iipr, as ti&€- 

MIDDLE VOICE. 
The Moods and Tenses. 
The Present and Imperfect are the same as 
in the Passive. 

The Second Aorist. 



Indie. 


Tmper. 




Opt. 


Subj. 


Infin. 




Part. 


Igtcc^v 


GTCCGO 


OTCtifATjV 


GT(xjfA.(U 


GTdG&CCl 


GrdftevoG 


Zdt[AYlV 


fie'oo 


ftsluriv 


ftM/UUt, 


■fteoftai 


&£(A£VOQ 


idofitjv 


do oo c 

renses fc 


"olfirjv 


dojfiat 


doGdat dopevog 

jrbs in co. 


r 


>rmed from Ve 


( 


iOTtjGCCfitjV 


Grr\G-OL'\ 








1 Aor. < 




* ~ > aiufiv 
oom-ou L l ' 


GOjUCU 


CCG&CM 


dpevoQ 


( 


ideisdprjv 


d€7^-0it J 







1 The Poets retain the long syllable, as di&ficc^ ovy 



112 



1 Fut. 



GTrjG-OjUCtl 

{triG-opai 
dwG-ofAai 



Olfl^V 



IG&ai QIAiVOZ 



Sing. 



Numbers and Persons. 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Second Aorist. 

Dual. PIuf. 



tGra- 
ido- 



[it&ov, a#oi/, o&fiv, 



[l£&CCi O&i) Vtfh 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Second Aorist 



arc*- 1 
Jo- 



Sing. 

(70, 0#W, 



Sing. 



Dual. 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Second Aorist. 

Dual. 



Plur. 



Glttl- 

dot- 



(UfjV, 0, TO, 



(AS&OV, G&OV, G&t]V, 



Plur. 



1 This and the following Mood in the 2d Aorist of igti]- 
\iv are seldom used ; they are here introduced to show the 
analogy. 



. 



113 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 
Second Aorist. 

Sing. Dual. Plur. 






cofitdov, tjoOoV) ijodov 
wfiieOov, rjodov^ rjndov 
(opedov, tooQov,<Zadov 






INFINITIVE MOOD. PARTICIPLE. 

Second Aorist Second Aorist 

GTCtG&CCl) 

doG&ai,. 



Gra- 
de- ) pevog, (.uvfy [itvov. 



do 



The Second Aorist Middle 
is formed from the Imperfect, by dropping the 
Reduplication, as iii&dfiqv, i&e'/jujv ; LGxdfJirjv, io- 



IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS IN pi 

may be divided into Three Classes, each con- 
taining three Verbs. 

I. From ica are derived «^w2, to be ; ely.t and 
hfpu, to go. 

II. From em are derived fyut, to send ; ^/uai, 
to sit ; eifiai, to clothe one's self. 

III. Kti/icu, to lie down; taij/ii, to know ; (py- 
fci, to say. 

10* 



114 

Class I. 

1. EtfJit^ to be, 

has been before conjugated, as it is used, in 
some of its tenses* as an auxiliary to the Pas- 
sive Voice of Verbs in co. 

2. Eijui, to go. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present. 1 

Sing._ „ Dual ' v ~ Plu £ 

£i[ii, eig or eJ, eioi, \ Jtoi>, ltop, \ ipev, i've^etat, or i'ot< or Ilcmh* 

Imperfect 

eiv^ tfQ) ei, | iro*>, ittjV) i'[iev, m, iGctv. 

Pluperfect. 

flWt^ eig, e^ I eixov, elrriv, \ eifiev, ene, eioctv* 

Second Aorist. 

iW, 'leg, ?£, lerov, Ut7\v, \ lOfxev, leve^ 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Present. 

lift* or £?, itoi, | itov^ i'roiv, «*, ircooav. 



1 In the ^ Attic writers e 1[il has a Future signification, as 
upi nut dyyeXw, Eurip. ipev xat en^evQ^ao(Aev^ Dem. 
So in the Infinitive and Participle. 

2 The Imperf. and 2d Aor. belong to Epic poetry ; but 
He and fev, ir^v and {'era?, are all that can be found, except 
in composition. ijiov and ijjoy, used by Epic poets, and ^w, 
a|fi«, and ??(*, in a Hup. forin, are also found in the sense of 
the imperfect. 



*• 



115 

Second Aorist 

Sing. Dual. Phir. 

h^ ieico, utov, aicov, uxt, urwoav. 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 
Second Aorist. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Second Aorist. 

INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 

Present. Second Aorist. 

swcu or ivctt* iwv, iovocc, iov* 



MIDDLE VOICE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Perfect. 

*Ia, *?«£, eh, eiaxov, eiurov, \ eiafisv^ e/are, eiccoi, 

Pluperfect. 

I or y^v^Te, rjoctv. 

First Future. First Aorist. 



3 / 



ttGOftcct* ) &icct(trj'Vt 



»c »/ v 



116 

3. "Iiffii, to go. 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 
Sing. Dual. Plur. 

CTj{M, fitfS, i'?7<7£, | i'*T01>, /£T01>, | t£/K£l>, ute^ luat K 

Imperfect. 

| — [ uoav. 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

— hi n . | | 

INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 

Present. Present. 

lev at, uiQ. c iivzofr 



MIDDLE VOICE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present. 

<>-jticM, oat, r«^, | {is&ov, o&ov, o&ov, \ /4t#a, a&e, viae. 

Imperfect. 

i£-fiAt]V, (TO, TO, J lli&OV, C&OV, G&rjV, \ {.udd, G&8, VTO. 

IMPERATIVE. PARTICIPLE. 

Present. Present* 

Jteao, uo&co. ufizv-og, 77, ov> 



1 



117 

Class II. 
I. "Irj/uij to send. l 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

Sing. Dual. Plur. 

fjftiu, trig, 7fjai 9 hrov, utov, ufxev^ i'ere, Wiai. 

Imperfect. 

&?i>, trig, ?^, Xirov, lhr\v, ispey, f*z*, 'koccv. 

First Future. 
rjG-w, tig, ai, nov, nov, \ opey, ere, ovot-. 

First Aorist. Perfect. Pluperfect. 

^k<*. etna. eixeiv. 

Second Aorist, 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 1 
Present. 

U&l) 16TO), 16T0V, 16TCOV, ?*Tf, l6T(ti(JaV. 

First Aorist. Perfect. 

Second Aorist, 



1 This Verb has scarcely any irregularities, but is form- 
ed like Ti&tjiu. 

2 The Attics have dpev, the, eloctv ; thus, avil^v^ uy£- 
qctv. 



118 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 
Sing. Dual. Plur. 

First Future. Perfect. 

Second Aorist. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present. 

Perfect 

six-G), ??£, ffa r}TOv, firov, cojtev, tire, axu. 

Second iVorist. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Present. First Future. 

levai, tJg£iv. 

Perfect. Second Aorist. 

uxevuv. elvai. 

PARTICIPLES. 
Present. First Future. 

hlg^ Uloct) lev. ijowv, roovoa, r\GQv. 



119 

Perfect. Second Aorist. 

elxws, tinvici) elxoQ. «iV, *fffa, tv. 



PASSIVE VOICE. 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

Sing. Dual. Plur. 

16-f.lCtl,, (TCM, tat, | fit&OV, (5&OV, G&OV) \ jU£#«, (7#f, VTUh 

Imperfect 

hfif]v^ do, to, fie&ovi o&ov, c&yv, \ fiefta, (7#£, vto. 

Perfect. 

tT-fiai, GCU, T<M, | fit&OVi O&QV, o&ov, I |U£#a, (J#£, VTM. 

Pluperfect. 

ei-firjv, (to, to, I fte&ov, o&ov, Gftr\v, | |tt£#a, (J#£, ^to. 

P. p. Future. First Aorist. First Future. 

ei'oopcK,. | td-fjv and el'^v. i{rr}GO[A,cu. 

MIDDLE VOICE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present and Imperfect like the Passive. 1 

First Aorist. 

qx-dfifjV) w, «to, I ccpe&ov, ua&ov, uGdrjv, | ape&a, ao^^ 

[ccvro. 

irf /6(xai, and lipijv, the Present and Imperfect Middle, sig- 
nify / send myself, etc. or J om impelled. Hence they are 
generally used in the sense of wishing ; thus, terat ccivmg^ 
Hom. Odyss. II. 327. he earnestly wishes. In this sense they 
are the root ofi/^e^og^ a desire^ and of IpeiQco, to desire. 



120 

First Future. 

Sing. f Dual. Plur. 

ijo-oita^ ?7, erect, \ ope&ov, eo&ov, *(7#o*/, J o^atta, ea&e, 

[0VTCU<. 

Second Aorist. 

€?^*>, fao, IVo, | ipeftov, &r#oi', *o&t]v, | ^«^a, lff#f, hvto 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Second Aorist. 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

First Future. 
qaol-fniv, o, to, | pe&ov, a#oi>, adf]v, \ ^efta, o&e, vw. 

Second Aorist. 
eY-fitjV) o, to, ( fie&ov, o&ov, o&tjv, \ ^efta, a#*, vro. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Second Aorist. 

i5fj(M, $, ^tcm, | wfie&oy, yo&op, fja&ov, | wfAt&a, ??ff#f, 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
First Future. Second Aorist. 

PARTICIPLES. 
First Future. Second Aorist. 






121 

2. *H(icu, to sit. 
INDICATIVE MOOD, 

Present 

Sing. Dual. Plur. 

filial^ fjocu, qzai, \ tifie&ov, fjo&ovj fjG&QV) \ ijiie&a, ^ff^ 9 

\J]VTai. 

Imperfect 

fijiriv, fjaO) fjro, I tffis&ov, ijg&ov, tja^V) \ ijfit&cC) ??#£, rjvro* 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present 

f}00) fja&Q)) I rja&ov, iiGxJtwv, \ r\G$z, ija^ojaocv. 

INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 

Present Present 

yG&ao. TJfiev-og, r}, ov. 



3. E*iiai y to clothe one's self. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present and Perfect 



tlliui, e*Gai, elxai 
and eiGrai. 



Etvxai. 



Pluperfect 

Hfiriv^ ^Tgo and fffffo, 

[eTlO^lGTOfeGTO, 

and tGzO) 

11 



eiVTQ. 



122 

First Aorist 

€ig- i f Sing. f Dual. f Plur. ] 

PARTICIPLES. 
Present and Perfect. First Aorist. v 

tl'ftevog. iGGapevog. x 



Class III. 
1. Kei/iai, to lie down. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present. 

Imperfect 

First Future. 

xeiG-opat') tj, erai^Ofae^ov^ 6G&ov, 6G&ov,\6[a£&cc, eG&^ovTai. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Present. 

HUGO) xaWw, | uaiGftov, netG&cov, \ xainfo, xeiG&coGav. 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 
Present. 

xso/-jU?7?>, o, ig, | {te&ov, G&ov, G&rjv, I jiif^a, a#£, vto. 

1 This verb may be considered as Middle. The Active 
is to} or tvvvfii, forming Igod 1st Fut. and hgu 1st Aor. Inf. 
ffffat, with g generally doubled ; thus, i'GGto iuv ? Horn. 
Odyss. XVI. 79. I will clothe him. 



/ 


123 


% 


SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


Present. 




First Aorist. 


ximfiui. 


1 


Keiocjfiiai. 


INFINITIVE. 




PARTICIPLE 


Present. 




Present. 


KfiG'&av. 


1 


xelfiev-og, rj, ov. 



2. 'Ioytu, to know. 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Sing. 



Present 

Dual. 
arov, ctrov, 



Plur 
after are 

and u€v, and re 



{ cc<u« 

Imperfect. 

'i(j-?iv, yg, r\, | arov, axr\v, \ after, are, aoav and ccv 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Present. 



'to-afti arco | arov draw 
and #£, and rew, | and rov, and row. 

INFINITIVE. 
Present. 

ioctvai* 



CCT£ CCTCOOCtV, Z&* 

and re , <sav and tcov 



PARTICIPLE. 
Present. 



Yacc-g, ace, v, 



124 

MIDDLE VOICE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

Sin g- Dual. Plur. 

£Gtt-(i(U, GCU, XV.l, | [At&OV, G&OV, G&OV, I lAt&Ct, ode, VTCU.l 

Imperfect. 
[iGct-prjv, go, to, I fie&ov, odov, G&riv, \ [it&a, ode, vxo> 

INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 

Present. Present. 

Yuaad-ccf. iodpev-og, t], qv. 

4. (fifyul, to say. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present. 

q)f]jil 3 (f7]g, q:?]Gi, | cpdxov, yaxdv, \ qza^uv, cpaxt, yaoL 

Imperfect. 

i'cp-riv, rig, rj, \ axov, dxriv, | apev, axe, aoctv and ai>. 2 

First Future. 

(prjG-to, tig, ti, exov, exov, ofiev, exe, ovgi. 

First Aorist. 

i'cfriG-a, ag, i], axov, axr\v, \ a/uev, axe, av, 

1 The Passive toafiai is seldom used. EtiIoxukmu of- 
ten occurs. 

2 In these two tenses the cp is frequently dropped by Ho- 
mer and the Attic writers ; thus, r)iu, r]g, r}oi j r)v, rig, rj. 



125 
Second Aorist 



Sing. Dual. Plur. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Present. 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 
Present 

First Aorist. 

q)t]G-ai(jUi cllq^ at, \ atrov, a/r^i/, | cupsv, aire, atev. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present. 

qow, (pt]9) (ft}, | (pf}TOv, (prjTOV) \ (fM^iev^ (pfjre, qjojoi. 

INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLES. 

Present. Present. 

cpavvu,. <£«£, (fct6a, qca>, 

First Aorist. First Future. 

(prjOcu, (prjacov. 

Second Aorist. First Aorist. 

(prjvat, (jp7]aag. 

PASSIVE VOICE. 

INDICATIVE. IMPERATIVE. 

Perfect nicpazui,. necpuG&Q)* 

11* 



L. 



126 

INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 

Perfect Perfect. 

necpaoft(u t mcpaa^iv-og^ rj, ov. 

MIDDLE VOICE. 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

Sing. Dual. Plur. 

q,a-fA<xl, oat, rat, \ [itftov, o&ov, g^ov^ | /*£#«, g#£, vxab. 

Imperfect and Second Aorist. 

iqa-priv, (70, to, (LU&OV) odor, o$r\v, | (,i6&cx, (7#£, vto. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 
(pcco-o, #o>, &ov, &o)v, #*, ftcoaav. 

INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 

Present. Present. 



A GENERAL LIST OF IRREGULAR AND DE- 
FECTIVE VERBS. 

There are few Verbs in the Greek language, 
which can be regularly conjugated in all their 
Moods and Tenses. Some of these deficien- 
cies may be traced to harmony ; of others, it is 






127 

difficult to assign the causes. Defective tens- 
es are supplied either from obsolete forms of 
the same Verbs, from kindred forms in other 
Dialects, or from some other Verbs in use, l 
To assist the learner in tracing these tenses to 
their respective Themes or Roots, the follow- 
ing list has been compiled. It consists of ana- 
logies, as far as they can be applied to any 
species of Verbs ; but in general it contains 
the particular formation of each tense in com- 
mon use. 

Of the following Verbs, those which are us- 
ed only in the Present and Imperfect, will be 
found in the first column ; the next column 
will contain the obsolete Roots, followed by 
the tenses which are formed from them. 

A. 

To ad- r Ayajna^ ccyuw, ayaao^ot^ ^yaocifi^V) ijycc(j{.icci. 

mire, r\y(xadt]v. 

breaks Ayvvtn, ? ayca, «ica, r\iu, ??/«, vyov. 

^ Ay vviii^ > /ayw, i'a£c«, ia/«, iayov^iayriv^baya? 



1 Such is the case in some Latin Verbs. Thus, ferio is 
used only in the Tenses formed from the Present, and bor- 
rows the Perfect and Supine and the Tenses formed from 
them, from percutio. 

2 " Aym, to breaks conjugated with the Digamma, /a/co, 
forms e a£a,/fa/«, ijayov. But, as the Digamma is seldom 
expressed in writing, the words will be a*£a, ia^a* i'ayov* 



128 

To act, ~^yw, i 

aSo) > dyocyo), riyuyov, rjyctyofttiv. 

please, "Adoj, ) ddew, ddr t Gw, jjdqKa, ridov and eadov, 
*Avbdvm, \ i'udu. 1 

Verbs in a^frequentatives, as Tpoxdfr, to 
run often. 2 

Verbs in a&a> 9 derivatives* as daoxd&co, from 
dicoxco, to pursue. 

Verbs in am, derivatives* as %£patco r from 
xegdco, to mix. 
take. Algiw, ) •» ?, c, » «-. ~ *, «* 

"" ' 1 elka/uriv. 

rjg?]Koc, j r ' 

perceive, Aio&apofuai, alo&e&), aiGftiiGOfucu, >lo&i]fiicii, 

yGftotiriv. 
increase. Akdaivo), ) >,*> >,*' v,* 

'^axw,5 C!WiW ' aXdr,ac °' V ^ VXCI - 

ward off, Aktio) < -, ..* ' >, J ' 

shun, 'AXeofiou, dtevw, ijlevaa, yfevccjuiiv and ??W- 

fir}v by Syncope. 



1 This seems to be put for tfccdet. That ccdoj had the 
Digamma appears from evaSt, Odyss. XVI. 28. 

2 Verbs of these three classes, and others in this list of 
the same form, have generally the Fres. and Imperf. only. 

3 In this list, derivatives are those which are derived 
from other Verbs* 

From Substantives and Adjectives, Verbs in aw, too, voj, evw, 
#£Vo, t£w, aivw, vvw, are generally derived ; as zifxdw from 
r^urj, cpiltoi from ylhog, dykow from drjkog, dovtevco from 
dovlog, dixd£w from dlxrj, llnl^w from iknig, afjfiaivw from 
<j^{«, prjnvvo) from ftrjnog, &c. 



129 

To roll, Afovdeto, aXlco, dViGto, rilwa* 
take, AVigy.0} LaXow, dkoj-Gco,GO[A,cu,r]hcQGct,iiktoxcf. 

( & edkcoxa, ijlcofAai, fjkcov and 

( Idlov. 

find out, Alcpaivco, ak<p*a), cdcprjGco. 
sin, A(LiayTccvoj,d{iaQT€W,dfttxoTrj-Gco, Gopai, rmaQxr\- 

Ga, via, fiat. rinaQzov, i'oet 
yppQOTOv. 
vpen, *Avwyco. \ 

a^otco, I avwyeco, Imp. yvwyovv, avcoy?;GO). 
rjvcaya & £ ai/wy^^Imper. dvwyrj&i, dv(x}%&i. 
dp coy a, J 
be hated, Anty$avQtiai,aii£yftaw, aTrsy&rjGOjuai, aTi^y&r}- 



please, Aq£Gxih, ) aoeco, age-Gco, Go^iai, rjoeGco, ?]$jeGa- 
"Agco, $ ^v^ fjgeGfidc, ^geG^p. 

increase. AvZdvm.} »v» *> ' *><<. 

j*>\. " i av^eco, avtTj-GCD, GO[Aai,7]v$t]-Ga, (iiai, 

be dis- ^AyxTo^iai, dy&eco, dyftaGopat, i]%&6G&tiv, dyde- 
pleased, GxfriGopai,. 

Verbs in aw, freqnentatives, as ixidco, to come 
frequently. 

Verbs in taco, signifying desire, as ^a^itdoy > 
to desire to learn. 

Verbs in aoj, signifying imitation, as %iaw p to 
be as white as snow. 

B. 

{ ftac*), p^GOfxat, ept]Ga, i(3f]Ga^fjv, fie- 
pr r xa, (Aui, j3efiaa, 2d Fut. fieo- 

go, Baivco, { p^ p art preg M( ^ 

! piptiiu, U A, tpriv, Subj. pelo), Part. Pr. 
I piftig. 



130 

To cast, BuMco, f/Ma», ptijGO), j3eplt}-xcc, ftcu, i- 

^aAcJ, §lr\dr]v, {ttrj&rjGOficu. 

ifiaXov, J fictkkeo), palh'iGO). 

PtfoXa, ] fHifrui i'[3h]v 2d A.Opt. M. 2d Pers. 

L fiolto), pefiolcc. 

( pcooo, (jicoGOfiai, fiefiioj-xa, fiat, 
live, Bern oxco, ( tfiiov. 

{filojf.il, ift lo) v. 
bud, BXaGxavo), ftkaGieo), filaGi^GO), pefilaGT^na, 

efilaOTOv. 
i (Sooxeoj, poGv.rj-GO),GOfiui>, fiefiooKri- 
feed, Bogy.o), I xa. 

( fiooo, 00)60), fie(jO)xct. 

will, Bovlofiaiy (jovleo), j3ovh]60fiat,, §apov\y\fiai, 

ifiovkrjdr]i>. 

eat, B Q o)0*o), $ ^ &W /^ w *«- 
rv ' ' l3ePgo)&o),p6ggo)&oi,(M. 

Verbs in /3&j, preceded by a consonant, as 
(fegficQ, to feed. 

r. 

marry, Tufio), } yafiio), yafir t G0), yaf.itGOf.iac, iyafurj- 

eyt]fia, > gu, yeyu.urj-y.ot, fxac, iyufirj- 

iy7)fio\fAi]v, ) &rj;>. 

sy)]Qao), yr i oaGOfi(/.i,tyr i Qcx.Ga, ytytiga- 

grOW TljOUGY.0), ) xa. 

old, ( yriQTjfu Pr. Inf. yrjQavai^VdiTt ytjoag. 

f yevto) , ye vr] go ft u i, iye v ijGaft r t v, yeyi- 

become, n Y vopn? j "#*' ^*Mi «/«"W, 

' j-t/ r ' < yt-yova. 

r j yeipo), ytivofiui, tyeivccfirjv. 

\_yao), yt'yuct. 

know. nyvwcxoiS 7 " 6 ^ ^"^ -W"^?**"*!"* 

r>' ' ' < tyvo)Gijr i v, yvo)0#riGOft.o:i« 

' tyvojfiL, eyvo)v* 

1 The ancient form was ylyvouai and yiypmoitcu ; which 
was softened into yivofiav and /wwffxto. 



131 



A. 



( data), danq-GO), GOfxai, dsddrjxa and &- 
Tolearn,Aalo), \ dace, dtddijjuac, iddrjv, {di'Sfja, 2 

( Aor. M. Subj. ddrirav, to bum.) 

divide, Actio), <?a£w, dcc-GO), Gopac, I'daea, idaod^v, 

dtda-nct, Ojucu. 
bite, Ad'Avco* drjxa), dr}-£u), £opcti, e^^a, dtdy-fta, 

yiACU, idriy&rjV) i'd'ewov. 
sleep, AaQ&dvo), daQftiai^daQ&rjGOfAaL, foddg&rjtta, iddg- 

drjv, h'duQ&ov and i'dya&ov. 

fear, Aeldco, ) 8d8 Imper , &%#, and Seldt&i. 

SXI?a S **' * dt0V, > Perf * M# mcct - 
ask, Atonal, deeoj der}GOfxaL, dtdtrwcu, idsrj^v^ 

dfjj{}r}<foftCi». 
teach, AtddoKoj,) 

dvddto), > d(,dctG%€(o,didcioxrjCCti. 
x dtdldaya, ) 

fly, AidgvLGwa, i dgdw, dga-aco, GOfiai, tdgaGa, didgcMvi. 
didgd'^w, \ d(jd(M, edgtjv and edgav. 

think, Aovko, ( d6 *°>' Mt», &ota, Mo-xct, wiu sad 

roet. ooytriGQ). < * * * v n / c > * r 

* *i \ 'Jooaw, doaGOjLiai,,tdoaGai{rjv,Sync.£ooct- 
t xtjxcc, { ^ v 

( dvveco), dvvr^GOjuac, idvvtjGafirjv, Sedvvfj- 
beable,Avvccfica,\ pat, zdvvrj&riv. 

( dvvdCoo, id'vvdo'&fjv. 

% f c dvo), dv-Goo. Gouca, dedv-xec* gum. 

rise, Avvco, ? *~ v v ' > \ - ' r 

Verbs in Sea, preceded by a consonant, as xv- 
Xtvdco, to roll. 

E. 

excite, *FyeiQO), i'yQO), yyQoprjv, iypriyopa. 

5 f idtoj, tdrjxct, idtG&tjv, h'drida. 
? ' ( idoa)* i'dona and £dr<doxcc, idridouw. 



132 

Verbs in e&ca, derivatives, as (pteyd&co, from 
<pXf'ya>, to burn. 

To see, EiSoj, \ 

or hgoj, [alStca, eldrjGO), eidrj-Ga, xa, Flwp.tfdetv* 

know, eidov^ldov, I u&rjju, Pr. Opt. udtii]v, Inf. eidivcu,. 
oida, 1 J 

Verbs in ecvco, poetical, as tgsdvco, to ash 

ask. Eigoj. ) =» ' =» ' 

£QOJ. > i :\ ' i^V r >, , ,„ 

Verbs in ecco, signifying desire, formed from 

Futures, as oxpetco, to desire to see, from ojitco, 

F. oyjco. 

drive, 'Ehavvco, 2 ikcco), IkccGOj, 3 tjkaGa, rilaGa^v, ?]ka- 

xa and ?jh]kayta, ihjlaxa, jj- 
kajtuxi, rihilupai and rjlaGfia^ 
rila&tpt and ^kccG^v. 
perish, "Eggoy, iggeo), i^g^GO), ijgg^Ga. 

make » ^ a t c igv&twJgv&vGO), 

red, .- w ^ I egvvo), egvGoj. 

tome, "EpftOficiii ilev&io, ikiVGOfucci, jjkevGa, ?jkv&ov, 

Sync ; yl0ov 9 Perf. M. ?jkv&u 
and iktjlvd'cc. 
eat. ' Eg fro. ) v* 101 

'i:c*im, \ td °\ see P a f 131 - 

sleep, Evdw, svSsoi^ evdrjGUj. 

Jind, EvqIgxq), evgtw, 6vgrjGO),evgrjGGtpfiv,6vgti-xcc, 

1 Olda has the force of the Present, as in Latin novi. 

2 The origin of this Verb is tlto. Hence three forms are 
derived ; the Boeotic, ikdoj ; the iEolic, ikavco ; and the Do- 
ric, ikavvm. 

3 In this tense g is frequently dropped, and the Contract 
form is adopted ; thus, «Ac5> il$Q, iktt< "EIgui comes from 
i'AAoj. 



133 

fiat, tvgt&riv, evQedrfGOftcti/, 

r oyeo), ayrj-oo), oofAGii, toyrj-xa, fxotc^ 

To have," Eyo), \ iaytftriv, GytxtrjOOfta^toyov, 

t%0), \ ioyoprjv. 

\ <yyrjpt>, 2d A. lmper. oytg. 

cook, Expo), ixpie) iiprjoco, iiprjoopai. 

Z. 

live* Zao)* > &*• ** f-~<x 3 p~ 

gird, Zo)vvvo), > £00), faiaco, i'Ccooot, t£o)oa{ttjv, i'£o) 

Zo)vvv^u, \ xa, opcu, iCcoad^p* 

©. 

be willing, Qsho), ftskeo), fiefojoo), £&tlr]Gcc, Tt&iXTjKCc. 
sharpen, 07]yavo), &t]yoj, fiytw, iib/i-a, i&?i'£a[,ir]v, t£* 

# >/-/«, y^b. 
touch, Qiyyavo), ft!ya) y #/-£w, loticu, e&iyov. 

^ &vao), Ti&vr\*a,Ti&v(xuL, xixtvewaiL 
xe&veta, xe&vewg, {woa, gen. 
wxog.) 

die, Gvrjoxo), . &rjvo), eftavov, 2. F. M. d^avovfAac. 

ftvn^w, 1 TtftviqKoi^t&vri-lo), o^at. 

j xeftviiiu, Pr. lmper. xi&va&i, Opt xe&- 
vahiv, Inf. xeftvavai, Part 
L xe&vdg, 2d A. e-d-vrjv. 

leap, Goqvvo), ) 

SoQWf.u, > &OQto), ftoorioo), t&ogov, ftogovficcn 

0QOJOXQJ, J 

I. 

place, '/dgwco, idgv&), tdgvaoj, 'idgvocc, ldgvG(i(Af]V r 

I'dgv-Kcc, (Acci,id@v&r]v and W- 

cause to t u, t t£ao), iC^ao), i£rjGa. 

sit, * { i£co, tow, too:. 

Verbs in <£», derivatives from Verbs, as zro- 
teixiQco from nokeixioj, to Jight. 

12 



134 



To direct,' I&vpa), i&vco, 

come, Ixveoiiai, ) ,,. ' 

appease, * lld.G%oiiui, ) l * 



fiy, 

burn, 
mix, 
gain, 



Inxriiiv, 
enrrjv, 

Malco, 
aavGw, 
xexctvxa, 



nrdco, 



i&VGto, 'idVGtt. 

TSofAcci, I'^cifAtiv, typed, Iko- 
ildaofAcu, lXaadfxriv,'tX^a, 
ilddi, Pr. M. iletgiCM. 



K. 



KaQuvvvw, 
Kepavvvfu, ^ 
KiQvriiii, I hqccw, 

L 



r nr}0), wycc and eaeia, l%r\a^riv & 
i ia€^afxrjv, exaov, ixdfjv. 

( k£quw, Meadow, ixegaGa, ixtQaGcc* 



G&yv, %6@aG'Qi]G0iuai. 



aeodavw i ^9^ ea) ' *£Qor r o<o, go[acu, £X£^ 



find, 
shout, 

weep, 

hear, 



xexepdcwa, 



GU, H£K£@dt]HCt. 



Ki%uvo), * xv%iix), Ki%?iGOf*ai, iulfflGa, Ixiffl- 

MlffllU, \ GU/^tjV, £Kl%OV. 

Mld£co, } 

xXdy'gw, > KlrfycD, Perf M. xtxA^/a. 

%e*Alccy%cc, j 

Mia i(o, ) 

y.ivi'kavY.u, ) 
Mkvo), vXvin, Imperf. xlv&i and niulv&i. 

. r K ' ) KOQtW, KOQtGO), £ZQQ£GU, £KO@£GCt- 

sa isjy, ^T^ j ^x6g e -» Uj pat, ixogt- 

> -^ i C'AQtliafti, KQ£(4doa),X@£(ACtG0[Jiai,ix()£- 

an Sf Q^liClVVV , y fACtGCt,iltQ£[4,CCOci(411V,il€QtfA<i- 

° " " ' ( KQ£lAruU,KQ£[A,UlAttl,. [g^V. 

kill, Mt£iv(o, \ 

wi£vw, fulfil^, £ktjiv, 2d AM- ixTccitqv, Inf. 

Ixraaa and £ maG^ai, Part. xzd^vog. 

ixrovyxa, ) 






135 



^ uvklco, xvMgo>, invfoGct, invllod^p. 
I nvfovdtoj, xvfovd joo). 

I xvw, kvgw, envca and envGGct. 
xwyGoo, $ 

( lrj%(o, kjj-'£w, gopat,^ kih]%a, Att.. 
Aay%dvw, \ tiXrj-ya, y^xav, £Aa#o*>, Perf.M. 

t liloyya. 

Irjfiw, krjxjjo^a^X^Tjipcc, Att. ettrjcpcc, 
kekflftpcw and eikrjfApai, iky- 
cp&vjv and fiktjifS'tjv, kf)q)<&r}- 
Go^iav, tkufiov, ikaftoprjv. 
kafteco, kekctfirjuvi. 

kccftpcojidftipopai, ika^npa^v, kt~ 
kappai, ikdpcp&rjv. 
d.civ&dvco, A^w, Imp. ekrjdov, krj-Gco, GOficci, 
ktkrjGpai and ktkaG^ut, ik?]~ 



To roll, Kvlivdw, 
fawn, Kvviw, 



draw 
lots, 



receive, -dapfidvw, - 



be con- 
cealed or 
escape, 



M. 
learn, Muv&dvm, pa&act), ^ad^riGO^ioct, i^iadriod^iriv, 

fieftd'drjxci, epa&ov. 
obtain, Muquto), ftanct), epanov, {lantstv, (AtpaTtoiav* 
fight, Ma%0[xca, (Au^to), ^iayr\GO[iai and pafteGoptu, i- 

lAa%£Ga[niv and ifAay^Ga^v, 
fxe^dxri^iai, 2. F^ayov^ia^. 
(nekkeoj, ^.eXXriGO), ifiekkyGct. 
uekim, fielrjGO), i^kf]Gafi7jv, (itfttkq-' 
na, {iai and fiifA^'kr^iai,, i[i£- 
Xrj&tjv, i'fitkov, {ii\ut]ka. 
( (niyoj, [A,l-£a), goftcii,, i^ii^cc, ^li^n.-yu^ 
\ ypai, fxa^d^oiAat, ipix&fjv, 2, 

A. P. iplytjv, ^ty^GO^iac. 
remem- Mc{ivriGHto, fivdoj, fivrj-Gco, GOftcu, 6(ivriGct,iftvr]- 

cdfX7]V, (AtliVTllACtl, flSfUV^GO- 

pai, ipvf] G&riv,iivri G^iqGO^at. 



about to be,Mtkkoj, 
care, Mtkw, 1 



mingle, Mtyvvw, 
Miywtii, 



>er, 



1 This Verb is chiefly used as an Impersonal. 



136 

To remain,Mitivoj, fuevto), fxefnev^ncc. 
'wipe off, Hooyivo), ^ 

p&jjgrwph > popyco, fAO^co, e/noQ&fAgy. 
Oitiogyvvfii, ) 
-bellow j Mvxu), } 

f*tfivxa, \ [ivxaw, [ivxyoto. 

1{AVKQV, ) 

N. 
inhabit, jYaico? vuw, vaGopcu,i'vaoa, ivaadinrjP; 

Verbs in vaoj, ) derivatives, as nagvaco fropi 
..... veco, $ ntpdco, to pass over 

O. 

be pained/ Oda^o), oda^ew, 6dah)oo}» 

smell, "0£a), } 

oooj \ o&o), o&goj and o&oej, ojfeacc. 

Perf. M. (Zda, 1 ) 
swell, Oidaivco, ) 

Oid&vw, > oidico, oidiqoo), wdti-oa, xcc. 
O1016KOJ, ) 

think, O/ofAcu, > olio), oirjooftai, tprjfucti, cprfptyp^ 

Olfiai^ \ o)?'jftiiv. 

go, Olt%0[A{u, ) or/e'o), or/r t GOLiai, ojytj-ya, put. 

2 A. foyo^v, \ olyooj, coyojxa. 
slide, i O?uG&cxlvo),^ofoo&ico, coL , 6'&?]-oc(, y.a, oiltO'&ov^ 

9 Q).i6&avo), ) ajhloftrji*. 

\ okt'o), oAfdoj, ojleoa, ajk£-xa, pui, 

destroy, 'OkXvco, f and oXa'dexa. oiXead-fjv, oj- 

"0)>Xu(u, ( kov^ oAco, 0)?>6jli?ip, oXovpcu, 

j toXa and oXada. 

»^ / )OUOW* OltOOOJ.OjUOGCX* OJLlOGa/UflV. 

swear. Ouvvoj. ( r ' >/ a > r 

3 it n r ' > iof.ioy.a and 0(AO)f.ioy.a, pai, 

imprint, OfAOQyvv^i, Oftooya), 6[.i6q'S,o), (oport'sdjuiiv. 
v 'Odo)du has the sense of the present 



137 

To a, "GvnuL ) oWw > «W#*i W> <%<"*' ^^f 

sist, Uvivrwh ) ^^ 2 ^or. wapyv, 

rise, *Oqvvo), ) opco, opffw, cup(ja, 9 ojgpai, oqojqoi 

"Oqvviii, > and wqoqu, ojqo^v. 

smelL 'OGcpoal- ) * t =» a * 

owe, "Otyeikw, ) oqiaiXta), oqpeikqGO), cj<p6ikTjKct, oicpetlov 

'"OgpAcw, > and myeXov. 

'Oopkioxdvo),) oqjked), oyfojGoj, (ticfktjxa. 

17. 

(nifto), miGopcci Boeot. for n^GO[Aat,, 

i enr^sci, tnadov, nenti&ct. 

suffer, HaG%o), <| na&eo), Tia&rjoo), ina&TjGa, n€nd&i]xa>. 

{ Tiiv&w, Perf. M. nenovfia, m'noG&u? 

and neno Gftcc. 

pass. Jlsovao). \ » i » r ' 

7-r-' J ttsgcio), L Sync, mourn, npaoto, mnQa-xa, 

-rf w • ' r ' V £*<*£, TiznoaGOuai, tnoavvv, 

ILmoaGKw* C r n_ ' 

boil, TLsggo), neiiToy, nexpo), ensipa, nentiiiKU, ini- 

lay open, IltTav- CttstccCo), 7i£TaGO),i7i€TCtoct,7i£7i6Tcc%cc and 

2>i5to, < TlimVMU, TTtTltTUOlMXL, 7l€7lTa~ 

JJerdvvvfxt, ( g^ul and ^at, ineTaG^v. 

fasten, iWeo, H^' '^J^^^iagifiv; te^ 

' * ? f TvayrjGopai, ndTtfjyu. 

fnoco, TiojGO), 7i8 7io)-xa ? fnai, and 7T£- 

jj~ i Trio), rres. M. mopac, niGO/uai, ztti- 

1 * i o^ 2 F. M. tuov/mu. 

\^7u^t, Imper. 7m*h. 

^'iue to drink,Uc7iiGzo), nio), nioo), I'moa. 



1 Tleoao), to pass into another country; nsovdoo, to pass 
for the purpose of selling ; TTOia^ucci, ia the Middle Voice, to 
buy a person or thing, brought from another country. 
12* 



m 

u, } nluo), ttX^go), inhrjo-ci, tifAfjP, nt- 

ivo), ) nkfjfii, hnp. Pass, inhrjfirjv. 
C tito o) , Tiemwxa. 
\ ti6to), eneoci, 67i6od^v, 

( 716060), 671600V, 2 F. M. 7Z6O0VUOU. 

sneeze, Tttaovv^iuv, mod g o), 6 tit ago v. 

inquire, Hvp&dvo(iai>, mv&co, 7i6voo[*ai, Trinvo^av, inv&o- 

fl?]V, 7ZV&0V[A,QCfo 



To Jill, UinXriiJii, 
IltfiTzfow 

fall, IIItitg), 



do, 



flow, 



'PeCto, 

g6%0), 

6gg6'Ecc, 

P60), 



P. 



Att. 6gdw, J'pgco, i'gyfxm, 6ig- 
6gyco, yiiai and ugyficKi, Perf. M. 

i'o^ya. 
gv6co, gvf'jco), gvr}0Q{icu, iggvtjxa, 



break, *Pr\yvvo), 

c pr\yvvni, 
strength- 'Pojvssvco, 
en, 'Pcopw/m, 



6ggv?]v. 
) gi!i ooo), giito),6ggr]-£ct, -^cc^tjp, -yu & 
> i'gpojya, 6Qgayriv,guyi)oo[Aat,. 

) go 0} 



goojya, 6ggccy7jp,gv.y)joojLn 
go)oo),6ggo)-oa,xct,{Aai&iOftai,, 
iggojo&iiv, 6 ggwoo, farewell 



X 



quench, Sj6vvvo), 

2fi6VVVlXl, 



opio), o^600), 6G/36GCC, 6o^6na and 
i'ofirixa, 60§60f.iac, iop60^v > 
o@6O&r]G0[Aat,. 
o/3r][.u, lofty v. 

scatter, 2x6davvvo), \ ox6dcco),OK6dc*oo), io7t6du-Ga, Gpcu, «- 
£x6davvvfM, (. ox6ddo&r]v. 

C ozhcto), oahioofxcKt, 1 Aor. KokyiXu, £- 
dry up, 2?x6Moj, < cixA^xa. 

f axA^u^Pr. Inf. Gxlrjvui. 

Verbs in gxco, * derivatives, form their tenses 



1 Verbs in (txo>, which have a great affinity to Verbs in 
pi, are derived from Primitives in aco, 6co, oco, and vo), and 
are formed by the insertion of x after the o of the 1st Fu- 
ture ; thus, from ytiguo), yrigdoo), is formed yygdoxcQy tp 



139 

from their primitives, as evpioxa, eupeco, *£{$* 
6co, etc. to find. 

To offer 2nevdto, Gnelco, Gnel-GM, Gopai, tGneiG-ct, u~ 

libation, fir\v, pat,, tiriv. 

spread, JZxooevvvto, } » ~ 3 f 

2<XOOVVlll, J r ' ' ' 

<Zl()OJVVVto, ) GXQOto, GXQtoGto, tGtQMGa, tGZQtoGQl- 

2lQtol>VV[lt,, \ yW\V> tGTQOJfACU, 

have, Zykftto, g%£0), see page 133. 

T. 

xXaw,' rkf]GOfiai, zexXqKcc. 

xXr^ii, txXr\v, 

ray to, trayov, xexaya. 

XB^to, X6f,lt]Gto. 

xpato, Xfitj^to, £T{*rj'£ct, x£X{xr}-%ct, 
pat, izfArj&qv, erpa-yov, yr}v* 

X{lUyir}GO[A(U. 
X£Xto, Z6-£to, ZofACil, lz£%&7}V, iVf- 

aov, irtKOftr/i/, xexoaa. 
< xQUto, xQ^Gto,ZxQriGu,xkxQri-Ka,iiai, 
through^TixQti^v, IxcxQaivto, 1 A. iziiyrjva. [ix^rjdtjv. 

WOUnd, TlZQtoGKto, TQQto, XQO)-Gto,GO(.lCU,h'xQtoG(X,X£XQto* 

pai, ixQtoftr\v, xQto^7\G0^at. 



grow old; from aQtco, aotGto, dgeGXto, to please ; from fie- 
oco, fiitoGto, j3t,MGKto, to live ; and from [te&vto, [A£{rvGa), 
(tt&vGKto, to be drunk. 

Some of these, like Verbs in pi, prefix the Reduplica- 
tion, as yiyvtoGKto, to know, from yvtoGto, r^rpojoxo), to wound, 
from zQtoGto. Some change the vowel of the penultima, as 
rj^to, rffirjGto, yficcGXto, to grow up* 

1 TtfAVto and xdfxvto are both found ; the former derived 
from ztftto, the latter from zdpoj. Hence the 2d Aorist is 
either i'xepov or hupov. See page 79. 



bear, 


TaXato, 


extend, 


TexXrjfM, 
Tavvco, 


cut, 


Teftvto, * 




XSflto, 




xexepTjKcc, 


bring 
forth, 
bore 


Thxto, 

TlXQUto, 



140 

To run, I'Qtyw, C dgociieoj, 8idQctLi?}-Kci, [tat. 

ftijaio), < dgijiti, ifQpapov, 2 F. M. dpaiiovLicu, 

eat, Tpwy oj, iqayw, (payo^ai, 2 F. M. tyayovpoci,, 

ei^juyov, I tquyov. 

C tv yew, TVXWGM* irvyrjoa, Tarvytjaa, 

be, Tvy^av(a ? \ xtvyo), xevLOuab, tergyfta, Tervyiiai, 

I t£tv ivLUti,, hvyfiriv, txv/ov. 

T, 

promise, ' Tmoyveoiiai, vno&ysco, VTiooy^ooiiat^vnaGyri^cct, 

vneoy-a&rjv, QLiqv, 

Verbs in v&u> 9 derivatives, as (pfrivu&a>, from 
<p&€co, to consume. 

Verbs in vco P polysyllables, as opevvvco, to 
quench. 



#. 







say, #«W»/ \9 tta i ■ fin*, *Vtl°«- 

foioj, oloo), otooLiui, o7o&r]v, oi(jOr]~ 

copai. 

iveyxco, 1 A. ijveyna, r\viyYMiir]v, r)vk- 

yftrjv, r\vtyy.ov, ?]peyzoiirjv. 

bear, &8QW, *{ evaxoj, 1 A. r]vawa, ^pemcliiTjv, ivqve- 

yiiai, rjvey&rji/. 

J tveyco, -Perf. M. lvv\voya. 

' qOQSO), Cf0Ql]O(x>, ZcpOQtiGa, necpOQriLicu, 

Sync. CfQtw, (pprjoa), etc. 

tpQqpfy Imperat. 2 A. oppeg, 

\ ^n.' $ W'd'dau w&-uo(o,?ioouai,e<f)&a-G<x,xc(» 
prevent, 0&<xvO), i a ~ ' >' Q * T 

corrupt^ (&&lvQ), cp&iv), q?&l-oco,ooiiai,e(p{ri-oci,itci,fi<xb. 



141 



To pre- &VW, 1 
duce, cpvGw, 



qjvfii, tcpvv. 



rejoice, X.aiQO), 
yapm, 
xeyaQxa, 

obtain, Xctvdapoj, 

gape, J£<xgxco, 

J£(kgxcc£co, 
colour, JLqwpvvw, 

XQODVVVfXV, 

hury, Xcovpvo), 
Xojpvvpi, 



yaQtoi, yaQrjGa),yccQiiGO[ACU, eyapfjv. 
yaiQtw, yai^rjGw, tyaiQtiGa, Ktydfji]' 

%cc, (uac, K6ya$j?]G0[Aai* 

i'yadov, xtyavda. 

yeiGOf/ai. 

%(xvw, yavovpou, tyavov, kU 

yap a and Ktyjiva. 

^o'w, ypojoco, K£yj)(o-iAcci and opal: 



< yafa, 
c yalpoj, 



pow, 



ycoooj, tycoGa, ntywotictt,, 
iyojo&rjv, yooG&fjooiiUb. 



Si. 



drive. 



'Sifeco, 
iwdovv, 



> oj&cq, o'jow, ojgcc, wGfiai, wa^i/. 8 



1 (pvoj signifies to produce ; &v )u ? in the middle sense, 
to suffer one?s self to be produced, or to be born. The Perf. 
TTtqpvxa, as well as the 2d Aor. ecpvp, qvpcci, and qvg, has a 
passive signification. 

2 To the list of Defective, may be added Impersonal 
Verbs, which differ little from those in the Latin language, 
and will be easily learnt by use. 

Verbal Nouns 

are formed from Tenses of the Indicative, by dropping the 
Augment, and changing the termination. 

Some are formed from the Present, as iivva^ig, strength, 
from dvpafA-ai, to be able, xkekTqg, a thief, from i&Xiwtw, to steal. 

Some few from the Aorist, as cotu from edoca, &t}afj from 
*xfr;xa j <pv yr\ from tcpvyop, na&og from tiwdov. 



142 

ADVERBS, i 



Those which require particular notice as 
distinguished from the Latin, are the follow- 
ing: signifying 

In a place, ending in ##, &i, xy, yov, and 01 ; 
as Zvxaviha, here ; ovpavo&i, in Heaven ; navxa- 



The larger proportion are formed from, 

1. The Perfect Active, distinguished by x, %, or cp, in the 
last syllable, as cfQiv.r\ from neypwcc, dcda^ from dedida%cc r 
^QCKCftj from yeyQCKfa. 

2. Perfect Passive. 

First Person, distinguished by M, and ending in 

/tea, 7ioh](na from nenoirj^iai, 

tit], fj,v?iprj from ^eiivtjfxav, 

(twg, y.>cd(bt6g from expaluav, 

(ncov, juv^^cop from ixt^vr^aL. 
Second Person, distinguished by 2, and ending in 

Gia, ftvoia from xt&vGut, 

etg, kt£ig from Itketat, 

Giog, &av(AaoLog from xedccvfictGcci, 

Gipog, xgriGifiog from Ht'xQfjoai. 
Third Person, distinguished by T, and ending in 

ttjq, t?;£, doxrjg, notxjxr t g, 

xriQiog, xr\Qiov, \vx7]Qiog, noxi]Qiov, 

rog, xixog, alG&?jxog, dxovGxwog, 

TQU, XQOV, jHOiKTQa, Y.OLXOUXQOV, 
XCOQ, KOG/,irjXCO@, 

reog, xecc, xeov, ygcmxtog, yQanxia, yganxtov. 

3. Perfect Middle, terminating in «, ag, tvg, r\, yg^ ig, og, 
as qc#op« from tty&oga, vopdg from vtvofnu, xonfvg from 
xexoxa, xgocfri from xtxQoqa, xvnr} from xtxvna, fiollg from 
Biftola, xopog from xtxofAa, &c. 

1 The undeclinable parts of speech are comprised under 
the general name of Particles. 



143 

X*j and navxaypv, in every place ; nzdoi, on the 
ground. 

Motion from a place, in &e and &*v, as ovpa- 
v6&£, and ovpav6&ev,from Heaven. 

Motion to a place, in (fe, £*, at, and at, as oJ- 
gavovde* and ovpavo6€, to Heave?! ; ^afia^e, to 
the ground ; A^v^gl, to Athens. 

Adverbial Particles, used only in Composi- 
tion. 

r Privation, from ccvtv, without , 2 as clv- 
vSqoq, without water* 

a or m>, signifying < /ncrefl ?' from «>«', «»««*, as «^o ? , 
7 & ^ & j mwc/i wooded. 

I Union, from a^ua, together, as «Ao/o£, 

L a consort. 

The following signify increase : 

6Qh from I'^ca, to connect. 
&, iEolic for &a. 
Aa, from A/(*i>, mwcL 
A^ the same. 

jdvs signifies difficulty, as duorvxdco, to he un- 
happy? 

Nt and vy signify privation, like the Latin 
ne, as vyAerjs, without pity. 



jkqv, from uqoj^, to furnish 
fiov, from /?ov£, an ox. 
@qi, from pQiftvg, strong 
da, from <5a(7U£, tfta'cfc. 



1 Homer sometimes doubles da, as ovda dofiovde. 

2 ^ before a consonant drops the v, as aftavutog, im- 
mortal. Thus the English Article an, from the German ein t 
drops the n before a consonant, as an arm, a man. 

3 So in Ovid, Dyspari, Unhappy Paris ! 



144 

Metrical Synopsis of Inseparable Particles, 

Ag igi, fiov, da, £a, la, h, figi, composita augent. 
Avg, diff. ve et vt), priv. a privat, colligit, auget 



PREPOSITIONS. 



Six are Monosyllables : etg, lx or *|, lv, npo 9 



npoe, ovv. 



Twelve Dissyllables : d/ucpl, dvd, aril, dno, 
dta, InU xccTCt< /neia, napa, Tiepl, v^iep^ vno} 

In composition, five of these increase the 
signification : c0, he or i£, ovv > mpl, vnep. 

Six sometimes increase, and sometimes 
change : dvjl, ano, dia, xaia, napa npog. 

One diminishes : vno. 

One changes : /lutcc. 

Metrical Synopsis of the Government of 
Prepositions. 

*Avr , d:r\ Ia, ngo, Genit et\% dJ , Ace. gvv, iv que Dativo. 
At, unto, Ace. Genitiv. ymtu y.al perd insuper addunt 
*AfA(f, in, vno, naod, ngog, negt, tres sumunt sibi casu§. 
Poetae jungunt uvd, xal y.ard, v,ul {nerd Dandi. 

CONJUNCTIONS 

are exhibited with the Moods to which they 
are joined, in the SYNTAX. 



1 Of the Prepositions the three first are Atonies, without 
an accent ; the rest are Oxytons. 



145 
SYNTAX. 



THE NOMINATIVE AND THE VERB. 

The Nominative Case is the subject of the: 
Verb; as 

iyco didcQfU) I give. 

A Verb agrees with its Nominative in Nunj- 
ber and Person ; as 

JZcoKQCtTrjg t(fr], Socrates said. 
'0(p&al[iQ) \<x[jni£TOv, His eyes shine. 
KxtradovGiv oQvi&eg^ Birds sing. 

A Neuter Plural is generally joined with a 
Verb Singular ; as 

"Oqw rp^e*, Homer, Mountains trembled? 



1 Several rules of Construction, which are common to 
the Greek and Latin languages, are here omitted; but some 
of the anomalies are noticed, which the latter has imitated 
from the former. 

2 As a Noun of multitude Singular may be followed by a 
Verb Plural, so a Neuter Plural is often taken in a collective 
sense, and followed by a Verb Singular. Thus when Ho- 
mer says dovga ot'orjne, he means the collection of planks 
and timber with which the ships were constructed 

The Plural Noun is sometimes Masculine or Feminine, 
but it is used in a collective sense ; as aytlrfxi opqjctl pefa!- 
cov, Pindar; dtdoxzcu, rkrjpoveg yvyal, Euripides. 
13 



146 

A Dual Nominative is sometimes joined with 
a Verb Plural ; as 

v u4/tcyw leyov oi, Herodotus, Both say. 1 

SUBSTANTIVE AND SUBSTANTIVE. 

Substantives signifying the same thing agree 
in case ; as 

Kvalaorjg^ 6 ncug tov Aoxvayov, Cyaxares, the son of 
Astyages. 

THE SUBSTANTIVE AIN T D THE ADJECTIVE. 

An Adjective agrees with its Substantive in 
Gender, Number, and Case ; as 

"jivdQig aya&ol, Good men- 

'OfiMai xaxai, Evil Communications. 

' 'M&veu TioAAa, Many nations. 



In the Doric and Ionic Dialects the Singular or Plural 
Verb followed the Neuter Plural Nominative ; the Attic 
restricted the Verb to the Singular, except in some instan- 
ces, of which animals are the subject. 

This construction is not confined to the Greek language. 
It is frequent in the Hebrew ; see Exodus xxi. 4. Job xii. 
7. Isaiah ii. 11. Psalm lxxiii. 7. &c. In French this mode 
is common in every Gender in an Impersonal form ; // est 
des homines, il est des femmes* But the Verb in that case 
precedes the Nominative ; il vient de sonner dix hemes ; if 
the Nominative precedes, it has a Verb Plural ; dix heures 
viennent de sonner. 

1 In prose this construction is general. 

In the same manner a Dual Substantive, as it signifies 
more than one, may have an Adjective Plural; but the 
Verb or Adjective can seldom be of the Dual Number, 
when the Noun implies more than two. 



147 

To this rule belong Articles, Pronominal Adjectives, and 
Participles. 

An Adjective of the Masculine Gender is 
sometimes found with a Feminine ^Substantive : 
as 

Tci) yvvouxa, Xenophon, The two zvomen. 1 

A Substantive is sometimes used as an Ad- 
jective ; as 



1 The Attic construction is used in order to generalize 
the sense, as Stag and Deus are applied to both sexes for a 
divine, ilv&Qwnog and homo for a human person. Thus du~ 
cente Deo in Virgil refers to Venus, and avrriv i?\v Beov in 
Herodotus to Minerva. Perhaps also this form is adopted 
to dignify the female sex. On this principle, when a wo- 
man speaks of herself in the Plural Number, a mode of 
speech adopted by the great, she uses the Masculine Gen- 
der; as ol npo&vrGKOVT£Q,Em\p. spoken by Alcestis of her- 
self ; xxevovfitv, oYneg i'&yvGaiitv, by Medea ; ira&ovTeg. 
ri^aQTi]'AOreg^ Sophocles, by Antigone. Thus also when a 
chorus of women speak of themselves. This mode is con- 
fined to the Dual and Plural. The Masculine Article is 
joined with a Feminine Noun in the Dual only. 

Compound and Derivative Adjectives in og are consider- 
ed by the Attic writers as of two terminations, and are con- 
sequently used as Feminine as well as Masculine. See 
page 35. 

Comparatives and Superlatives of three terminations some- 
times express the Feminine by the Masculine termination, 
as anoQOjTtQog j krjipig, Thucydides. 

When the Adjective is put in the Neuter after a different 
Gender, XQrjpoc is understood, as og&ov iq uXrideia, Soph. 
Thus triste lupus stabulis, Virg. The ellipsis is sometimes 
supplied, as rl %Qy[Aa dyaoeig. Soph. 



148 

rXnoaav 'EXlada idldale, Her. He taught the Greek 
language. 1 

The Substantive is often changed into a Gen- 
itive Plural, preceded by a Pronoun, or an Ar- 
ticle ; as 

01 dya&ol rojy uvSqwv, Isocrates, Honourable men. 2 

THE ARTICLE. 

The Article is used to make a distinction or 
emphasis. With the Infinitive it supplies the 
place of Nouns, Gerunds, and Supines. With 
a participle, it is translated by the Relative and 
Indicative. With /utv and <W it signifies part- 
ly ; and it is often used for ornament ; as 



1 So ficm anus, Pliny, Jin old Jig tree. This combina- 
tion is common in English ; thus sea water, gold watch* 
house dog. 'ElXdg may be considered as an Adjective used 
as a Substantive. 

Adjectives are frequently employed alone, taking the 
place of a substantive, as ol ttoAAoi, ret //tea, &c. Indeed, 
many Substantives in all languages were formed in this 
manner; thus 6 not^v, i. e. dvriQ\ dwaGTcd, i. e. avdpeg ; 
nvcTplg, i. e. yr\\ patria, i. e. terra ; the cold, i. e. weather, &c. 

2 So nigrae lanarum nullum color em bibunt, Plin. By this 
construction eminence is expressed in Hebrew, as Prov. xxi. 
20. Isaiah xxviii. 8. 

This construction is also found, in Attic writers, in the 
singular, as rtjp nkeloTrjv zijg argccziclg, Thuc 

In the Greek idiom the Genitive of the Personal is used 
instead of the Possessive Pronouns, as xi]v (.lyriQa /liov Tipag 
Xen. You honour my mother. But the latter are sometimes 
found with the Article, particularly in the orators, as rvv 
opovoicw tijv v^ierioav ol noMol nioovob, Isoo. 



149 

AiGyvXog, 6 TQaytodog, JEschylus, the tragedian. 
Ta i'£ co, The things without. 
Ev tco qjQOV(7v, In wisdom. 
c O eQyofievog, He that cometh. 
T* uvftQOintiQv ytvog, rrj [a£v v.ya&ov, ty Si qavKov* 
Mankind are partly good, and partly bad. 

\H viKrj r\ vwr](7uGu top xooftov r\ niGvig, Faith, the 
victory which overcomes the world. 

THE RELATIVE AND THE ARTICLE. 1 

The relative often agrees with its Antece- 
dent in case, by Attraction ; as 

'jEJp rulg ioQralg, aTg jjyofiev, Aristophanes, In the fes- 
tivals which we celebrated, 2 

The Article is poetically used for the Rela- 
tive; as 

Haxr\Q, 6 g ecgeqt, Horn. Your father, who educated 
you? 



1 As the Relative and the Article have the same origin, 
as they are frequently used the one for the other, and the 
Feminine in both is distinguished only by the accent, they 
are joined under one head. 

2 This is called Attraction, as the Antecedent attracts the 
Relative into its case. This Attic form has been imitated in 
Latin ; Si quid agas eorum, quorum consuesti, Cicero. 

The Relative, in this construction, sometimes precedes 
the Substantive ; as guv j? i'ysig dvvapti, Xen. 

3 The Article is often put for ovrog and txehog, as 6 yag 
(JuGckrj'i' yokol&eig, Horn. In this sense 6 or 6 imy be con- 
sidered as the Nominative of the Pronoun Personal ov. 
The Relative also sometimes bears the same signification, 
as 7\ d ? og, Plato, And he said. 

13* 



150 

The Article, when it differs from the En- 
glish, is found in a general or indefinite sense* 
and even before proper names ; as 

Trjv d^r\v7\v 7TO££7(7#<u,Demosthenes, To makepeace. 1 
' Ecpri 6 -Z<wxpar*/£, Xen. Socrates said* 2 

It is frequently joined to a Participle ; as 

'O (pvXaTTtov, Her. The guarding, i. e. he, who guards. 3 

The Article in the Neuter Gender, before a 
Genitive, signifies elliptically possession or- re- 
lation; as 

O Gtog ru tcov dvdgojTiojv dioixel, Isocr. God directs the 
affairs of men. 4 



1 Similsr to this is the French idiom la paix. Even in 
these instances a particular emphasis is often implied ; thus 
r t hq^vt} may signify the peace desired ; 6 -^coxpar^, the 
great philosopher. In- Italian // Tasso, and in French le Tasse, 
express the Poet Tasso. Thus in Holinshed and Shakspeare, 
The Douglas. 

2 Xenophon frequently omits the Article, ddwii 2(oKQa- 
rrjg, Memor. but never with i'qrj or tine. 

3 The Article is sometimes dropped by the Poets, and 
the Participle is used alone, as evgmv, Pind. the inventor ; 
«juaIi'T££, Theocritus, the reapers. Thus in Horace spectans, 
the spectator ; mugientes, the oxen. 

4 Sometimes the ellipsis is supplied, as r« roZv 0rj(3ai(av 

In some cases the relation between the Article and the 
Noun following is so close, that the distinction of the jjroji- 
erty and the thing itself is scarcely perceptible, as za rrjg 
TV%rjg oleiag t%H t«c ptra/?oAag, Dem. Fortune has sud- 



151 

THE GENITIVE. 1 
One Substantive governs another, signifying 
a different thing, in the Genitive ; as 

2^e'kag qklov, Light of the sun. 

An Adjective in the Neuter Gender, without 
a Substantive, governs the Genitive ; as 

To lomov (ptQog) ztjg rifitQag, The rest of the day. 



den revolutions. Thus to ifiov, rd f/<«, are sometimes equiv- 
alent to *ya>, &c. 

The Plural article, followed by cc/nql and mpl with a 
proper name, signifies attendants, or the party, as ol dptyl 
IlQiqiov, Horn, meaning the attendants of Priam ; enerihev- 
to Tfu UtoxQaxei ol d^yl xov*' Avvxov, ^lian, meaning the 
party of Anytus. Here is evidently a distinction of persons, 
and Priam and Anytus alone cannot be implied. This is 
found in Latin ; Qui circa ilium erant, Ter. Qui sunt a Pla- 
tone, Cic. 

The Article has a peculiar construction in this elliptical 
form before an Accusative and an Infinitive Mood ; as to 
%<xIquv xo7g ftcfirjfiaac navxag, avpyvTOv xolg dv&Qwnoig 
ioi l, Arist. This circumstance, that all should delight in im- 
itations, is natural to men. This form is common in the 
Scriptures ; as iv toj tipai avxov, St Luke ; i. e. iv rqj ^oo- 
v(o or ngdyfjiaxi, in the time, or circumstance, that he was ; 
or simply, while he was. 

1 The primary signification of the Genitive is the origin^ 
or cause, from which a thing proceeds, or possession* To 
these may be traced most of the uses to which that case is 
applied. But in construction, it must depend either on a 
Substantive, or a Preposition, expressed or understood. 



152 

Adjectives signifying plenty, worth, condem- 
nation, power, and their contraries ; also verbals 
compounded with a privative, and those which 
signify an emotion of the mind, require the 
Genitive ; as 

'* JEyya nkeiozov agici, Works worthy of the highest valve. 
T<uv %ul£ntov uneiQog dta^tojarj^ You shall live with- 
out trouble. 

rvfiiaoia /ueara avoQiov, Places of exercise full of men. 
Avuhiog dopgoGuvyg, Not blamablefor imprudence* 

The matter, of which a thing is made, is put 
in the Genitive ; as 

Tov dlqgov inolrjotv Ig%vq<x)v £tUcoa>, Xen. He built the 
chariot of strong wood. 1 

Cost or value, crime or punishment, differ* 
ence or eminence, are put in the Genitive ; as 

Aog avrov r^iiv dpaxprjg, Anacreon, Give him to us for 
nine pence? 

rtpcKfOftai oe (AOt,%dag, Lysias, I accuse you of adultery? 



1 So the measure, as dioMoaiow nodwv, Thucydides. 

This Genitive is governed hy in and and, sometimes ex- 
pressed, as r&Tvyntva tl dddfuavrog, Theocr. ano Ivkmv 
nenoi-rjfjieva, Hesiod. 

2 This is governed by dvrl, as uklutTeo&cd tlvi rgoqag 
dvrl vofAiofAUTog^ Arist. Sometimes the Dative is used; 
nglao&ai fiovoi, Lucian. 

3 This is governed by mpi, as diu'jxw at tmqi tfctvcczov, 
Xen. These words are sometimes put in the Dative, f^jCM- 
meuvxog 7itvTi]xovTa rakdvroig, Her. 



153 

AiaytQWv xwv attoav, Plato, Different from the others. 
Xdpfia ndvxwv ind&ov, Pindar, A joy surpassing all. 

JEi/jlI and yivo/iai, signifying possession, pro~ 
perty, or duty, govern the genitive , as 

€ niTiQaOKOfitvog IxtQOv yivexai. He who is sold, be* 
comes the property of another. 

Part of time is put in the genitive ; as 

G£qovq re xtff %£i[iCjvog) Xen. In summer and winter. l 

Exclamations of grief and surprise are put 
in the Genitive ; as 

Trjg fMopiag, Aristoph. What folly ! 2 

Comparatives are followed by a Genitive ; 
as 

1 AvoiQylag ^iit^ov ovx taxi hcmov, Sophocles, There is 
no greater evil than anarchy- 3 

1 This is governed by tnl, sometimes expressed, as In 
yfitprjg, Her. When the Dative is used, it is governed by 
iv understood, and sometimes expressed ; as iv toj ctvxco #*- 
o*£, Thuc. 

2 O'ifiov is often prefixed, as oi'fioc xaiv xcckgjv, Aristoph, 
i. e. tPSKa. 

3 This genitive is governed by dvxl or tcqo ; thus, pel- 
£oov dvxl trig ndxpag, Soph. Than after a Comparative is 
often expressed by ?J, as xi yivobx dv iknog fiH&v, ?■ epilog 
xaxos, Soph. 

The Comparative (ictkXov is sometimes understood, a Ka* 
kov xo [trj £yv ioxlv, rj Cyr a#A/a>£, Menander. 

Perhaps the Genitive after the Comparative may be con- 
sidered as the Case absolute ; thus, dvccgylccg {pvorig under- 
stood) anarchy existing, there is no greater evil* 

Perhaps, too, r) may be considered as the Subjunctive of 



^mmm 



154 

Partitives, Comparatives, Superlatives, In* 
terrogatives, and Numerals, govern the Geni- 
tive Plural ; as 

Movog {jqotwv, The only one of mortals. 

Of veojT^QOt c*p&f)fjj7T(Dh\ The younger of men* 

KctMiaxoQ nozafnav, The most beautiful of rivers. 

Verbs signifying the senses, or the passions, 
are followed by a Genitive; as 

Tcov [.iuqtvqwv ux?jx6ut£, Isoc. You have heard the 
witnesses. 1 

Tig gvx av ayaoaixo zrjg aQsxrig, Dern. Who would 
not admire virtue ? 2 

To Iquv t(Zv GwcfQOvwv, j£schines, To love the mod- 
est. 3 



eif.il. On that principle, the resolution of the last examples 
will be, Let there be, or if there be a bad friend, what can be 
a greater sore ? If it be necessary to live miserably, not to live 
is desirable* 

1 Many of these are frequently found with an Accusative, 
Those of seeing, always, as oqw tov kuiqov, Isoc 

\Axovo), signifying" to hear one's self called, or simply to 
be called^ns the construction of Verbs of existence, as ovt 
dxouGOfuoti y.axog, Soph. It is often used with the adverbs 
«*, xaxo~g, and xcdwg, and followed by vno or nafja with a 
Genitive, as nax&g azovevv vno tcov tio\lto~v, Isoc. Thus 
Cicero, Est hominis ingenui velle bene audire ab omnibus. So 
Milton, 

Or hearst thou rather pure etherial stream. 

2 Thus Virgil, Justitiaene prius mirer, belline laborum ? 

3 To these may be added Verbs signifying to abstain, to 
ask, to attain, to begin, to care, to cease, to command, to con- 
quer, to despise, to differ, to endeavour, to fill, to neglect, to re- 
member, to restrain, to separate, to share, to spare ; and in gen- 



155 

A noun and Participle are put absolute in 
the Genitive ; 1 as 

'Hliov xtXlovxog, Soph* The sun rising. 2 



eral, those which imply of or from, and may he followed by 
in and avxi. But many of these are found with other cases. 
The Latin language has imitated this construction ; thus, 
Daunus agrestium regnavit populorum, Hor. Tempus desiste- 
re pugnae, Virg. etc. 

1 Sometimes in the Dative, often in the Accusative, in 
the Nominative rarely ; as 

IlaQiOvxt iviavxco, Jit the close of the year. 
Atov tt£Qa, When other things agreed. 
The Noun or Pronoun, and sometimes the Participle, are 
understood. 

2 This construction may in general be considered as ex- 
pressing the cause of the event which is the subject of the 
sentence. Thus, in the sentence Libertate oppressd, nihil est 
quod speremus, Cic. what is the cause of that state of despera- 
tion ? The destruction of liberty. In Nil desperandum, Teucro 
duce, Hor. what is the cause of that confidence ? The direction 
of Teucer. This is by some grammarians, but improperly, 
called the case of consequence. It is governed by £x, iul % or 
vno understood, and sometimes expressed, dvodvxojv viz 
^atwv, Horn. Thus Ovid, Nullo sub indice. 

From this solution it will follow, that the case absolute 
will vary according to the nature of the Prepositions which 
govern it. Hence we find the Dative and Accusative in 
that sense ; as Au cog xegnixeQavvm ycoofAevoj, Horn, evi- 
dently governed by vno. The Attics often use the Accu- 
sative governed by a Preposition understood, as xtav el qcc- 
vivx aeknxa, Soph, ivxav&a drj xgia ovxcc cpyovQict, Xen. 
Thus the three cases with which Prepositions are joined, 
may be used absolutely ; in some writers they are used pro- 
miscuously, even in the same sentence. 



156 

The Genitive is often governed by a Sub- 
stantive or a Preposition understood ; as 

Utuv vdarog, Herod, (piQog und.) To drink some 
water. l 

Maxdgiog rr)g TV%rjQ, Aristoph. (ivexu und.) Happy by 
his fortune. 2 

M<xQ\pag nodog vvv, Soph, (ix und,) Having seized him 
by the foot. 



To the Accusative must be referred most of those in- 
stances which are said to be in the Nominative, as &W, 
i£ov, Tiagov, etc Those which are really in the Nomina- 
tive may be construed upon common principles ; such as 
that in Horn. Jl. I. 171, where lew refers to the Nominative 
of the Verb 6'iw. In other instances, a Verb must be under- 
stood ; but that anomaly is very unfrequent in good writers, 
though in use among the modern Greeks ; as (lugsvovtccq 
iyw v.710 xriv ixxfojoiap, emoev r] ortyrj xov anexcov gov, 
As I zvas coming out of the church, the roof of your house fell. 
And yet some instances are found in Latin ; Ceterae philoso- 
phorum disciplinae, — eas nihil adjuvare arbitror, Cic. 
Nam nos omnes, quibus est alicunde aliquis objectus labos, 
Omne quod est interea tempus priusqudm id rescitum est, lu? 
cro est, Ter. 



3 Thus in the French, boire de Veau, du vin, etc. 

2 Thus in Latin, Fortunatus laborum, Virg. Lassus maris 
et viarum, Hor. Sunt lachrymac rerum, Virg. 

The Genitive of Substantives is often used for an Adjec- 
tive in the New Testament and intbe Septuagint,in imita- 
tion of the Hebrew idiom; thus, av&QQ)nog rr]g ctjuapriug, 
the man of sin for the sinful man. This mode has been late- 
ly adopted in the English language. 



157 

DATIVE. x 
Adjectives signifying profit, obedience, fit- 
ness, trust, clearness, facility, and their contra- 
ries ; and those compounded with ow and o- 
[jlov, govern the Dative ; as 

c Jffuv tQTOLi ygr^tfiov, It will be useful to us. 
2!vvTQOCpog xri dnlorrju, Accustomed to simplicity. 
'Ekev&igo) dvogl svxtov, To be wished for by a liberal 



man. 



The instrument and manner of an action are 
put in the Dative ; 2 as 

' AQyvQtaig Xoyyawsi (ndyov, nal navxa xgaxrjGtig, O- 
racle to Philip, Fight with siher weapons, and you will con* 
quer the world. 

"Hhaae Slyei nal i'nzcpve doho, Horn. He struck him 
with a sword, and killed him by stratagem. 3 



1 This case is generally used as the dative in Latin. Tt 
expresses the object to which the action is directed, or for 
which it is intended. It implies acquisition and loss. It is 
placed after f«/ii, etc. in the sense of habeo, and after Verbs 
signifying likeness, agreement, trust, resistance, relation, etc. 
It follows Verbs compounded with dvri, iv, inl, ixaod, nQog, 
ovv, V7i6. It is frequently governed by Iv, ini, ovv, or 
some other preposition, understood. 

2 This case in these instances may be called the illa- 
tive ; and the analogy with the Latin will be preserved. 

3 Instead of the Dative, the Prepositions did, iv, inl, va- 
ra, are sometimes used with their proper cases, as iTralye- 
oftai inl nXomto, Xen. iv @t\ei nlmtflg*, Eurip. 

To this rule may be referred the excess or deficiency of 
measure, as av&Qoincov paKpai aQioxog, Her. 
14 



158 

Verbs of serving, giving, rejoicing, obeying, 
trusting, fighting, and the like, with their -con- 
traries, govern the Dative ; as 

jBotj&av rr nargidc, To help his country. 

Er/.ew y.cr/.olg, To yield to misfortunes. 

Jfayeo&ai Toledo?,* into eg, To fight against enemies.' 

Hag avTfO avTo) novel, Everyman labours for himself. 

Verbs signifying to accompany or follow, to 
blame, to converse, to pray, to use, are follow- 
ed by a Dative ; as 

To) vfjtg inovjo, Horn. Him ships followed. 

TTtGrovg ijyov rovg rolg duaoTapOf-iepoig imTifxaivTctg. 
Plutarch, Think those faithful, who reprove your faults. 

2o(folg 6[A.iloiv, xavzog inmost Goqog, Menand. Asso- 
ciating with the wise, you yourself will become wise. 

Ev/to&ai Act, To pray to God. x 

IlgopuTOig yQr t G&ai, Xen. To use sheep. 2 

Etf.il put for i'/co, to have, governs the Da- 
tive ; as 

"Oooig ovY. ?]v akqiiTa, As many as had not bread. 

An Impersonal Verb governs the Dative ; as 

MtyLorov avro) i'do^ev eivai, It seemed greatest to him. 



3 Aeofxtu requires a genitive of the Person, as derjGOjLiat, 
vpdiv, ^sch. 

2 Many Verbs have a Dative of the person, and a Geni- 
tive of the thing, as a^tG^ro), y.oiva>vH», fA6TadWoj^c,jLi€- 
Ttyo), ovyyipojoy.o), gr#o*>co; and the Impersonals del, (ne'hei, 
ptTuidlzi, lUTtGxi, rcoogr,y.ei ; as ojv eyo* gov ov q{rov?]Goj, 
Xen. goI TTuidojv zl del, Eurip. But this Gen. will easily 
be referred to the government of a preposition or a Noun. 



159 

Some Passive Verbs have the Dativeof the 
agent after them ; as 

To peye&og ixeivM ruv nsTiQayftevcov, The greatness 
of his actions. 

Poetical writers, for the Genitive, frequent- 
ly use the Dative ; as 

Ovx Aya^ifAVOvi r\vduv§ ^yjuw, He did not please the 
mind of Agamemnon. 

Neuter Adjectives in rov, reov, and zecc, gov- 
ern the person in the Dative, and the thing in 
the case of the Verb from which they are de- 
rived; as 

77 av avtio noir\xiov nr\ ; Xen. What must he do? 
c Tfiiv xavxa ngcwxeov, Dem. You must do these things* l 

Substantives sometimes have a dative after 
them; as 

Alio x?jg ixccozo) diavtfttGtcoQ, From a distribution to 
each. 

Nouns signifying the time or place in which 
a person or thing exists, are put in the Da- 
tive ; as 

'Trj yrj, In the earth. 
Mafj'a&wvi, At Marathon. 



1 These Adjectives imply necessity, and have the force of 
the Latin Gerund. The whole construction has been imi- 
tated in Latin ; Quam viam nobis quoque ingrediendum sit, Cic. 
Aeternas quoniam poenas in morte timendum, Lucretius. 

They sometimes agree with the Substantives, as £VQf}xt~ 
og vovg^ Soph. JTegcOTire^ early ri *Ello\g, Herod. 



160 

'A$r\vaig, At Athens. 

Avtti rij r^.aQcf, In the same day* 

O auTog, the same^ is followed by a Dative ; as 

Trjg avTrjg eiol £r}[Aiag aiiei ol ovyxgimtovTtg xo7g i£- 
auuQidvovGt,, Isoc. Those who conceal, are deserving of the 
same punishment as those who commit, a fault. l 

ACCUSATIVE. 2 
Verbs signifying actively govern the Accu- 
sative ; as 

Kvhlvdti xrjv acpouQav, He rolls the ball. 

The Accusative is of universal use, with *a- 
jcc understood ; 3 as 






x .J£vv is here understood. Thus in Latin, Idem facit oc- 
oidenti, Hor. Et nunc illeeadem nobis juratus inarma, Ovid. 

2 The Accusative expresses the object of the action. It 
is therefore, as in Latin, governed either by a Verb Active, 
or by a Preposition expressed or understood. 

As in Latin, Verbs of entreating, concealing, and teaching, 
govern two Ace. Verbs Neuter also often assume an Act- 
ive signification ; and both are followed by an Ace. of their 
own signification. 

The Accusative seems to be the favourite case of the At- 
tics, who frequently use it for the Genitive and the Dative. 

3 Or diet) ug, mpt, npog. Kara is the most general, as 
it embraces the parts^ qualities, and relations ; diet is applied 
to the cause; tig, ntgl, and nQog, to motion. They are 
sometimes expressed, as og aazu goZ^iu xcdog, xcct<x vov v 
b ? av loth upoQCpog, Epigr. 

The Accusative sometimes appears in the beginning of 
a sentence without a regimen expressed, as rovg' ' EMrivug 
ovdiv ocpatg Ityzxai, Xen. Quod spectat ad, etc. 



161 

AaivoQ (aux^ v i ^schylus, Terrible in fight 

IltlQO} TO [AtV GCQfACC dv(U tylkOTlOVOQ, XtjV Si \pv%rjv (fl~ 

loGOtyog, Isoc. Endeavour to be in body fond of labour, and 
in mind a lover of wisdom* 1 

Verbs of sense, with the Attics, govern an 
Accusative ; as 

u4xov(ti xavxa, I hear these things. 

Verbs signifying to do or speak well or ill, 
to give or take aivay, to admonish, to clothe, 
govern an Accusative of the Person, and anoth- 
er of the Thing ; 2 as 

TIoXXo: ayaira xr\v uoXiv inoi^oe, Isoc. He conferred ma<* 
ny services on the city? 

HJiyyaoficti, xaxa xov oixop, Thuc. / have done evil to the 
house. 

slnoaxaQel pe xa yQr t (.iaxa, Isoc. He deprives me of my 
property. 

Tavxa G6 vnOfiifivriGKOO) Thuc. / remind you of these 
things. 

Kipaxa fis i&'dvoav, Horn. They stripped me of my 
clothes. 4 



1 This construction is frequent in Latin Poetry ; Crinem 
soluta, Virg. Humeros amictus, Hor. 

2 One of these Accusatives is governed by vmxcI under- 
stood. 

3 For the Accusative of the thing are frequently substitut- 
ed the Adverbs iv, xcdaig, xccKulg ; as naoovxug (iiv xovg 
(plkovg dei fu nQaxzetv, dnovxag di avkoynv, Epict Mr\ 
d@a xovg xedvrjxoxctg jcax&>£, Soph. The Verb alone, im-. 
plying^ treatment, may have the same construction, as Ztvg 
(tie xotvx' tdgaaev, Aristoph. 

4 Verbs of adjuring and swearing are also found with two 
Accusatives, as 6qkI£w oe ovqccvov, Orpheus. Thus in Lat- 
in, Haec eadem Terram, Mare, Siderajuro, Virg. 

!4* 



162 

Distance and space are put in the Accusa- 
tive ; as 

"jE(f€Gog unkyei dno ^ctpdewv tqiwv yfAegeov odov. Xen. 
Ephesus is distant from Sardis three days'' journey. 

Continuance of time is put in the Accusa- 
tive; as 

3 ' Emilys r^itQag xgug, He abode three days. 
VERBS PASSIVE. 

Verbs of a Passive signification are followed 
by a Genitive governed by vno, ano, £x, naga, 
or iipog ; ! as 

O vovg vno Qivov dicKpfoiQetat,, Isoc. The understand- 
ing is impaired by wine. 

Tt&vri'Azv vcp vfudjv, Xen. He was killed by you. 2 



A change of Voice implies a change in the Case of the 
person ; but the Case of the thing is preserved ; as yu.elg 
TiluGra £VtoytTOV{Jie&c/., Xen. &ol^utiov ixdvopevog, Dem. 
Thus in Latin, Induitur faciem cultumque Diance, Ovid. In- 
scripti nomina regum, V irg. 

1 The Preposition is often understood ; as ^TTao&cti nov 
Gv^xcfooolv, Isoc 

2 Thus in Latin, Torqueor infesio ne vir ab hoste cadat, 
Ovid. Nihil valentius a quo intereat, Cic. 

Some Verbs, which in the Active are followed by the 
Genitive or Dative of the person, and the Accusative of the 
thing, are preceded in the Passive by the Nominative of the 
person; as ol rwv * A&r\vaio)v IniTexQa^^evov qvlam)v, 
Thuc. They who were intrusted with the defence of the Athe- 
nians, or they to whom the defence of the Athenians was intrust- 
ed. Thus Lcevo suspensi loculos, tabulamque lacerto, Hoi\ 



163 

INFINITIVE. 

The Infinitive Mood is used to express the 
cause or end of an action ; as 

Tig o<fwi ^vvtrjue {iuxtG&m, Horn. Who induced them to 
fight? !* 

One Verb governs another in the Infinitive; 
as 

Gtkw Ityeiv, I wish to speak. 

The Pronoun Accusative, before the Infini- 
tive, is frequently omitted ; as 

"JEcpr] £tjT£7v {iccvzov und.) Plato, He said that he was in- 
quiring. 2 

The infinitive is often preceded or follow- 
ed by a Nominative; as 

JEocpouXriq i'cpri, avrog [iitv oiovg de7, uoihv, EvQt,Tvldr}S 
de, ofoi tiGi, Arist Sophocles said that he made men such as 
they ought to be ; Euripides, such as they are. 

"jFJ<prj6£ epilog eivat,, Plutarch, He said that he was a 
friend? 

Instead of the Infinitive preceded by the 



1 Similar to this is the English idiom. The Latin uses 
ut or quo with a Subjunctive. Sometimes in Poetry it ad- 
mits the Greek Construction, as Dederatque comas diffunde- 
re ventis, Virg. 

2 Thus in Latin, Sed reddere posse negabat {se und.) Virg. 
The Infinitive Mood and the preceding Verb, generally, but 
not always, relate to the same person ; ehig gov la^o^evog 
eig to dtOfxott^oLOv inayoi, qaoxojv adtnalv (at und.) Pla- 
to. Nos abiisse rati {eos und.) Virg. 

3 Thus in Latin, Rettulit Ajax esse Jovis pronepos, Ovid. 



164 

Accusative, the Indicative preceded by on or 
cog 1 is commonly used ; as 

Fvto&i on iyco aXti^f} ke'yco, Xen. Know that I speak 
truth* 



1 'On and wg are really Pronouns ; the former the Neu- 
ter of (igng, r]ng ; the latter the same as og, in an adverbi- 
al form. This will clearly explain the construction; yvw- 
&i on, know that; tyoi dlfj&fj Xtyu), I spe&k truth. Atyo) , 
iog, I say that or thus ; ixelvog ov noXe(ne7, he does not make 
war. So, And they told him that Jesus passeth by, Luke xviii. 
37. It is not necessary that rig should be always joined with 
og. We find in Homer, Ttyvaioxoov o o-l aviog Jjia'^/f 
%eiQ(xg 9 AnoU.ojv ; that is, Hyvojoxajv 6, Knowing this; 
Jipollo stretched his hand over him. 

"On is sometimes used at the end of a sentence in a man- 
ner which strongly elucidates this explanation, d\£ ova d- 
nodajoetg, old on, Aristoph. But you will not restore it, I 
know that. 

Sometimes gn is added to the strengthen the force of an- 
other Pronoun, a practice common to the best Greek and 
Latin writers ; all* ovv e'ywy ov nccvooficci, tovt i'<j{r' on, 
Aristoph. Hoc ipsum scias. 

The Greeks in narrations frequently use the Present 
tense, when on introduces the words of the person, who is 
the subject of the narrative. But the Latins, in the idiom 
of the Accusative and Infinitive,* place the verb in the Per- 
fect tense. 

"On sometimes signifies that or to the end that. In this 
sense the Latin uti, generally shortened into ut, is the same 
word. Here it is still the Pronoun, and the full expression 
is did on, for that, for this. The two words often coalesce, 
and become dion* Thus Shakspeare, For that I am some 
twelve or fourteen moonshines lag of a brother. 

Sometimes on signifies elliptically what is the reason that 
— ; as einoi on toogov ixajoaro &o7fiog * AnolXow, Horn. 
Here the full expression is iinoi it iany txtnov on — let 



165 

Aiyio cog txslyog ov noXspsi, Dem. I say that he does not 
make war. 1 

The Infinitive is used with or without a 
Preposition, in the sense of the Latin Gerunds 
and Supines ; as 

-Emardpsyog nolsfdCsiv, Horn. Skilled in the art of war. 2 

Ev rcS pad-sly. Soph. In learning, 3 

'Jxavdg slnsly ymi 7i@d§ai, Lysias, Qualified to speak and 
to act* 

TLiGTOvg nspnsi imononsTy, Xen. He sends trusty men to 
examine. 5 

KakkvGTa idtly, Xen. Most beautiful to behold. 6 



him say what is the reason for this, Phoebus is so enraged ; or 
did on. 

It is likewise frequently used for because, and is there too- 
governed by did, for this reason. 

These observations wiil easily suggest an analogical so- 
lution of the origin and use of the word in other languages. 

1 This construction has seldom been imitated in Latin. 
But on has been rendered by quod, quia, and even quoniam 
in the Vulgate, a translation, which disgusted the classical 
reader, and which was succeeded by the more elegant ver- 
sions of Beza and Castalio. Yet we find some instances of 
that use of quod. Equidem scio jam fi litis quod amet mens, 
Ter. Prcemoneo, nunquam scripta quod ilia legat, Ovid. 

2 So in Latin, Et jam tempus equum fumantia solvere colla, 
Virg. for solvendi. 

3 Cantare pares, Virg. for cantando. 

4 At rubus et sentes, tantummodo lozdere natoz, Ovid, for ad 
Icedendum. 

5 Semper in Oceanum mittit me queerer e gemmas, Prop, for 
qucesitum. 

tf Niveos videri, Hor. for visu. 



166 






The Infinitive of the Present Future and 
Aorists, preceded by the Verb iiikkco, express 
es the Future ; as 

Meklco Ttftvavat, Plato, / am to die. 1 

The Infinitive of some Verbs is preceded 
by i'y/t), in the sense of dvva^iat y as 

Mydiv t%ovGLv unuv, Dem. They have nothing to say? 

The Infinitive is often governed by another 
Verb in an Imperative sense, understood; as 

Mr\ Ti avy aSavarotaL {,i(x%£G'da.i, Horn. (pga, beware* or 
i^fAf, wish, und.) Nor contend thou with the immortals. 3 

The Infinitive is sometimes put absolutely. 
without another Verb expressed ; as 

'£2g anXwg £mHv\ Dem. To speak plainly. 
Ao7,eiv ijLioi^ Soph. As it appears to me* 4 
Mwqov delv, Isoc. Nearly^ 



1 More congenial is the French idiom, je dois mourir. It 
exactly expresses a sense of |iiAAco, which refers to proba- 
bility) and is applied to any time, as r« (AtXXix axoveptv, 
Horn. Vous devez V avoir entendu* 

2 Thus in Latin, De Diis neque ut sint, neque ut non sint, 
habeo dicer e, Cic. 

3 Thus in Italian, non dir niente, take care to say nothing. 

4 That is, vara ro doxelv ifiol, secundum meam sententiam. 

5 The Infinitive is sometimes understood, as oklyov ncc- 
Qtdo&rjv, Lysias, {delv und.) qvv&ovti, Dem. {cpQaoai und.) 



i 



167 

PARTICIPLES. 

The participle is often elegantly preceded 
by the Verbs diil, yivo/uat, tpaivo/uai, vnagya), 
fyco, *up(D j 1 as 

Xccgig %uqiv earlv r\ tiktovo ael, Soph. A kindness al- 
ways produces a kindness.^ 

Ovx ix&Qog vnriQ%£v ciV, Dem. He was not an enemy. 

Tov koyov oov {fccvfidoctg eyjx), Plato, / have admired 
your speech. 3 

With a Participle, xvyyavco signifies by chance: 
Aav&dvoo, privately or ignorantly ; cp&avco, pre- 
viously ; as 



1 The Participle is sometimes used alone, dpi being un- 
derstood, as (irjKcov Y.UQ7] $a\ev, r\t evl xrjnoj pQi&0{itvri, 
(tori und.) Horn. A poppy bends the head, which in a gar- 
den is weighed down. This ellipsis is found in Latin, not 
only in the Poets, but in the Historians, particularly in Tac- 
itus. To this construction may be generally referred what 
is called the Nominative absolute. Thus yvkaZ, eXey^mv 
(pvkcwa, Soph, {fiv und.) Sentinel was blaming sentinel. 
goj&€iq de\ noudag i£ iptjg Ofioonogov KTrjodpevog {el und.) 
Eurip. 

The Participle of dfil is often understood, as ol ev relet, 
{ovzeg und.) Thuc. Those who are in power, ra nQog noal 
(ovtcc und.) Soph. The things present 

2 Thus dpi is used as an auxiliary with Participles, as 
Tt&vtixpTeg eiev, Thuc. ear co qdrj&elg, Eurip. (Attune (xtzo- 
lievoi tfoccv, Thuc. terk^oieg eifiev, Horn. 

Thus in Latin, Quos videas esse bibentes, Plaut. Est loquens 
Socrates, Cic. 

3 This is imitated in the Latin Participle Passive, Neque 
ea res f ahum me habuit, Curtius. Similar to this are the 
French and English idioms* 



168 

"JEyt) xvy>Hv awV, Her. He said that he chanced to he- 
'Mddofitv Siaqpe^ovxeg, Plato, We were not aware that 
we differed. 1 

&&ava) rovg yikovg eve^yezolv, Xen. / anticipate my 
friends in conferring benefits. 

The Participle is used after drjtog, parepog, 

apavjjg, etc. as 

Avxog tovto tiocojv yavepog r\v, Arist. He manifestly 
did this. 

The Participle is used instead of the Infini- 
tive, after Verbs signifying to persevere, to de- 
sist, to perceive, to show, or an affection of the 
mind; as 

Triv HQ7}vr}v ayovreg diareXovovv, Isocr. They continue 
preserving peace?" 

Seov qv ktj^co ngoaidvTjv t%o)v, Soph. / shall not cease 
having God for my defender. 
"Ig&i, atyiypevri, Aristoph. Know that thou art come. 

/lelloy Goqog y^yojg, Eurip. J shall show that I am wise. 

Me^v^Go ui>x)@co7iog wv, Simonides, Remember that thou 
art a man. 

v O Oeog noMdxig /a/pe* rovg (jiiv (.imqovq pfyalovg noi- 
o)v, rovg 8t ptydlovg pinpovg, Xen. God is often delighted 
in making the little great, and great Utile. 3 



1 Thus in Latin, Nee vixit male, qui natus moriensque fef el- 
lit, Hor. 

2 The English idiom is perfectly similar. Some instan- 
ces occur in Latin, Scit peritura ratis, Statius. Sensit medios 
delapsus in hostes, Virg. 

3 Ewoiba is found with various cases ; '^vvoida ifAccvrcp 
ooqog oh, Plato. ifACtvTfo tmrfieiv ovdiv imoi :u{asvo), Plato. 

This last expression must he referred to the force of at- 
traction, which is particularly exerted on Participles. 



169 

ADVERBS 

are followed by the Genitive, Dative, or Accu- 
sative ; 1 either because they are originally 
Nouns, or because those cases are governed 
by a Preposition understood. 2 



Attraction is indeed of universal influence in Greek construc- 
tion. It seems as if, on many occasions, of two words re- 
lating to each other, but in different constructions, the 
Greeks wished one only to be in a particular case, and the 
other to be attracted by it into the same case. 

A few additional instances will be here given. Ovdtvl 
TicoTiOT ovd ccio%qgjq ovd axlsojg uncfiri, xovg Ixerccg tXe- 
rfiavTi, Isoc. jfr has never been disgraceful or inglorious in any 
one to pity the suppliant ; iteqoavTt, being here attracted into 
the case of ovdivi. ^onov^ievog eugiGxov ovdapwg av 
Skkcog tovto diuTiQCLiuiuvog, Isoc. Having considered, I 
found that I could by no means otherwise execute the business ; 
diaiiQuluixevog being attracted into the case of oxoTiovpevog. 
Ovxe vvv pot, fAsrafiitei ovrcog anoloyj^aLievo}, Plato, / do 
not now repent having thus defended myself ; for dnokoyiiGa- 
oftai. Thus in Latin, Sed non sustineo esse conscius mihi dis- 
simulanti, Fab i us. 

A Noun between two Verbs is frequently attracted into 
the case of that Verb, to which it has less relation. Thus, 
eyvmp df]fAOKQctriav ', ore ctdvvaxog iartv exsgeov uQ%$iv y 
Thuc. for tyvwv ore dr}fio%Qax!a. (ppdaccTS pot top Se- 
onoTtjv, bixov W*, Aristoph. for onov d dionoxrjg. Thus 
in Latin, Servum meum miror, ubi sit, Plaut. Haec me, ut confi- 
dam,faciunt, Cic. Istudfac meut sciam, Ter. 

l "lds and idov, behold, which are sometimes, like the Lat- 
in en and ecce, found with a Nominative, are really Verbs, 
and govern the Accusative ; as Idov pe, Eurip. 

2 Adverbs, with the article prefixed, are sometimes used 
for Adjectives, as tv roll tzqip xqqvw, Soph. In the former 
15 



^^ 



170 

Examples of the former. 

TTkv\v, rejection, nkyv i^ov, iEschyl. Excepting me. 1 

XaQiv, for the sake, %uqiv "jExroyog, Horn. For the 
sake of Hector. 

Xwplg, separation, %coQig tmv ccvdgcov, Her. Without 
the men. 

Tov Aiog ivojTUOv, Plut. In the sight of God. 

Examples of the latter. 

'Avev ovojACiTcov, Plato, {ano und.) Without names. 
"Apa law, Horn, {ovv und.) With the people. 
JVccl (na 2 zode oy.^uzqov, Horn, (inl und.) I swear by 
this sceptre. 3 

Adverbs of time are sometimes changed^ in- 
to adjectives ; as 

Ov ygri nuvvv%iov evdecv fiovktjCfopov avdga, Horn. 

A man of counsel ought not to sleep the whole night. 4 



time. In the same manner they are used for substantives, 
as ol ne'Xag, Soph. The neighbours ; ol navv, Eurip. The il- 
lustrious. 

1 Tlkriv sometimes assumes the nature of a Disjunctive, 
and is followed by every case, according to the government 
of the Verb with which it is connected ; as ovSiv loziv al- 
lo quo[ACM0v, nXrjv loyog, Isoc. ov fttfiig n\r\v xolg ^ua- 
ftriToumv Xiytvv, Aristoph. 

2 Ma generally denies, unless joined with val ; vr\ affirms, 
unless joined with a negative. 

3 ^The Preposition is sometimes expressed ; ixag an ico- 
vtwv, Her. fttXQtg $7* tfiov, Horn. rrj^e ano ox^i^g 4 
Horn. cf'jua ovv avrolg, Plut. 

4 Thus in Latin, Nee minus JEneas se matutinus agebat, 
Virg. Nee vespertinus circumgemit urms ovile r Hor. 



171 

Adverbs of quality are elegantly joined with 

the Verbs i'%co 9 nd<5%co, noiico, (pegco, (jpu/nty X9 a " 
ofiat, etc. as 

'Udecag i'%e tiqoq anavxag, Isoc. Be pleasant to all. 
Ev nwfttcv, €u novtiv, Dem. To receive, to confer be- 
nefits. 

Two or more Negatives strengthen the Ne- 
gation ; as 

Ova e'oTiv ovdh, Eurip. There isjtothing. 
OvdtnoTe ovdiv ov jm] yivr\xai toUv deovzcov, Dem. JVo- 
thing that is necessary will ever be done. x 

PREPOSITIONS 
govern the Genitive, Dative, or Accusative. 2 



1 In Latin, two JVegatives make an Affirmative ; yet the 
Greek idiom has been imitated : Neque tu haud dicas tibi non 
praedictum, Ter. In Plautus this license is frequent. 

2 The principal relations of things to one another are ex- 
pressed in Greek by three cases ; origin and possession by 
the- Genitive, acquisition and communication by the Dative, 
and action by the Accusative. The other relations of time - 
and place, cause and effect, motion and rest, connexion and op- 
position, are expressed by Prepositions. 

In the origin of language and of civilization, Prepositions 
were few ; but when the progress of arts increased the re- 
lations of things, they became more numerous. In succeed- 
ing ages, when the extension of the Mathematical, and the 
improvements in Philosophical Science, produced new com- 
binations of language, and required a greater precision of 
expression, the number of Prepositions was necessarily in- 
creased. 

But that great variety, which became expedient in mocfr 



172 

GENITIVE. 

Prepositions governing the Genitve. 
cctiO) aril, i%j npo. 



era times, has been applied to the Greek language, and 
produced some confusion and difficulty to the learner, 
Twenty different meanings have been assigned to a Greek 
Preposition ; nor were those meanings marked with slight 
shades of difference ; the same Preposition has been made 
to bear the most opposite senses ; to and from, for and a- 
gainst, above and below. 

Some successful efforts have lately been made to clear 
these perplexities. One primary, natural sense has. been 
assigned to each Preposition : to that sense may be referred 
all the other significations, arising from analogical or figura- 
tive relations, easily flowing from it, and regulated by the 
case to which the Preposition is prefixed. From the com- 
binations of the Prepositions with the different cases arises 
that variety, which forms one of the beauties of the Greek 
language. But that variety is consistent. 

The meaning then of the Preposition adapts itself to the 
use of the case. The primary and natural meaning of vno 
is under. The Accusative is used after words signifying mo- 
tion ; hence, vno'IXcov rikftt, Horn. He came under the walk 
of Troy. The Genitive implies influence or origin ; thus, 
vno xavfAdTOQ, Hesiod, under the influence of heaU The 
Dative expressses the instrument or manner ; hence, %£Qolv 
vqp rui&TiQrfiiv akovocc, Horn. Taken under, or by, our 
hands. Before the Genitive and the Dative it confines it- 
self to a state of rest. Thus simple and uniform are the us- 
es to which it is applied ; yet Grammarians have not scru- 
pled to give it the most discordant significations of under and 
upon, to and from, for and against, before and behind. 



173 

DATIVE. 

* Ev, ovv. 

ACCUSATIVE. 

Etg. 

GENITIVE or ACCUSATIVE. 

GENITIVE, DATIVE, or ACCUSATIVE. 
j4[i(pti wot) £nl p vara, /tierce^ naga, nepl, ngog, 
V7l6pj vao. 

'Avxl, For. 

For : yaQtg avrl yaptrog, Eurip. Favour for favour. 
Instead of: eig?]^ dvxl Tzoltpov, Dem. Peace instead 
&f war. 

\4n6, From. 

From : ecirrjxs icovzov ano vov nugyov, Herod. He 
threw himself from the tower. 



Merd signifies with. Prefixed to the Genitive and Da- 
tive it is confined to that meaning. When with an Accusa- 
tive it implies motion, it is succession of place or time in 
close affinity or conjunction with its object; thus, [a£ t lyviu. 
(ju've, Horn. He went close with her steps, i. e. after her 
steps. 

' Eiii, upon, with a Genitive, signifies situation upon ; with 
a Dative, close upon ;. with an Accusative, motion tending up- 
on, etc. 

In the Table and Synopsis of the Prepositions, the learn- 
er will easily and profitably trace the analogy of the differ- 
ent significations to the primitive meaning of each. The 
significations here given are few ; but it is hoped that they 
will solve the greatest number of the instances of that im- 
portant part of Greek construction. 
15* 



174 

After: duo tov vtzvov, Thuc. After sleep. 

'E£ or ix, l Out of. 

Out of : Aiag I x 2£a\a[iivog ayev vrjctg, Horn. Ajax 
brought ships out of Sala?nis. 

From : in ftukaaoriQ *g ftdlaoGav, Herod. From sea 
to sea. 

After: *x rtjg vav[ia.%lag, Herod. After the naval fight 

/7po\ Before. 

Before : tiqo &vqwv (paivetf qfuv, Aristoph. He ap~ 
peareth to us before the door. 

For : ngo no&Qidog dno&vtjGxeiv, Herod. To die for 
Qur country. 

DATIVE. 
'jEV, In. 

In : tv raj 0eoj to Ttlog iorl, Dem. The end is in God. 

Zvv, With. 

With : ovv &£($<, Herod. With God. 

ACCUSATIVE. 
Elq, or tg, Into. 
Into : dg ccgtv xcczafialvuv., Isoc. To descend into a city. 

GENITIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 
Jed, Through. 

Through : G. did x^WMvog, Xen. Through the winter- 
A. diet novTOv, Pind. Through the sea. 



1 As a Greek word cannot properly end in a Mute, it is 
probable that *£ was the original word, which lost g before 
a consonant, and was softened into in. So ex and $ in Latin* 



175 

After : G. dia [icmqov XQOvov^ iEschyl. After a long 
time. 

On Account of: A. diu ai, Soph. On account of you, 

Kara, .According to. 

Under : G. dvvat k«t« xyg y$g, Plato, To go under the 
earth* 

Through : G. xara otqcctov, Her. Through the army. 
Against : G. xaia tfjg notecog, Msch. Against the city. 
According to: A. xccrct \oyov £yv, Arist. To live ac~ 
cording to reason. 

In : A. i&o&tiv xara xh<j[tovg, Horn. They sat in seats. 

Tnep, Over. 

Above i: G. imig ynston ; Eurip. Is he above ground? 
For: G.dvr,GKco yntp oi&ev, Eurip. I die for you. 
Over : A. vmo xov dopov, Her. Over the house. 
Beyond : A. dvvaptg vnig iv&Qumov, Her. A power be- 
yond that of man. * 

DATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 

9 Ava, Through. 

Upon : D. e&fe* ava Gxdnrco Aidg aierog, Pind. The ea- 
gle sleeps upon the sceptre of Jove. 1 

Through : A. ava o W , Xen. Through mountains? 



1 A Dative after «W is used by the Poets, and is com- 
monly expressed by upon. 

VJ&& signifies motion upward, xara motion downward. 
So their corresponding Adverbs cevco and xdzco siffnifvin* 
upwards and downwards. J B 

'^« is sometimes used adverbially in a distributive sense. 

™Z v t! m ^(T"*Z°\^ 9 "> Hom > Twmt y *•&** of 

prescr %Zm° fWmet) * SeDSe " vd iS USed in medical 



176 

GENITIVE, DATIVE, and ACCUSATIVE, 
*Afuph Jlbout. 

On account of: G.nidaytog a^iyi f.ux%to{>ov, Horn. They 
fought on account of a spring. 

About : G. d[A(pl nofouQ ofaovGi^ Her. They dwell about 
the city* 

Concerning: G. qidfiev a/uqjl dat^ovmv vmIq), Pind. To 
speak well concerning the gods. 

About: D. dptyl o topaz *, iEschyl. About the body. 

On account of: D. dpqti yvvvaxl nda^ecv^ Horn. To 
suffer on account of a woman. 

About : A. uptfl Tyoiav, Soph. About Troy. 

'jEnl, Upon. 

Upon : G. inl &qovov tKj.ft&TO, Xen. He was sitting 
upon a throne* 

On acconnt of: D. ovx tori Gocfov inl rolg nQoyovoig 
f.uya qiqqviig&.i, lsocr. It is not the part of a wise man to 
think highly of himself on account of his ancestors. 

Upon : D. Icfj tnnu), Xen. Upon a horse* 

Near: D. inl GiOjuavt rov noiccftov, Thuc. Near the 
■mouth of the river. 

To : A. £Q%tG& inl delnvov, Horn. Go to dinner* 

On : A. inl yalav, Hesiod, On earth. 



Mzia, With. 



With : G. |M£T« xiy^vriq, Isoc With art. 

Among : I), avrog nerd nQwcotGi novairo, Horn. He 
laboured among the foremost- 1 

To : A. Zsvg iptf peia dalrcc, Horn. Jupiter went to a 
feast. 

After : A. ol v6[aoi fxerd rov Gf6v goj£ovgi, ti]v nofov, 
Dem. The laws after God preserve the »tate. 



It is found with a Dative in poetry only. 









177 

/7«p«, Near. 

From : G. ov nagd cpilaQyvQov %aQiv bn tTu£r}TUv^ 
Plut. We must not seek a favour from a miser* 

At : D. naQ ox&aig, Anacr. At the banks. 

Near: A. pi} naQa ftlva ftaldoorjg, Horn. He went' 
near the sea shore. 

To : A. napd ai tQ%0fiat,; Xen. / come to you. 

Above : A. nayd xd alia £wa, Xen. Above the other an- 
imals. 

Against: A. na@d cpvow, Eurip. Against nature. 

IleQL) About. 

About : G. tl m@l ipv%ijg ileyofiev ; Plato, What did we 
say about the soul ? 

For : G. dfAVvea&at, nsgl ndxQrig, Horn. To fight for 
our country. 

About: D. ftctiQana neQi xo7g oxegvoig, Xen. A breast- 
plate. 

About : A. (pvlaxrj mgl xo GQjpa, Xen. A guard about 
the body. 

IIpos, Towards. 

By : G. nQog xoiv ®twv, Xen. By the gods. 

For: G. ngog oov, ovd ? ipov qiQaoco, Sopb. / will 
speak for you, not for myself. 

From: G. ygt]ozou n@dg dvdpog furjdiv vnovoet, xaxov, 
Epict. From a good man expect nothing bad. 

Towards : D. nQog xco xilei xov fiiov, iEsch. Towards 
the end of life. 

To : A. a ' d dv fiddrj nalg, xavxa oojoaG'&ai <pilsl 
nQog yijyag, Eurip. What we learn in youth, we commonly 
preserve to old age. 

Against: A. ngog v.ivxQa \iri lanxife, Eurip. Do not 
kick against the pricks. 

c jT/io 5 Under. 

Under : G. vno vooov dno&avuv. Her, To die under a 
disease. 



178 

By: G. vno ygrjGxow dyofnui, Aristoph. lam harassed 
Vy my creditors. 

Under : D. v<p «jA/ai, Eurip. Under the sun. 

Under: A. un uyuy qjv vno (folvwctg, Xen. Leading 
him under a palm-tree. 

METRICAL SYNOPSIS OF PREPOSITIONS. 

AM&' 'Eltvyg, Helenam propter ; rrjg djuql nohjog, 
Circa urbem; d[ii(fl oedtv, de te ; rtjd' afuql tfiyuxgi, 
Ob natam ; a^iq* wpoig, humeros circum ; -apy-l gte&gcc, 
Juxta undam. AN* Gx?inxge>), sceptro super ; i]w av 

btulov, 
Per turbam. *ANTf xtxvow, pro natis. Br\ S ' AIL(S 

Taohjg, 
A Troja ; ykcoGGtjg dno , lingua ; 6e7nvov dep vnvov, 
Post somnum ; novxov dno, a ponto procul. v Eyyog 
*±jlftz AlA KQadiyg, per cor; diet ooJ(Lii/^ per aedes ; 
Gv didxovxov, ob hunc. [JSf$U3i?iv EA dtinvov vnvovde, 
Post coenam; ix veqe/.ow. ex nubibus; i£ Zpov, a me. 
Ej2 yrji^ in terrain. 'EN vrfl\ in navi. Ell/ gdftdov. 
In baculo ; xegdei Sri, propter ; xel{i inl faiiu 
In terra ; no i aii co tni, juxta; ftaox inl vrjug, 
Ad naves ; inl volxa, super dorsum. KATA yulag, 
Sub terra ; v.ux tjAGv, contra me; gel zaxd nexgyg 
Tdoyg, per saxum ; v.u.irG^gov tetne, secundum ; 
AoHfict >:ax\ in tecto. MET A gov ^ tecum; (.tsrd xovxoig^ 
Inter eos; /uexd balx\ ad ccenam ; gov tiexct noxfuov, 
Post fatum. HAP A nuxgog ifii]v, a gatre ; n<*g] uvxm 
Evdog, apud ; nccgd vv.vg, ad naves ; iyv nagd d6'£av. 
Contra ; nag 3 dviautv^ supra vires ; nagd xvf.ic/^ 
Juxta undam. HEP1 gov, de te ; ntgi neexgidog ahig, 
Pro patria; ntgl Ytigi, manum circum; ntgl doxv, 
Circa urbem. TIPO^ Ttxv'mv, pro natis; i\v ngo do/noco^ 
Ante aedes, TLPO\Z yr t g, a terra ; ngog Atog di/nvv. 
Per Jovem ; h]v ngog gov, pro te ; ngog nvpaat,, juxta ; 
Tlgog Ityog, ad lectum ; ngog dvofievtag f.iay€Gao{rai, 
Contra hostes. HT^N j>w, cum mente. *' E{rvr}G% c TIJEP 

r^ioyv, 
Pro nobis; Kecpaktjg vneg Ttev, supra; vneg cuf.iov 
y Jikde, super ; yevyeonsv vnelg aAcx, trans mare fugit. 



179 



Hv ' YTtCf yr\g, vrc6yr\, sub terra ; awv vno rexvojv 
*OlXvfjied\ a natis ; r\kftov $ vno av^ia, sub undas. 

Conjunctions and Adverbial Conjunctions, 
which govern the 

INDICATIVE. 



Jti&s, £i&tj- I wish, before the 

Past tenses. 
^r/x«, as soon as. 
A^Qt and peXQi, as far as. 
[End, \ 

^EneineQ, > after. 
'En€iioi>, ) 



Ivcc, where. 

Iva, that, Imp. Fut. Aof. 

KalnSQ, although. 

Mtoqcc, until. 

Mr\, lest, Past. 

'Onov, -when. 

"OcpQa, whilst 



OPTATIVE. 

A^e,eid^e, I wish, Pr. and Y'lva, 

Fut. yOoppoc, 

Interrog. Particles, with civ) Uwg civ, how 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 



that, Pa&i 



AV, iUV, 7]V, if. 

Eineo. although. 
Jbnav, enewotv, since. 
"Eojq civ, until. 

JX"-> \ that, Pr. and Fut. 



KSv, although. 

Onojg civ, thaU 

Otccv, when. 
' ' Oa\Qa, whilst, Pr, 
Tlglv civ, before. 
c £lg civ, that* 



INDICATIVE AND OPTATIVE. 
Oti, that. | 'Onojg, how, that. 



1 A7fte, H&e, and other particles, are sometimes joined 
with the^Imperfect and 2d Aorist of oqzila), as cutf oytXeg 
uyovog t msvcu, Horn. 



180 

INDICATIVE, OPTATIVE, AND SUBJUNCTIVE. 



' Ayjii, «*#£*, until 

Mrj, forbidding. 2 
Mt]7iwg n lest. 



* On ore, \ 

'Ottoiixv, (when, 
Ore, $ 



INDICATIVE, OPTATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 
AND INFINITIVE. 



*Av, xe, 3 Potential, 
Eojg, as long as. 
Mr^noze, lesU 



TIqiv, before. 

'&£, that. 



1 El is used by the Dramatic Poets with the Indica- 
tive and Optative only. By Homer it used with the Sub- 
junctive also, joined to dv or xe. 

When si is used with an Imp. or an Aor. Indicative, the 
Verb in the corresponding clause, preceding* or following, is 
put in the lndic. with dv : as el (it] tor enovovv, vvv dv 
ova evqiQcavopriV, Aristoph. 

2 31?], forbidding, with the Present, governs the Impera- 
tive ; with the Future, the Indicative; with the Aorist, when 
it refers to the Past, the Optative, when it refers to the Fu- 
ture, the Subjunctive. 

3 These Particles, dv used in prose, and xe and xev in 
verse, give a Potential sense to the Verb. Thus in the 
Imp. elyov signifies I had, hi%ov dv, I would have. In the 2d 
Aor. elnov means I said, einov dv, I would have said. 

The 'resent Optative with dv is often used by tragic 
writers in the sense of a Future Indie, thus, pivotal dv, 
Soph. J will stay. 

* Av frequently signifies soever, as anavft og dv leyco, A- 
ristoph. Whatsoever words I may speak ; oil xev xaTocvevGw, 
Horn. Whatever I may nod. 

*Av in this case follows the Noun or Participle, and pre- 
cedes the Verb. 

*Av is sometimes understood, as yk&ov iyoj, Theocr. i. e. 
dv, I would have come. 



181 

INDICATIVE, OPTATIVE, AND INFINITIVE. 

*Entiri, ( . \"&ot6, so that? 

'Enudn, \ SmC6 ' 

OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE. 

'Emctv, after. \ Mr\, lest. 

Conjunctions Postpositive are yap, per, cW, re, 
toivpv. 

These are Prepositive awl Postpositive, av, 

The rest are Prepositive. 

These are called Expletive, which are not 
easily translated into other languages, but have 
a peculiar expression, the loss of which would 
be discovered by a critical judge of the nice- 
ties of Greek composition : a§, a§a, av, ye, dr}, 
dfjra, ftrjv, xe, xev, /aqv, vu, nep, nov, nco, qa, and 

some others used by the Poets. 

CORRESPONDING PARTICLES. 



Ensidccv, when, — TyvMccv tcc, 

then. 
'Hi, as far, — ravvt}, so far. 
" 2 H\w.i, when, — rote, then* 

Hyitv, when, — f]de, then. 
3 Hpog, when, — vrjpog, then. 



'Hvlna, when, — r^Wxa, theft, 
loov, just, — xal, as. 
KadantQ, as, — ovtcd, so. 
Mtv, indeed, — de, but. 
Mev, both, — de, and. 
'OfAolov, like, — wot 6, as. 



1 These have «V, expressed or understood, with the Op- 
tative ; wore is also found with the Imperative. 
16 



\ 



182 



'Oftolwg, like, — wgiiiq, as. 
*Onov, where, — Ihh, there. 
"Oggwai, as often, — toggcmi, 
so often. 

Ovp where, — iae7, there. 

TloQog, before, — nglv, that. 

TIqiv, before, — $, that. 

TIqiv, before, — tiqIv, that. 

Hgoxegov, before, — tiqiv, that. 

Tot 6, then,—QTt, when. 

Tots, then, — orav, when. 



Tore, then, — insiddv, when. 
c Tore, then,—qvlxcc, when. 

fig, as, — ovtoj, so. 
c £lg, as, — QjoavTQjg, thus. 
Sioel, as, — ovtoj, so. 

Onov, where, — evTav&a,ihere. 

Onov, where, — ev&a, there. 

OvTOjg, so, — wg, as. 
r Siamg, as, — ovtoj, so. 
' Slant g, as, — xal, so. 
r SIotibq, as, — ojoavTOjg, thus. 1 



1 Some of these may be inverted thus : 
ot€— tot6 ; rig — ovToig; &c. 

One of the Corresponding Particles is frequently omitted, 
as ovdiv iv to) ($ioi TU/^GTa yrjQctonei ojg rj %oiQi>g, Soc. 



183 



PROSODY. 1 



POSITION. 



A syllable, in which a short or doubtful 
Vowel precedes two consonants or a double 
letter, is long in every situation, as detvy de 
utAayyrj, avrap t/ui ZtvQ, vara cpgiva, natpog^ i€-~ 



. 



>, Horn. 



1 The word Prosody is here used in its common applica- 
tion to the quantity, although nQogwdia signifies the accent 
of syllables. 

Those parts of Prosody, which are common to both Greek 
and Latin languages, are here in general omitted. 

2 The exceptions to this rule take place when the latter 
consonant is a liquid. In Epic poetry they occur only in 
proper names, which cannot be strictly subjected to the 
rules of any metre, and in those words which could not be 
used in any other position, as ijde ^qotoIol, {ioIqol y^arac^ 
megoevTOL ngo.grjvda, etc. 

In Pastoral, Elegiac, and Epigrammatic verse, the syllable 

is more frequently short. 

In Dramatic poetry the following rules may be observed : 
A short vowel before a soft or aspirate Mute followed by 

a liquid, and before a middle Mute followed by q, remains 

short in Comedy. In Tragedy, the syllable, if not final, is 

often long. 



184 



A short Vowel is sometimes made long be- 
fore a single consonant, particularly before a 



A short vowel before a middle Mute followed by A, p, or 
v, lengthens the syllable in all Dramatic poetry. 

The reason of that difference between Heroic and Dra- 
matic poetry may be this. In the grave, majestic cadence 
of Heroic verse, Spondees are frequent ; but the Iambics 
and Tribrachs of the language of the stage require short 
syllables. Hence the doubtful vowel in q)ft&va),qftivb), xivw, 
etc. is long in Homer, and short in Iambic metre. It is re- 
markable that the short syllable prevails, in proportion a* 
the style approaches to that of conversation. This differ- 
ence will be traced in the progress from Homer to Aristo- 
phanes. 

When the syllable is lengthened before two consonants, 
the vowel in pronunciation assumes one of them, as den- 
\ayyr\, i^ea-Aevg, nazacp-Qtva, -nax-Qog, rea-vov ; or, ac- 
cording to some, both, as narQ-og, zexv-ov. When the 
syllable remains short, the vowel concludes it, Tra-rgog, re- 
xvov. So in Latin the first syllable in Mas and cycnus is 
sometimes short, because it is pronounced A-tlas, cy-cnus. 
' When the vowel is followed by two consonants, the latter 
of which is not a liquid, or by two liquids, the syllable is 
long in every species of poetry. Hence if we find de J£xa- 
ftCivdpov, naoa GTa&uou we must observe that KuiiavdQQv 
was the ancient form, and that some Mss. have nag OTa&pw. 

fn Latin the short final syllable is scarcely ever lengthen- 
ed before a mute and a liquid. Virgil has indeed terrasque 
tractusque maris, but this is a Grecism. On the same prin- 
ciple we sometimes find a short vowel lengthened at the end 
of a word, if the next word begins with sc, sp, sq, st ; but 
it most frequently remains short, particularly if the foot 
ends with the word. Virgil has lengthened the short sylla- 
ble in one instance date tela ; scandite muras ; and at the end 
of a hemistich, where a pause takes place. He has left the 



185 



liquid, as nokkd kiooo^evcp, Horn, napa Qijy/H- 

vi, Horn. * 

A short Syllable is often made long when 

the next word begins with a digammated vow- 



syllable short in Ponite : spes. Lucretius, though an imita- 
tor of the Greek cadences, never lengthens the syllable, 
but has it short in several instances: mollid strata, cedere 
squamigeris, libera sponte, pendentibu? structas. Horace uses 
the same practice ; fornice stantem, praemid scribae, quid sci- 
licet, maid stultitia, mihl Stertinius. He has it short, even 
where the foot does not end with the word; velatumque sto- 
ld,saepe stylum,fastidire Strabonem* It is the same in Ovid; 
carmind script a, curv amine spinae, olentid stagna, and in ma- 
ny other instances, which, however, are susceptible of dif- 
ferent readings. But no editor of Ovid has found in any 
Ms. an instance of a short vowel lengthened. Propertius 
preserves the short syllable ; brachid spcctavi, nunc ubl Sci- 
piadae, venundatd Scylla, jam bene spondebant, tu cape spino- 
si ; and even consuluitque striges. Catullus has a few exam- 
ples of a lengthened syllable ; nulla spes^ modo scurra, nefa- 
ria scripta. Tibullus has pro segete spicas- It must be ob- 
served, that the practice of placing a short vowel in that 
position is not common in the best Latin poets, and should 
therefore be avoided. 

1 It is generally long before p, which with its aspirate ap- 
pears to have been doubled in pronunciation, as nagoiQQri- 
yvvf.it,. This license is not confined to a liquid ; [inud?], 
Qtyiv, etc. Horn. Thus in Ennius, Omnis cura viris, uter es- 
set induperator. In Lucilius, Inter eunt* labuntur, euntur om- 
nia v£rsum. 

« 16* 



186 

el, as og 61, for tot, Horn. txikavog oivolo, for 
foivoio, Horn, ovde oug, for foug, Horn. * 

When three short syllables come together^ 
It is necessary, for the sake of the measure, in 
Heroic verse, that one should be made long, 
as a&eawg^ TIpi a/iidijg. 2 

ONE VOWEL BEFORE ANOTHER. 

A Vowel before another does not suffer elis- 
ion, as in Latin, at the end of a word, unless 
an Apostrophe is substituted. 8 

A long Vowel, or diphthong, is generally 
shortened at the end, and sometimes at the 



1 A short vowel is said sometimes to be made long by the 
force of the accent ; thus Homer has made the penultima 
ia * lUov long. In other instances, the same cause has short- 
ened a long syllable, as twg iyco ne^l, Horn, where the last 
syllable in iwg seems to be short on account of the eleva- 
tion of the voice on the first, although that elevation does 
not naturally lengthen the syllable. 

But the short vowel, on which that license more natural- 
ly takes place, is the cesura, the final syllable, on which 
the ictus, or force of the rhythmus, sometimes called the 
arsis, falls ; as xe xofiiGai, de [iaoziyi, &€ ve<pog. Thus in 
Virgil, Liminaque, laurusque, etc. 

2 This takes place even where the three syllables are in 
different words, as dla /u*V, Horn, dgvog i'Ai^ua, Hes. 

3 The elision of Diphthongs takes place in Verbs only ; 
real instances of this are to be found only in the Fragments 
of the new comedy-, 



beginning of a word, before a vowel, as o*%> 
ev, Horn. 1 noiei, Soph, rj £caoi ctpeg, Theocr, 9 

CONTRACTION. 

A contracted Syllable is always long, as oV 
cpug, ofig \ iepog, ipog. 

Two successive Vowels, forming two sylla- 
bles, even in different words, frequently coa- 
lesce in poetry ; thus, &e6g becomes a monosyl- 
lable, xgv6€(p a dissyllable, and in v Acc&€t\ r} ovx 
Ivorjoev, Horn, r} ovx are pronounced as one syl- 
lable. 

COMPOSITION AND DERIVATION, 

Words compounded and derived follow the 
quantity of their primitives, as ailfiog from xe- 
i 117 ?? <pvyij from ecpvyov. 



1 A long vowel, or a diphthong, may be considered as con* 
sisting of two short vowels. If the latter is supposed to suf- 
fer elision, the former will of course remain short, as qmq 

2 Thus in Latin, Nam sx abest, Lucr. Vale inquit, an qui 
amant, Hyld omne, Insulae Ionio, Pelie Ossam, Ilio alto, out 
Atho aut Rhodopen, servant te amice, Virg. Si me arnas, Hor. 

The Greek Dramatic writers never admit in Iambic 
and Trochaic metres the hiatus, occasioned by a vowel or 
diphthong at the end of one word, and at the beginning of 
the next. 



188 

A, privative, is short, as an/iog; but long in 
a&ararog. 

Apt, Iql, fipi, dv$, la are short, as ^d&eog. 

Penultima of Nouns and Adjectives in- 
creasing in the Genitive. 

A is short, as ocofxaxog. Except in 

Nouns in ctv, dvog r as rtrar, Ttrdrog. 

The Doric Genitive, as 'Ajptiddo, fiovadcov 

for /uovoafcov. 

Kepctg, xepdiog; 1 xpag, -xgaxog ; ipocp, ydpog; 
&copa^ ftoopaxog * iepa^ te'paxog y 7topda£, xopda- 
Ttog • vea£, veoixog * ^a|, gayog; ovpfa^ ovpcpd- 
uog j <Paia£, <Pccta%og ; cpdva^ (perdxog, are long. 

lis short, as e§ng; i'pidog. Except in 
Words of two terminations, as dcAflv, detylg, 

feAftrog. 

Monosyllables, as &l§, {hvog; but Jig, Atog; 

&pi£, rpi%6g ; 6Tt£, oriyog ; rlg^ jivog, are short. 

Nouns making i&og, as opvtg, opvlfrog ; and 



1 Thus in Orpheus, Euripides, Anacreon, and Oppian. 
Homer makes it short. This difference exists in many oth- 
er words. The penult, of Comparatives in aav is long in 
the Attic, short in the Ionic and Doric dialects. Homer 
makes « in xakog long; the Attic and Doric poets short; 
Callimachus and Theocritus have made it long and short in 
the same line. Thus Homer has ~ AQig," AQtg* 



189 
those making idog, if their penult, is long, as 

Nouns in *£, cyog or oiog, as (idar^ fidaityog ; 
(foivi^, (potvixog. 

Monosyllables in iy, mog, as &plys, &pi7iog. 

T is short, as nvp ? nvpog. Except in 
Words of two terminations, as cpopxw and 

cpopxvg, with xtjpv^ xrjpvxog. 

F(>vr}>, ypvnog • yvty, yvnog i (3dflpv% } /?£/?pi/* 

xog; are common. 1 

Penultima of the Tenses of Verbs. 

The quantity of all the Tenses generally re- 
mains the same as in the Tense from which 
they are formed ; as from xpivco are formed 
ixpivov, xpivo/uai, ixpivo/uffv ; from xpivco are. 
formed xexptxa, xixpi^iai > ixpi&yv? 

1 The doubtful vowels before at, are long in the Dative 
Plural, when the Dative singular is long by position, as iV 
flJGl, Tvipaai. 

No rules are given of the quantity of the penultima and 
antepenultima of general words, as that can be learnt by 
use alone. 

2 Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation, particularly those in 
vo) and qo>, have the doubtful vowel before the liquid gen- 
erally long in the Presents and Imperfects, and in the First 
Aorist Active and Middle ; and short in the Futures and 
Second Aorists. Thus often in the same verb in Latin, the 



190 

The Perfect follows the quantity of the 
First Future, as cpvm, cpvom^ nacpvxa. 

Verbs in mm,— except those in vmm, and 
TiiTiTco, and prnTco,— shorten the Penultima of 
the Perfect. 

In the Attic Reduplication the Penultima is 

short, as 6pvxxm 9 mpv/a, opmpv/a. 

The Perfect Middle follows the quantity of 
the Second Aorist, as ztvuov, zetvna ; except 
fiefjgt &a 9 eQQlycCj xexgaya, xexpiya, /ue/uvxa, ndnga*> 
ya P ndcpplxa, xerpTya, etc. 

The doubtful Vowels before at are long, as 
jezvcpaoL, dsixvuoi. 

In the First Aorist Participle, aoa is long. 

In the Imperative of Verbs in <<u, v is short 
in polysyllables, as yJvXv&i ; but long in dissyl- 
lables, as xlvfri. 

In the First Future, a, *, and v, followed by 
<7«, are short, as &avjbux£m 9 frau/udom ; vo^ii^m 9 vO' 
fitam ; xAv^CQj xAvom. 

But aoco is long from Verbs in am preceded 

b} r a vowel, or in pam, as &edm 9 tieaom \ Spam, 
dpdom. lam and vam are long from Verbs in 
m pure, as Tim, riom ; to/voi, to'/uom. 

tenses formed from the Present are short, while those form- 
ed from the Perfect are long, as mbveo, movebam, movebo ; 
mbvL mover am, mbvero. 






191 



QUANTITY OF THE LAST SYLLABLE. 

A Vowel at the end of a word. 

A, I, T, final are short. Except 

A long. 

Nouns in da, &a, pa, *a, ca, 1 and polysyllables 
in aia, as xegaia ; with tvkdxa, Aafrga and ntpa. 

Duals of the First Declension, as fiovaa. 

Adjectives in a pure and pa from masculines 
in og, as datccLCc, jjfieiepa. 

Nouns in eta, from evco, as dovkda from dov- 
Aeuco. 

Oxytons of the First Declension, as %a§d. 

Accusatives in a from Nouns in evg, gener- 
ally in the Attic Dialect. 

Vocatives from Proper Names in ag, as At- 
vela, Ildkka? 



1 AiU) *'«, ft/a, noma, are short. 

"^yxvpec, «W*/#a, yeqjvga, Keyxvpcc, olvga, cnolonwdQcCi 
GyvQcC) TotvayQcc ; compounds of (itTQw, as yim^itga ; ga 
preceded by a diphthong, as ntlga, except uvga, luvgxx 9 
nXevgcc, oavgu ; are short. 

2 So in Latin, Care nepos, Palld. Ovid. 



192 

The Doric #/ as d nayd for rj nqyrj, (Hopea 
for fiopebu. 

I long. 

The names of letters, as |? ; with xp7. 

The Paragoge in Pronouns and Adverbs, as 
ovjool, wvi; except the Dative Plural, as goigl. 

The Attic i for «, a, or o, as ravil for tccvtcc, 
6dl for ode, tovxl for tovto. 

Tlong. 

The Imperfect and Second Aorist of Verbs 
in v/jti, as Opv. 

The names of letters, as [iv ; with ypv ; J is 
common. 

^iV^ Z2V, TiV final are short. Except 

^ long : Words circumflexed, as ndv. 
Oxytons Masculine, as Tirdv. 
These Adverbs, ctyav, evav, Uav, nepav. 
The Accusative of the First Declension, 
whose Nominative is long, as Atvetav^ <piMav. 

Iv long : Words of two terminations, as del- 
cplv and deAfig. 

1 The iEolic a is short, as vvfiyct cpHy, Horn. Hence 
the Latin Norn, in a is short. 



193 

*H(juv and v[uv, when circumflexed ; rlv, Dor. 
for goI; nova. Uglv is sometimes long in Ho- 
mer. 

Nouns in w, tvog, as ^y^tv. 

Tv long : Words of two terminations, as (pop- 
xvv and (popxvg. 

Accusatives from vg long, as otpgvv ; with 
vvv. 1 

The Imperfect and Second Aorist of Verbs 
in v/ii, as idtixvvv, ecpvv. 

AP, TP final are short. Except 
A$ long : rdp and avxdp are sometimes long 
in Homer. 

Tp long : Plop. 

AS, IS, TS final are short. Except 

Ag long : Nominatives of Participles, as rv- 
ipccg. 

All Cases of the First Declension, as ra/ntag, 
cpiklag, fiiovoag. 2 

Plural Accusatives in ag from the long a in 
the Accusative Singular of Nouns in evg. 

Nouns in ag, aviog, as Alag ; with raAag. 



1 When vvv is an Enclitic, as rot vvv, it is short 

2 The Doric Ace is short, as vvpepag. 

17 



t 



194 

Is long : Words of two terminations, as SeA- 
<plg, and dtAytv. 

Nouns in ig increasing long, as xvtjfilg, opns; 
xlg, Tciog. 

Tg long : Words of two terminations, as (pop- 
xw and (popxvg. 

Monosyllables, as /uvg; with xcofivg. 

Oxytons making the Genitive in og pure, as 
nArf&vg; 1 fy&vs is common. 

In Verbs in vfii ? as idefawg, etc. 

FEET. 
Each of the following Divisions consists of 
feet equal in time, as one long is equal to two 
short syllables. The two first contain the 
simple, the three last the compounded feet 
I. II. 



Iamb, b - 

Trochee, - o 
Tribrach, o o o 



Spondee, 

Dactyl, - o 6 
Anapest, o o - 



III. 

Choriamb, - o o - 

Antispastus, o - - o 

Ionic a majore, - - o o 

Ionic a minore, o o - - 



1 They are sometimes short ; nl^vg inepxoftevwvi ApolL 
Rhod. I 239. 



195 
IV. 



Paeon I, 


— o o o 


Paeon II, 


o - o o 


Paeon III, 


o o - o 


Paeon IV, 


o o o - 




V. 


Epitrite I, 


o - - - 


Epitrite II, 


__ o - - 


Epitrite III, 


- - o - 


Epitrite IV, 


o i 



METRES. 
A Metre, or Syzygy, consists properly of two 
feet, because in beating time the foot was rais- 
ed once in two feet. But by Metre is gener- 
ally understood a Verse, or, except in Dactyl- 
ic Metre, a system of Verses. 

Of Metres there are nine species : 



1. Dactylic, 

2. Iambic, 

3. Trochaic, 

4. Anapestic, 

5. Choriambic, 



6. Antispastic, 

7. Ionic a majore^ 

8. Ionic a minore, 

9. Paeonic. 



1 To these may be added the following, seldom used 



Pyrrich, 

Amphibrachys, 

Amphimacer,orCretic, 



Bacchius, 
Antibacchius, 
I Molossus, 



Proceleusmatic, v o v u | Dochmius, 



19G 

These Metres take their names from the 
feet of which they are generally composed. 
Besides the Dactylic measure, consisting of 
Dactyls and Spondees, with which the learner 
is supposed to be acquainted, it will be suffi- 
cient here to inform him of the structure of 
Iambic, Trochaic, and Anapestic measures, as 
used by the Tragic Poets. 

IAMBICS. 

Of Iambics there are three kinds : Dimeters, 
consisting of two measures, or four feet ; Tri- 
meters, of three measures, or six feet; and 
Tetrameters, of four measures, or eight feet. 

The following is a synopsis of the feet strict- 
ly allowed in every place of a Trimeter : 

1st Metre 2d Metre 3d Metre, 



\f KT \J 



3 

u — 

VJ \J VJ 



4 
\j — 

\j \j Kj 



U — 

V V/ Kf 



Every foot, except the last, admits an Ana- 
pest of Proper Names. 



197 

TROCHAICS. 
Of Trochaics there are two kinds, Dimeters 
and Tetrameters. 

Synopsis of a Tetrameter Catalectic : 
1st Metre 2d Metre 3d Metre 4th Metre 



1 


2 


3 


4 


5 


6 


7 


— yj 


— u 


— v/ 


— u 


-u 


— v 


— tr 


u O 


WOO 
U Kf - 


<-* o o 


u U V 

u o — 


O V KJ 


V u o 
v v — 


V O KJ 



Every foot, except the fourth and seventh, 
admits a Dactyl of Proper Names. 

In Tragic Trochaic Tetrameters, an Ana- 
pest is admitted only in Proper Names. 

A Pause takes place at the end of the fourth 
foot, or second metre, which properly ends 
with a word. 

'' The Trochaic Tetrameter is easily reduci- 
ble to the Iambic measure, if a Cretic, or its 
equivalent, is removed from the beginning 
of it. x 



1 Thus the English Trochaic is more harmoniously re- 
solved into the common measure. The two following 
lines, 

These delights if thou canst give^ 
Mirth, with thee I mean to live^ - 
are generally scanned thus, 

- K> I - \J I -• \l I'- 



ll* 



198 

ANAPESTICS 

admit Anapests, Dactyls, and Spondees, and 
are commonly Dimeters of four, and sometimes 
Monometers of two feet. Of the former the 
most strict is the Dimeter Catalectic, 1 called a 
Paroemiac? which closes the system. 

Anapestics may contain an indefinite series 
of Metres. Any number of these constitutes a 
system, which may be considered as extended 
without any distinction of verses, or, in other 
words, may be scanned as one verse. It has 
generally, for the sake of convenience, been di- 
vided into regular Dimeters, which of course 
can admit no license in the final syllable, and 
which must always be followed by a Paroemiac. 
But as in this mode of division it must often 
happen that a single Metre remains before the 
final Paroemiac, that Metre is placed in a sep- 



But their harmony will be improved by the following divi- 
sion of the feet : 

1 If a syllable is wanting, the verse is called Catalectic ; 
a complete verse is called Acatalectic. 

2 So called from napoijuid, becase that line was supposed 
to contain a maxim or a. proverb* 



199 

arate verse, and is termed a base, although it 
would be perhaps more properly called a sup- 
plement. 

The only restraint in Anapestics is, that an 
Anapest must not follow a Dactyl, to prevent 
the concurrence of too many short syllables ; 
that each Metre must end with a word ; and 
that the third foot of the Paroemiac must be an 
Anapest. 

Anapestic Dimeter Acatalectic. 

1st Metre 2d Metre 



1 

\J KJ> — 

— \J \J 



O V — 



3 

V V — 



4 

vr \J — 
- O V 



A Paroemiac, or Dimeter Catalectic, 

1st Metre 2d Metre 



1 

* o - 



v v 



Anapestic Base, or Monometer 
Acatalectic. 

One Metre 



1 

U \j - 

- U Kf 



2 
%j \j - 

- v O 



200 



ACCENTS. 1 



The Acute is used on the last syllable, the 
penultima, or the antepenultima. 



1 Accents were first marked by Aristophanes, a gramma- 
rian of Byzantium, who lived about 200 years before the 
Christian era. He probably first reduced them to a prac- 
tical system, because some marks must have been necessary 
in teaching the language to foreigners, as they are used in 
teaching English. 

For the proper modulation of speech, it is necessary that 
one syllable in every word should be distinguished by a tone 
or an elevation of the voice. On this syllable the Accent 
is marked in the Greek language. This elevation does 
not lengthen the time of that syllable, so that Accent and 
Quantity are considered by the best critics as perfectly dis- 
tinct, but by no means inconsistent with each other. That 
it is possible to observe both Accent and Quantity is proved 
by the practice of the modern Greeks, who may be suppos- 
ed to have retained in some degree the pronunciation of 
their ancestors. Thus in TimT0^tp7}v they lengthen the 
first and last syllable, and elevate the tone of the penultima. 

In our language the distinction between Accent and Quan- 
tity is obvious. The Accent falls on the antepenultima e- 
qually in the words liberty and library, yet in the former 
the tone only is elevated, in the latter the syllable is also 
lengthened. The same difference will appear in baron and 
bacon, level and lever, in Redding, the name of a place, in 
which these observations are written, and the participle 
redding. 

The Welsh language affords many examples of the differ- 
ence between Accent and Quantity, as diolch, thanks. 



201 



The Grave is used on the last syllable only; 
but when that syllable is the last of a sen- 



It has been thought by many that the French have no 
Accent ; but in the natural articulation of words this is im- 
possible. Their syllabic emphasis is indeed in general not 
strongly expressed ; but a person conversant in their lan- 
guage will discover a distinctive elevation, particularly in 
public speaking. This is in many cases arbitrary ; thus the 
word cruel, in expressing sorrow and affection, will on the 
French stage be pronounced cruel; in expressing indigna- 
tion and horror, cruel But the general rule is, that in words 
ending in e mute the acccent is on the penult, as formida- 
ble, rivage ; in other words on the last syllable, as hauteur, 
vertu. 

On one of the three last syllables of a word the Accent 
naturally falls. Hence no ancient language, except the 
Etruscan, carried it farther back than the antepenultima. 
The modern Greeks sometimes remove it to the fourth 
syllable ; and the Italians still farther. In English it is 
likewise carried to the prae-antepenultima, but in that case 
a second Accent appears to be laid on the alternate sylla- 
ble, as determination} unprofitable* In poetry the metre wili 
confirm this remark. 

That variation existed in the different states of Greece, 
which is now observed in the different parts of Britain. 
The iEolians adopted a baryton pronunciation, throwing the 
accent back, saying i'yio for tyco, fttog for fizog. In this 
they were consistently followed by the Latin dialect. But 
some words in the latter language changed their accent ; 
thus in the Voc. Valeri, the accent was anciently on the 
antepenultima, and was afterwards advanced to the penul- 
tima. In English a contrary effect has been produced ; thus 
acceptable is now acceptable ; corruptible, corruptible ; ad- 
vertisement, advertisement ; &c In Welsh the accent is 
never thrown farther back than the penultima, and is rare- 



202 

tence, or followed by an Enclitic, 1 the acute 
is used. 

The Circumflex is used on the last or the 
penultima. 2 



ly placed on the last syllable. In Scotland the Accent is 
oxyton in imitation of that of France, probably on account 
of the close connexion which formerly subsisted between 
the two countries. 

1 The Grave is said to be the privation of the Acute, and 
to be understood on all syllables, on which that is not plac- 
ed. The Acute with the rising inflection has been, by a mu- 
sical term, called the Arsis , the Grave with the falling in- 
flection, the Thesis. 

But where it is expressed on the last syllable, the Grave 
has the force of the Acute, marking an oxyton. Indeed no 
substantial reason is given for the use of both Accents. 
Perhaps it may be said that the Grave is used to show that 
the voice after the elevation must fall to meet the com- 
mon, or what Aristotle calls the middle, tone of the next 
word; but that the Acute is preserved at the end of the sen- 
tence, where the change is necessary; that the interroga- 
tive Tig always requires an elevation of voice ; and that an 
Enclitic, becoming a part of the word, generally reduces 
the Accent to the rules of the Acute. 

In French the Grave Accent, — when it is not used for 
distinction, as a, to. from o, has, and ow, where, from om, or, 
— makes the syllable long and broad, and has the force of 
the Circumflex ; the sound is the same in pres and pret, in 
exces and for et. 

2 The Circumflex is said to raise and depress the tone on 
the same syllable, which must be long, and therefore con- 
sist of two short, thus ocZ^iu is equivalent to aoopa. But 
this double office of the same letter it is not easy to dis- 
criminate in speaking*. 



203 

The Acute and the Grave are put on long 
and short syllables ; the Circumflex on sylla- 
ble long by nature, 1 and never on the penulti- 
ma, unless the last syllable is short. 2 

No word has more than one Accent, unless 
an Enclitic follows. 

Enclitics, 3 throw their Accent on the pre- 
ceding word, as avfrpcosiog ioci p ocofid ion. 4 



1 A syllable long by nature is that which contains a long 
vowel or diphthong, as go>[*oc, anovdcchg. Some few sylla- 
bles with a doubtful vowel are circumflexed, as pah'Aovi 
nguypa, nQayog, dlog, xvfia, &c. but they are contractions. 

2 In Diphthongs, the Accents and Breathings are put on 
the last vowel, as avrovg ; except in improper Diphthongs, 
as aidtjg for qdrjg. 

3 An Enclitic inclines on the preceding word, with which 
it is joined and blended. 

4 So in Latin, que, ne, ve. But the Accent, which in vi- 
rum is placed on the first syllable, is brought forward to the 
second in virumque. 

We may carry the analogy of Enclitics to English. When 

we say, Give me that book, we pronounce me as a part of the 

word give. For the boy is tall, we say the boy^s tall ; thus is 

ecomes a perfect Enclitic. This is frequent in French, 

•ionnez le moi,je me live, est-ce lui ; and particularly iwparle- 

e, where the last syllable of parle must be accented be- 

*e the Enclitic. In Italian and Spanish the Enclitic is join- 

d, as dammi, deme, give me. 



204 

Ten words are without Accents, and are 
called Atonies ; 6, i), ol, ai p d } **£, lv ? *| (or «*,) 

ov {ovx or ov%^) cog. 1 

RULES OF ACCENTS. 

Monosyllables i if not contracted, are acuted, 
as og y Tiov g ? ydg? 

Monosyllables of the Third Declension ac- 
cent the last syllable of the Genitives and Da- 
tives, but the penultima of other cases, as S.. 

X ei ?> X €L ?°$> X €l Ph X e ^P a - D* X € 'P 6 j X et 9°W' -P* 
yrfpes, xt'pw* X*P al > Z"P a s* 






1 These may be called Proclitics, as they incline the ac- 
cent on the following word. Thus in English the Article 
the is pronounced quickly, as if it made part of the following 
word. In poetry it coalesces with it, as Above thP Aonian 
mount. When the Atonies are at the end of the sentence, 
or following the word, to which they are naturally prefixed, 
they recover their accent, zseyovreg cni^i* avtfiav q-loyog 
ov, Pind. Y.UV.U.V it, Theocr. fi-tog oSg, Horn. When they I 
precede an Enclitic, they are accented, as ei ps. 

2 The following appear to be excepted, a/, vvv, ovv, vg 9 
dovg, pvg, yoavg, vavg, ovg, nag, nalg, nvy; but many of 
them are probably contractions ; thus, vvv from viw, ovv 
from tov, nag from ndag, navg, or nuvxg. Indeed the cir- 
cumflex always leads to the suspicion of some contraction. 

3 Except Particles, and rig interrogative; with dqdcov; 
dfAOjojv ; bwojv ; xyaTwi/ ; kaoyv ; nald'wv; navxoiv,nav- 
T0)v,naav; Tyo'iwv ; (pooioov ; oiioiv, wtcqv. 



i 



205 

Dissyllables, if the first is long and the last 
short, circumflex the former, as povoa; 1 in 
other cases they acute the former, as fiovoyg, 
koyos, Aoyov. 

Polysyllables, if the last syllable is short, 
acute the antepenultima, as avfrgwnog ; if long, 
the penultima, as avfrgconov? 



1 E'inzQ, Tolvvv, roGT6 r &c. are considered as two words, 
the latter of which is an Enclitic ; they cannot therefore 
be circumflexed. 

Nouns in £, increasing long, acute the penult, as {taigaS, 
K?^i'|, yolvii ; if they increase short, they circumflex it, 
as avXak, o^rjhi, n7du£. 

2 From these rules are to be excepted Oxytons, such as, 
generally, words in tvg, i(Q, to, and cog, whose Gen. ends in 
og pure, as daodevg, alrifirig, &c. Adjectives in ixog, #o£, 
Aos, @og, crog, as ayo.&og, kaXog, &c. Participles Perf. 2 
Aor. and 2 Fut Active, and Aorists Passive ; Prepositions ; 
and others which will be learnt by use. 

In Latin polysyllables, the Accent depends on the penult- 
ima. If that is long, the Accent is placed upon it, as ami- 
cus ; if short, upon the antepenultima, as animus. In Dis- 
syllables the Accent is on the first "syllable. Hence^ may 
be deduced another proof of the difference between Accent 
and Quantity. In Latin, the Accent falls on the first sylla- 
ble of animus, and of tibi y but that syllable is not lengthen- 
ed in pronunciation. The Accent falls on the first syllable 
in cdrmina ; but if an Enclitic follows, as carmindque, the 
Accent, which is inadmissible on the prae-antepenultima, 
must be laid on a syllable, which cannot be pronounced 
long. 

In reading Greek, the general practice of this country 
follows the Latin rules of Accent. In words of two, and of 
three, short syllables, the difference of the French .and 
18 



206 

Exceptions with the last syllable short. 

1. Participles Perfect Passive, as z^iv/u/u&og. 

2. Verbals in tog and eov, as ygamiog, y§an- 

T60V. 

3. The increasing Cases of Oxytons, as Aafi- 
ncfg Aa/unadog j rvnelg rvnevrog. . 

4. Many derivatives, as natdtov, Ivaviiog. 

5. Compounds of fidAAco, nokico, y£co, if not 
with a Preposition, as ix^/3oAog. 

6. Compounds of tlxtco, xteCvcd, rgicpco, with 

a Noun, if they have an Active signification, as 
71(>cotot6xoq p she ivlw produces her first child; 
^xpoxiovog, he ivho kills with a sword; fir^ 
Tpoxrovog, a matricide ; Aaorpoyog, he who feeds 
the people. If they have a Passive significa- 
tion, they follow the general rule, as ngcojoxo- 
nog, the first horn; 1 lupoxxovog, he who is kill- 
ed with a sword ; ^j§6xxovog } he who is kill- 



English pronunciation is striking. The former makes 
Iambs and Anapests, the latter Trochees and Dactyls ; the 
French say fugis,fugimus ; the English fugis fugimus. In 
many instances both are equally faulty ; thus, we shorten 
the long is in J avis the plural offavus; they lengthen the 
short is in oris, the Genitive of os. 

1 So nQWToyovoQ and TiQwroyovoq, ^ovvo^og and fiovvo- 
fiog* vccviiclyog and vavpayos, &c. 



207 



ed by his mother; Aaorpocpog, he who is fed by 
the people. 1 



1 The difference of Accentuation serves also to mark the 
difference of signification, and has on some occasions given 
precision to the language, and even determined the ambig- 
uous meaning of a law. Of this distinction a few instances 
may be given : 



aywv, leading ; 
afoj&fg, truly ; 
a'AAa, other things ; 
anloog, unnavigable ; 
a@cc, then ; 
/?/og, life ; 
dldopevi we give ; 
donog, opinion ; 
flat, he goes ; 
JW, he is in ; 
tr&Q(t, enmity ; 
£wW, an animal ; 
#ax, a sight; 
a^'wy, running; 
/W, a violet ; 
kcUcu£, a cable ; 
AcJo?, a stone ; 
ktimr], a poplar ; 
fiovrj, alone ; 
jAVQioi, ten thousand ; 
ve'og, new ; 
v6[.ios, a law ; 
o t woJ£, yet; 
ti6/^w 9 f advise ; 
novriQog^ laborious ; 
Tpo%og, a course ; 
Mfiog, a shoulder ; 



(xywv^ a contest, 
uXrj&eg, true. 
«AA«, but. 
dnkoog^ simple. 
v.qu, an interrogation. 
/?£0£, a bow. 
dtd6[i6v, to give. 
donog, a beam. 
eiol, they are. 
JW, in. 

t%&Q&, hostile thing?. 
Cwo*>, living. 
#£«, a goddess. 
&6wv, of gods. 
iov, going. 
#«Ac5£, well. 
kaog, a people. 
kevxr}, white. 
(aovyi, a mansion. 
livgiot, innumerable. 
vtog, a field. 
vopog, a pasture. 
6fA<£g, together. 
nei&oj, persuasion. 
novrjQog, wicked. 
rpoydg, a wheel. 
eopog, cruel. 



The list might easily be extended, particularly in mark- 
ing the difference between a proper and a common name, as 
Mv&og, a river, %av&dg, yellow; ' ' JtQyog, a man, or a city, 
«p/0£, white, &c 



208 

7. Compounds of Perfects Middle with 
Nouns and Adjectives, as datpoAoyog, oixovo/uog, 
najucjpayog. 

8. Many other Compounds retain the Ac- 
cent which they had in their simple state, as 
avTocpt) ouQctvo&eV) 7hxt£i%ov, ovrrjA&ov* So Prep- 
ositions, preserving their final vowel in com- 
position, as dnodog, inioxtg. 1 



In English the same difference may be observed ; thus 
conduct, produce, nouns ; conduct, produce, verbs. Job-, the 
name of a man ; job, a common word, &c. 

1 These exceptions have given occasion to some persons 
to inveigh against the use of Accents, as vague and arbitra- 
ry; and to more, to neglect them entirely. An attempt to 
reduce these apparent inconsistencies to a system may tend 
to rescue this branch of Greek Grammar from that objec- 
tion. 

The most general cause of these exceptions is abbrevia- 
tion* Thus the original form Timrt^evac, on which the Ac- 
cent is placed regularly, was shortened into Tvmtptv and 
xvntivuv, which retain the Accent on the same syllable. 
From TSTvqtfievuo was formed xervqitvat ; from xexvqa&ai, 
rexvydat,] from xexvnt^ievat, xexvntvai; from xexvyapevog, 
tbtv [ifitvog. 

Verbals in eov were formed from diov ; thus, yganxiov 
was originally yQanxeiv dtov, necessary to write, whence 
probably was derived the Latin scribendum. Navxllog may 
naturally be formed from vavxintlog for vavxy i'xtkog. Ilcti- 
dlov is abbreviated from natdaQiov, or from ncudidiov, which 
is formed from nalg, as alyldvov is from «/'§. Thus veavi- 
oxog and naidioxog are probably formed from veavlce and 
Tiaidl, with eioxw. 

It is natural that the cases of a Noun or Participle, and 
the persons of a Tense, should retain the Accent through 






209 

Exceptions with the last Syllable long. 

The Attic mode of keeping the Accent on 
the antepenultima in Mev^Aacog for Whvikaog, 
M&cog for Jld&og; or the Ionic Genitive, as 
Tlr^krfCadaco • or the Compounds of yeAojg^ as 
(ptAoyeAcog, can scarcely be called exceptions, 
as the two last syllables were in pronuncia- 
tion contracted into one. 

At and 01 final are considered as short in Ac- 
centuation, as iiovoai > avfrpGouot. l Except Op- 



every inflection ; thus, from la^nag^ la^ndiSog, etc from 
Tvntiq, xvnivTog, etc. and from rvnto, rvnov^iev, rvnov- 
{im, etc. So ydtov, the neuter of cpdtwv ; so also naQ- 
fttvog, from the original word naQ#r\v. 

The Compounds likewise cannot be said to form an ex- 
ception, as the primitive words are not affected by the 
junction. On this principle many apparent anomalies may 
be explained ; thus, oUyog is from A/yo£, of which klycc is 
still extant ; and alnokog from alyonohog. 

This is a faint outline of the system ; but an acute ob- 
server of the etymology and origin of the language will ea- 
sily solve the difficulties of accentuation on similar princi- 
ples. 

1 The Diphthongs au and ov are considered as short, for 
they were generally pronounced, at the end of words, like v. 
Thus at, and ov are in Russian pronounced i. This pro- 
nunciation seems in some instances to have affected the 
quantity, as I'lmpai cplhjv, Horn, ij^jg re nai yriQaog, He- 
siod. vfuv [A.iv <&eoi do7ev, Horn. etc. But the best critics 
have suspected the genuineness of the readings, and pro- 
posed emendations. In the last passage, &eol may be read 
as a monosyllable. 
18* 



210 

tatives, as (piAtjoai, 1 T€iv<poi; Infinitives of the 
Perfect in all Voices, of the Second Aorist 
Middle, and of the Present of Verbs in /*«, as 

T£TV(p€VCUj T€TV(]p&CU, T€TV7l£Vai * TV7Z€6&CCl} LGiavat? 

The Genitive Plural of the First Decl. cir- 
cumflexes the last $}dlable, as fiovowv ; 3 ex- 
cept adjectives of the 1st Declension whose 
Masculine is of the 2d, as aywz, dytcov, ayfa, a- 
yicov j with ttr)oicov ? /Aovrcov^ and %§tj(5tcov. 

Oxytons of the 1st and 2d Decl. circumflex 
the Genitives and Datives, as S. rifir}, ti/mjs, tl- 

PV? It/tiff^ Tlfllj. D. TlflCCj TlflCUV. P. Tlfial, Tl[XOJV ? 

Ti[icu§ 9 Tt/nag^ ti/llccl. 4 

Vocatives Singular in ev and 01 are circum- 
flexed, as ^aaiAev^ aiddl. 

1 Hence (piXqacci, 1 Aor. Opt. <jpd?7<7<M, 1 Aor. Inf. qjlkf]- 
acu,. Imper. Middle. 

2 Oixoi cannot be thought an exception, as it is put for 
o/xai, of which it is the ancient form. 

3 Because it is a contraction from the original form 4 woi/- 

4 MnrnQ and ftvyoaviQ, when not syncopated, accent the 
penult, in every case, except the Vocative ; a case, which 
from its nature frequently throws back the Accent, as avtg, 



211 

Pronouns are Oxy tons ; except ovrog, wai- 
voQ) ddva, and those in rspoc, as TJjuerepog. l 

The Imperatives i2&£ ? etne, evyz, idi, and Xa- 
J5^. are accented on the last, to be distinguished 
from the 2d A. Ind. 

The Prepositions placed after their Case, 
throw back their accent, as fteov ano. Except 
ava and <W, to distinguish them from «W, the 
Vocative of aval ; and from dfa, the Accusa- 
tive of Jevg or Jig. 

Oxytons undeclinedlose their Accents when 
the final vowel suffers elision, as akA ays, nap 
i/tov. Those that are declined, throw the A- 
cute on the penult, as nokX tnl, delv ina&ov. 

Contractions are circumflexed, if the former 
syllable to be contracted, is acuted, as voog, 
vovg ; (pifoo/uer, cpikov^v ; otherwise they retain 
the acute, as cpUiee, cplkti ; iojacog, iotcog. 2 

ENCLITICS. 

PrOnOUnS, /UOV, (U€V, (101, (l€; GOV y 060, <StV, GOty 

rot, 6€ ) ov, oi, £, juir, ocpe, o(fiv ; a(jpco€y ocpiai, o(peag ; 



1 Before ye they throw back their accent, as eywys, J'~ 
jAOiyt. 

2 Except metals, as dgyvQeog, aQyvgovg ; with adekcplde- 
og, ddelqidoug ; livzog r Uvovg ; nopyvQeog, noQCfjVQQvgi, 
tpowMtog, yowwovg. 



212 
rig, n ? indefinite, in all cases, and dialects, as 

TOi/, T€V, rep. 

Verbs, eifii and cprf/ut in the Pres. Indie, ex- 
cept the 2d Pers. Sing. 

Adverbs, nr), nov, nco, ncog, no&ev, noie, ex- 
cept when used interrogatively. 

Conjunctions, 7*, t£, xe, xzv, #?p, vv, vvv, nag, 
£«, toi, and 8a after Accusatives of motion, as 
olxovds. 

Enclitics throw their Accent on the last syl- 
lable of the preceding word, if that word is 
acuted on the antepenult, or circumflexed on 
the penult, as tJxovocc tlvoq, rjA&e /not. 

Enclitics lose their Accent after words cir- 
cumflexed on the last syllable, as dyanag fia ; 
and after Oxytons, which then resume the A- 
cute Accent, as dv?jg tiq. 

They preserve their Accent in the begin- 
ning of a clause, and when they are emphati- 
cal, or followed by another Enclitic. 

Enclitic Monosyllables lose their Accent 
after a word acuted on the penultima, as 
Adyos (jlov; but Dissyllables retain it, as 



213 

Aoyog iorl ; else the accent would be on the 
prae-antepenultima. 1 

The Pronouns preserve their accent after 
Prepositions, and after &&ca or ^ as dm oe. 

'Earl accents its first syllable, if it begins a 
sentence, is emphatical, or follows aAX, *4 xal, 
ovx, cog, or xovx 9 as ovx i'oxi. 



1 If several Enclitics follow each other, the last only is un- 
accented, as el rig rcvcc (prjoi poi. 



• 



214 



DIALECTS, 



The Pelasgi, a wandering people, are said 
have been the first inhabitants of Greece. 
Their language was improved by Cadmus, 
who increased the number of letters and intro- 
duced the Phoenician characters. When the 
descendants of Hellen, who spread their incur- 
sions from Thessaly, had made themselves 
masters of the country, their language., which 
differed from the Pelasgic chiefly in its inflec- 
tions, became the common language of Greece, 
under the name of Hellenic. 

It is probable that the only difference which 
existed at first, was between the inhabitants 
of the seacoast and those of the inland part of 
the country. The former inhabiting Attica, 
and Hellas or Achaia, then called Ionia, spoke 
what is called the Old Attic and the Ionic, 
originally the same language. 

The people of the interior parts of Greece 
used a rough and broad language, known by 



215 

the name of the Old Doric. The iEolians, a 
branch of the original people, who settled in 
Boeotia and Peloponnesus, spoke a Dialect ve- 
ry similar the Doric, although distinguished 
from it by the generality of Grammarians. 

In the progress of commerce and civilization, 
these Dialects were softened and improved. 
The Doric was mellowed into that beautiful 
language used by Theocritus. The lonians 
made incursions into Asia Minor, and settled 
on a part of the coast which received from 
them the name of Ionia. These by an inter- 
course with their Asiatic neighbours, softened 
their language into that harmonious sweetness 
and sonorous grandeur, which we admire in 
Herodotus. The Attic, having passed, like 
the other Dialects, through many gradations, 
one of which was marked by the name of the 
Middle, was refined into what was called the 
New Attic, and became so polished and ele- 
gant, that it was adopted by men of letters and 
eloquence in every part of Greece. 

Thus the Attic, Ionic, Doric, and JEolic, are 
the four principal Dialects of ancient Greece ; 



216 

but the separate interests and pursuits of dif- 
ferent independent States produced a great 
variety ; and it is probable that every state 
had some distinguishing peculiarities. 1 In one 
colony of Asia Minor, four different species of 
the Ionic Dialect were easily observed. 2 



1 The difference was not confined to letters and syllables ; 
it extended to words. Thus, according to Aristotle, a village 
in the Doric Dialect was xwfAi^, in the Attic, drtfioQ. To 
do or act in the former was dpav, in the latter, nQaxxtiv. 

While the manner of speaking of other provinces was 
plain and unpolished, that of Athens was studious of delica- 
cy and fearful of offence. Instead of a flat denial, it used 
such expressions as y>aXdog£%£i, xccAfooTcc, inuivu), (vrv/ol^g, 
zv ngarze, C^Aw oe, ovcuo. 

2 Writers in the Old Attic, Thucydides, the Tragfc Poets. 
Middle Attic^ Aristophanes, Lysias, Plato. New Attic, 
jEschine-s, Demosthenes, Isocrates, Menander, Xenophon. 

Old Doric, Epicharmus, Sopkron, and the writers of the 
original Songs to Bacchus, which were succeeded by the 
more polished Choruses in Tragedy. New Doric, Bion, 
Calumachus, Moschus, Pindar, Theocritus. 

Ionic, Anacreon, Arrian, Herodotus, Hippocrates, Pyth- 
agoras. 

JEolic, Alc#:us, Sappho. 

This list is far from complete ; but the deficiency will 
be supplied by the experience of the reader. 

It is to be lamented that transcribers often took the liber- 
ty of changing the Dialect of an ancient author into com- 
mon Hellenism. Subsequent critics have indeed endear- 






Attic. 217 

These Dialects are distinguished from the 
Common language, the xotvrj dtdtexjos, called 
also Hellenism, consisting of those words and 
inflections which are common to every part 
of Greece. 

Another important Dialect of the Greek 
was the Latin language. Some Arcadians, driv- 
en from the country by the incursions of the 
Hellenes, emigrated into Latium, where they 
introduced the original Pelasgic language and 
characters. Hence the similarity of the Latin 
and the iEolic dialects. The distance, and 
the separate government of Latium, together 
with a mixture of the ancient Etruscan, pro- 
duced that variety, which formed at length a 
distinct language, but never forsook the analo- 
gy of its original iEolic form. 

GENERAL PROPERTIES OF THE DIALECTS. 

The Attic * 
loves contractions, as piAco for ftAe'co, rjfeiv for 
el'duv. 

oured to restore the original diction ; but in this attempt 
they could consult only general analogy; they could not 
succeed in displaying with accuracy all those instances of 
nice discrimination, which must have thrown a great light 
on the proper application of the Dialects. 

1 A marked difference exists between the Old and the . 
19 



218 Attic, 

Its favourite letter is <% which it uses for o. 



New Attic. The former used short and simple forms ; the 
latter softened, and in some cases lengthened the word. 
The former used the short words &?*/, dlelv, -Stgaoduf,, 
**??, Kvelv, for these the latter substituted dtoutvttv, dktjj- 
&£iv, xfeginuiptGxrai, vi^itv^ nvrfteiv. The Old neglected 
*, which the New added or subscribed; the former wrote 
xaw, xAaw, Aojovog, Tcodjuog] the latter xa/w, x/.a/w, Ion- 
cjog, Trgoji'juog. 

Other changes marked the distinction. The New Attic 
in some cases avoided the sound of or ; henGe it substituted 
aoQViV, d-uggog, (Jiv6givr h d-<xkuTTu, 7igaTT0),q;vkdrT0J, for the 
UQGtpr, ftdgoog, iivgoivr h ftuXaooa, ngdoooj, qvkctOGco of 
the Old Attic. 

In the Future of Verbs, the Old used the contracted form, 
«IgJ, xaAol, oka, avajjiptofiai; the New Attic resumed 0", 
and made them cta'crcw, xa/ajoj, okt'oo). dvufii^aooi.icu. Af- 
ter the adoption of this Future, which became the general 
form in the common Dialect of Greece, the Attics still pre- 
served the other form, which is now distinguished by the 
name of the Second Future. 

It may be questioned whether the x and /, the n and <£, 
were not added to the Perfect, which was originally formed 
in the Old Attic and Ionic by the change of o> into «, as 
we find traces in icrraa, ^^aa, and in the Aorists eosvct, 
£££<*, yti vy.u. It is indeed probable, that in the simplest 
forms of the language those tenses were similar ; the prin- 
ciple of variety and of precision introduced those changes 
and additions, which adorned the luxuriant language of an- 
cient Greece. That of Modern Greece has returned to the 
original simplicity; it has only one Past Tense; as ygdqoj, 
eygaipa; nkexco, inke^u ; yvoogi^o), iyvojgiou ; xpa/.kco, £'- 
xpocla. 

Even the accentuation underwent some change. The 
Old Attic said, 6fio7og y iqqtiouqv ; the New, b^oiog^ tqq* 

7XQUQV. 



Attic. 219 

It changes long into short, and short into 

long syllables, as Xecog for Aadg. 

In Nouns it changes o 9 cm, and ov, of the Sec- 
ond Declension, into co; as N. V. >*£«£, G. keco, 
D. ^£o>, A. kecov > etc. * 

It changes **£ into ]?s, as tftzrijk for litneis. 

It makes the Vocative like the Nominative, 

as co narr/p,, co (fikog, Soph. 

In some Nouns it makes the Accusative in co, 
instead of ew, coa, or cava, as Xayto, Mtvcoy IIo- 
s G€idco, for Aaycov, Mivcoa, JIoGtidcorcc. 2 

It changes the Gen. £o$ into *«s, as ftaoiMng 
for ftaotAdog. 3 

1 See this exemplified in evyecog, p. 43. 

2 So in Latin, Art A/io, aw* Rhodopen, Virg. 

3 This Genitive exemplifies the difference of the Dia- 
lects. The Common Dialect is fiuoikeog, the Attic, fiaGiXt- 
ojg, the Ionic, paoikrjog, the Doric and JEolic, jjUGiktvg. 

It is probahle that the Nom. vg was originally f g, which 
was declined into z'og, ejv, e ta, etc. 

The Digamma will explain the principle of many forma- 
tions. Thus, IIf]kf]i'(xdao, in the J^olic form, was Ufj Af i- 
ada o ; hence a in the penultima is lengthened ; hence too 
t is changed into the Ionic rj. The Genitive of Nouns in 
og was probably ofo, which was shortened into oj; the Po- 
ets changed the Digamma into c, and made the termination 
oto. But the Digamma was by the greater part of Greece 
changed into v, in the formation of Cases. Thus the Gen. 
of gv and of o was otfo and ljj>, abbreviated^ into oi and 
€ , afterwards changed into otv and ev, or gov and ov, but 
by the lonians into ouo and do. 



220 Attic. 

In Verbs it changes the Augment « into r ( 

in ijfiovAofiijv, rjdvvdiJLTp>, rj/ueAAoy. 

It changes ei into #, as i)deiv for sftJ^. 

It adds a syllable to the Temporal Augment, 
as opctco, icopaov for copaov; eixoo, ibixec for oiita* 

It adds #« to the Second Person in a 9 as ^ 
G&a for ?jfc; oldao&a,hy Syncope ofofra, for of^. 

It changes ^£ and ^ of the Perf. into ei, as 
£i'At]<pa for AdAr)(pa s ai'ficcpftai for fiejuap/Licu, ii'Ae- 
yfiai for AiAsyfiau 

It drops the Reduplication in Verbs begin- 
ning with two consonants, as i^Ader^xa for /?&- 
fiA&iiit}xa» 

It repeats the two first letters of the Present 

before the Augment of Verbs beginning with 

# 9 £, o i as oAe'co, wAtxa, oAcoAexa. 

It forms the First Fut. and Perfect of Verbs 
in co, as from m ; thus ftdAco, fttArjoco, jefa'Ayxa, 

as if from fttAeco. 1 

It drops a in the First Fut. as vo/llko circum- 
flexed for vofuow, xop&t for xopeaeu 

It changes « in the penultima of the Perf. 
Act. into o, as i'orpocpa from arpecpco, zi'Ao%a for 
AeAe/a. 



1 These Verbs have no other form, povlQfict^ tgyo)* &£- 
Aoj, acatfivdw, fxe'Mco, /ueAfj, oYopcti- 



Ionic. 221 

It forms the Pluperfect in 7, yg, t), or eiv. 

It changes erayoav and arcooar in the 3d Per- 
son Plural Imperative into ovtcov and avxcov, as 
rvTiTovicov for Tvmeicooav ; Tvipdvxcov for Tvifjdjco- 
oav * and a^aor^'into tf#G>^ as ruTneofrcov for ri/- 

It makes the Optative of Contracts in rp^ as 

cptAofyv for tpiXoipi. 1 

It changes /a before ^a* in the Perfect Pas- 
sive of the 4th Conjugation into a, as necpaoficcc 
for ne<pct[i[iai. 2 

The Ionic 
loves a concourse of vowels, as tvutzcci for rv- 
TiTi), GtXyvccirj for oeAijvy. 

Its favourite letter is ??, which it uses for a 
and e. 

It puts soft for aspirate, and aspirate for soft, 

Mutes, as iv&avja for iviavfra, xifroov for %ti€ov. 

It prefixes and inserts e > as icov for cor, noty- 

j£wv for TiOirjiSy. 



1 The Third Person Plural is always regular, ydo7ev. 
Verbs in aco make «j??j\ 

2 In the construction of sentences, it uses a license prob- 
ably occasioned by the love of liberty which characterized 
the Athenians. 

19* 



t 



222 Ionic- 

It inserts *, as $da for yea j and adds instead 
of subscribing it, as Gpfaeg for Opaxtg, qrjidiog 
for Qadiog. 

In Nouns of the First Declension, it chang- 
es the Genitive ov into £«, as notrjieco for 7io^~ 

TO!/. 

It changes the Dative Plural intone and yoi, 
as Satvrjg xepaArjot, Hes. for duvaig xeyaAcag. 

In the Second it adds i to the Dative Plural, 
as toIol i'pyoioc, Her. for roig egyoig, neglecting * 
before a voirel in prose. 1 

In the Third it changes e into ??, as fiaoifopg 
for fiaetAdog. 

It changes the Accusative of Contracts in co 
and ojg into ov v, as aldovv for atdoa. 

In Verbs, it removes the Augment, as /3^ 
for e/%. 

It prefixes an unusual Reduplication, as xd- 
xa/btov for ixa/uor, AeAa&zofrco for Aafreo&G). 

It terminates the Imperfect and Aorists in 
exov, as TVJijeoxov, Tvijjaoxov, for ztvtitov, irvrpec. 

It adds a* to the Third Person Singular 
Subjunctive, as Tvuii]ot for tv7ijt). 

It changes e^ tig, ei, of the Pluperfect, into 

£Ct, £Gf£, ££, &C. aS iT€TV(f£CC) ag, &c. 



1 The addition of i is frequent in poetry. 



Doric. 223 

It forms the Third Person Plural of the Pas- 
sive in drat and aVo, as Tvmearai for tvtitovtgci, 
ittfrearo, for irifravio, earo for r^vxo. 

It resumes in the Perfect the Consonant of 
the Active, as Tervrparat for reiv/n/ue'voi £tot. 

It changes a into the Consonant of the Sec- 
ond Aorist, as necpgddaiai for necppaofievoi €tai. 

The Doric 

loves a broad pronunciation ; its favourite let- 
ter is a, which it uses for *, ^ o > co, and ov. 
It changes £ into od, as oodco for 6&. 1 
In Nouns, in the First Declension, it chang- 
es ov of the Genitive into #, as a'ida for didov. 

In the Second Declension it changes ov of 
the Genitive into m, as &eS for #«o£; and ovj 
of the Accusative Plural into og and cog, as #s- 

05 for fteovg, dv&poi/icog for dv&peonovg. 

In the Third Declension it changes tog of 
the Genitive into tvg, as %dkevg for %dhzog. 



1 Z is composed of <Js ; the Doric only reverses the or- 
der of those letters. 



224 Doric. 

In Verbs, it forms the 2d and 3d Person 
Singular of the Present in eg and *, as xvmeg, 

TVTITe, for TVTLT6lS fi TVTtTU. 

It changes o/ier of the 1st, and ovai of the 3d, 
Person Plural into o/neg and ovu, as Aeyo/xeg, Ae- 
yovrt, 1 for Ae'yo/usv, Aeyovac. 

It forms the Infinitive in /aev and /uevai, as 
iV7iie{iev and TVTiTe'/uevcu for Tuiueiv? 

It forms the Feminine of Participles in o^«, 
evaa, and ###, as jviuoioa, ivmevGa, and TvziTcooa, l 

for TVJITOVOa. 

It forms the First Aorist Participle in «^ 
#*a#, aiv, as xvip-aig, aiaa, cuv, for rvip-ag^ aoa 9 av. 

In the Passive it forms the 1st Person Dual 
in to&ov, and Plural in eofra, as rvzcTOfi-eofrov, 

6G&CC, for TV7lTO/U-€&OVj £&CC. 3 

It changes o^ of the Second Person into eu, 
as Tvmeu for xvnrov. 



1 See page 63. 

2 It has been thought that TVurt^avai was the original 
form, which was shortened by Syncope into rvnTtvai. and 
by Apocope into Tvint^tv ; the next abbreviation was nm- 
re&v, which was contracted into xvmtiv. The Doric short- 
ened it still wore, into rvmev. 

3 Some forms are promiscuously used by more than one 
Dialect. Thus those in eo&ov and to&a are Attic as well 
as Doric. 



JEolic* 225 

In the middle, it circumflexes the 1st Fu- 
ture, as jvyjovfiai for rvyjo/uat. 

It forms the 1st Person Sing- of the Future 
in zvnai, and the 3d Plural in twrcu, as rvyev- 

The iEoLic 
changes the Aspirate into the Soft breathing, as 

r^fiiga for rj/uepa. 1 

It draws back the Accent, as iy#> for iyco, 
(prj/bit for <fr\yCL, ovvocda for avvoida, aya&og for «- 
ya&og; and circumflexes acuted monosylla- 
bles, as Zevg for Z&vg. 

It puts &a for &tv, as onto&a for onio&tv. 

It resolves Diphthongs, as na'Cg for ncug. 

In Nouns of the First Declension it chang- 
es ov into ao, as aidcto for didov. 

It changes aw of the Genitive Plural into awv, 
and as of the Accusative into cug, as [lovoacov, 
fuovoaig, for (jiovgcov, /uovoccg. 

In the 2d Declension it drops the t subscript 
in the Dative, as xoo^lco for xoaficp. 



1 On the same principle, the Latin Dialect had originally 
no Aspirate ; hence fama from tyr^, f^iga from qvyr], cano 
from %aivoj,fallo from aqrcUAw, vespa from 0#>#f« It used 
cedus for hcedw, ircus for hircus- Afterwards the aspiration 
was imitated from the Greek ; and, in consequence of the 
propensity to extremes natural to mankind, the Latins car- 
ried the use of Aspirates to a ridiculous excess, some pro- 
nounced prcechones for prcecones, ckenturiones for centuriones^ 
chommoda for commoda. 



226 Poetic. 

In the 3d Declension it changes the Accu- 
sative of Contracts in co and oog into cor, as al- 
dcov for aldoa ; and the Genitive ovg into cog. 

It forms the 3d Person Plural of the Imper- 
fect and Aorists of the Indicative and Opta- 
tive in gccv, as tJviiTooav for ervnrov. 1 

It changes the Infinitive in av and ow into 
aig and oig, as ye'Aai'g for yeXar, %pv6o7g for %Qv- 

GOUV. 

It changes ttv of the Infinitive into tp>, as 

TVTCXrfV for JVTITtlV. 

In the Passive it changes ^6#« into ^£#6 
and [is&ev, as TVJijojJiefre and rvRTOfie&er for ti//t- 

The Poets 

have several peculiarities of inflection. 

They use all the Dialects ; but not indiscrim- 
inately, as will be seen in the perusal of the 
best models in each species of poetry. In 
general they adopt the most ancient forms, 
as remote from the common Dialect 2 



1 This is chiefly used, in the Alexandrian dialect, by the 
Septuagint. 

2 Thus they frequently omit the Augment, which was 
not used in the earliest Ionic and Attic forms. 



Poetic. 227 

They lengthen short syllables, by doubling 
the consonants, as eoaejai for ioeicce, i'ddeioe for 
iSetae ; by changing a short vowel into a diph- 
thong, as etv for iv, fiovvog for fiiovog, itk^kovO-, 
fiev for ttyAvfrafiiev - p or by v final, as iarlv <pt- 
Aov. 

They add syllables, as <p6a>g for <p<os, opdav 
for ogav, 6acj06€[i£vai for Gwoetv. 

They drop short vowels in pronunciation, to 
diminish the number of syllables, as dfidm for 
dafxaco, I'ytVTo for iyeveio. 

They drop syllables, as a kepi for dkcptiov, xpi 
for xgifAVov, kina for klnagov ; dvva for dvvaaai^ 
aaw for ioacoae^ etc. 

In Nouns, they form the Gen. and Dat. in 
i; as %€(paAfj(pi from x€<jpak?f, arparocpi from 
Cjpaiog r 6 /soft from o£o£, vaveft for vavoi. So 
aviocptioY avioig. 

In the 2d Declension, they change the Gen- 
itive ot> into o*o, as noki^ioio Tcaxoio for nokefiov 
xaxov, Horn. * and oo' in the Dual, into our, as 
AoyoaV for koyoiv. 

In the third Declension, they form the Da- 
tive Plural by adding i or at to the Nomina- 
tive Plural, as nccis, ncudes, naideoc or nccideooi. 

1 The Tragic poets adopt this change in the Chorus only. 



228 



Pronouns. 



In Neuters they change a into eoi or £ggi, as 

jSij/naia^ firi(JLCtT€6GL. 

They form several Verbs of a peculiar ter- 
mination, in &co, oyco, u&co, gx(o p gjico, g*/co, £cg, etco^ 
etvcoj r}co, otaco^ ouco, and coco, as fiefipcofrco, i%co^ 
etc. So olaco from oi'co, opoco from opco, etc. 

They have Particles peculiar to themselves, 
as a/uat, di^&a^ txrjTi, ijfiog, fi€G(pa ? vepfre, °X a ? X€ i 
Qa, etc. 

DIALECTS OF THE PRONOUNS. 

Ionic. Doric. iEolic. Poetic. 

yea 




Doric. 
iywv, iycxtvr], 
iycoya, tycDvya 



S.N. 
G. 

D. 
A. 



(Jf /O, 680) 

oeo&ev 



epiv 



ctyif, oifjifie 



afiwv, dfnecDv^ 

CifAlV, a/ 

i 

cx^aS, ape, 

tv, rvvri) tvya 
rev, r€vg^ reovg 
toL xlv, xttv 

T(, TV 



eyo, tymv 
B. i(o\ iwyct, 

B. ifiovg 

tyiQi) B. ifiv 



a lift (id Vi a/nfieov 

Cl[A[A€6lV 



rovvri 

6£V, GS&iV 
TlPtj 



i[A€&£V 



cc/upsg 
rjf.il v 



rjpsiag 



TIP , TtLV 



G610&6P 



Dual and PL like iy(o\ substituting v for a and rj. 



Ov. ElfJiL 



D.N.A. Gqie 



Ionic. 
S. G. *fo, oTo, ioio 
*b, to$tv 
D. 
A. 



P.N. 
G. 
D. 



0<p£6$ 
0(fj£(*)V 

ay Iv, GCpt 
Giptag 



229 

Doric. 

r 
£V 



GCpWe, G(pG) 

G(fig 



Gq,e, y.i£ 



JEolic Poetic. 
£&£v,y£&tv uodev 

« <*> 

£01 

ft, Gyi 



{UV, vlv 1 



aGcpt 

Gfftq, CiG(f£ 



Gcpeteg 

Gqdc&v 

Cflv 

Gtyticcg 



A. 

D. I 1*1*1 
2£. r\^v 



Sing. 

- h 

- eeig 



Dialects of the Verb Et/ni. 

Indicative. — Present. 

Dual. Plur. 



iVTl 



££l £G6l- 



£l[*£g 



£VLGL 
£VXl 



5 J. 1 > 



£[A£V,£l[.t£V£T£ 



£VTl^ tVVZl 
i'ctGGl,. 



Imperfect 



Sjnif. 

I. Ja,*?a,%, htgj- 
£yv,£hiv,fjtg,£ag,- 
lovrfov, £>iG&a, 

£GKQV 

D. z — ns 

fa. r\G#a - — 



Dual. 



Plur. 



6GTOV 



£azs 



Vtieg 



P. r\r\v, £7]v^£v Itov, £Gti]v, £(.i£v — — ioav tGGav. 



r\Gxov, r/orijv 



£GY.OV 



1 Mlv and vlv are of all Genders and Numbers. 

In Celtic, nyn, our, your, their, is of all Gend. and Num. 

20 



230 
Pluperfect. 



ElfiL 



Sing. 



Dual. 



Plur. 



ectTO, aazo 



Sinff. 

A. £<J€l 

I. — — i'o£ai,t(Joectt, 

D. ioovficci, eGy, Ightciv 
eaivftai) ioGrj iaoeTriui 
P. iGGOftai, iGGrj iGGirav 



Future. 

Dual. 



Plur. 



— I — — iGovvxai 



A. 
P. 



Sing. 



iOOO 



Imperative — Present. 

Dual. Plur. 



tGTCOV 

iovnov. 



Optative. — Present. 
I. loifu, £0t>9, ioi, elfAiv thv* 



Sing. 



Subjunctive — Present. 
Dual. Plur. 



rjGii i'rjGi,, 
eirjG^ 



(of.ug 



Infinitive. — Present. 

I. tfjifV) eipev 

D. eleven,, slfpevcw, fjfiev, ^fies % it^gi 

P. entity 



Future. 

P. SGG6G&CU, 





231 




Participle. — Present. 


I. tow 
D. 

SL tig 


iqvaa iov 
tvGa, io7occ, taGGa - — 
Hgcc, eaacc tv. 




Future. 




P. ioaoptvog. 1 



Changes of Letters by the Dialects. 2 

A is put for 

E, D. ccixa for a/xt, ciyoQaaod^av for ctyoQtccG&cci. So in 

Latin maneo from ptvo), annus from tvvog. 
H, iE. yccfia for qj^^Vi potrrjg for [Mqit}Q, (tiukov for fAtjlov ; 

hence the Latin Jama, mater, malum. I. fitfiacog forftz- 

Prjojg, from ptfirjuolg. 
iV, I. in the 3d Person Plural xtlciTO for xttvxo ; Port. Lis- 

6oa for Lisbon. 
O, D. fi'xaa* for tiKOGi ; aratrum from uqotqqv, haud from 



1 This Verb will appear less irregular if it is observed 
that it forms its Tenses in every Dialect from ?w, qtt?, &/iu 
or */jie2, and <a*fc/. From to) are formed &*?, en, contracted 
into tig, ti; and from its Future toco is formed its Middle 
tGopat. From ipi and £0^u are formed txi, iatvl or «n$, 
&c. From tipl we have tiGi, &c. Thus the Tenses of 
the Verb sum are formed from surn,fuo,forem, tco and tlf.iL 

2 This is by no means a complete list of the Changes, 
The reader's attention will easily increase it. 

It must however be noticed, that these changes do not 
take place indiscriminately. Thus, if the Attics changed 
ovv into tvv, it must nojt be concluded that they changed gv 
into gi), Gvxfj into £iw*J, &c. The authority of the best 
writers is the only sanction. 



232 

T, A. didoaai for dufbvat,; L. cafe from kvIi£, canis fror% 
v.vv6g. 

i2, D. povaccv for [aovgwv. 

El, D. xkadag for vMJdctg. 

O Ty D. ^4ivtla for ^4iveiov. 

It is added, aora^vg for Gta%vg, dojtccipco for onaiQO). 

It is dropped, «Azo for ^Aaro, mulgeo from aptly co, balne- 
um from fiakctve7ov, palma from naXafit}, 

B 1 

2l, M. fiiiecLQ for StXtag ; 6w from eWff ; ietfum for duellum* 

S, L. a/z6i from akXo&i, uber from ov&ug. 

M, iE. fivQiiat for [Avpprj'g. 

J7, D. fiwQoq for 7UK^O£, a& from air', sz/6 from Jn', &M#tt$ 

from 7if£o^, comburo from tivqoo). 
T, P. nctp(ja\e for zazpake ; Zi&ra from kcrga. 
<£, D. Bifonnog for &ttfoTi7iog ; ambo from ctpqa), balozna 

from qalawa, nebula from vtq&t]. 
V. Bagpcov from Varro ; ferbui fromferveo; S. Pablo {or 

Paulo. 
It is added to ^ in {ttorjufigla for fAtGyfitQlct; S. hombre 

from Aomo ; F. chambre from camera ; E. number from 

Humerus 
It is inserted for the Digamma in the Laconian Dialect, cJ- 

/?oV for fo/oi/ or coda/- 

Z>, D. yXicpagov for pteqagov ; glans from fialavog. 



1 The Mutes are commntable with those of the same or- 
gan ; thus /? with the other Labials n and qr, to which may 
be added p and i/j. The modern Greeks use ^7i for /?. 

In the beginning of a word, /? not 6", y not T, t^ not 0, z 1 
not 7, should in strictness be used ; but that distinction is 
seldom observed. Lin modern typography, tf, f, 0, and 7, are 
seldom used.] 

2 r is commutable with the other Palatals x and #, to 
which may be added £. 



233 

K, A. ayfitjreg for ax^rt?, toiyiitv for ioinafiep ; L. guber- 
no from nvpaQvw, angulus from dyxvkoi>, cygnus from 
avxvog^ plaga from Tildxrj ; Tai'og from Caiws ; guitar 
from Kiddy a. 

M, L. ag-m/s from d^vog^ for dy^itvog from «^oj. 

It is added, yvoyog for vtyog. 

It is dropt «*« for /«?«, m) for *yw\ hence the Italian io, 
/; lac from ya\a\ natus for gnatus. 

It is put for the Digamma, y*Wo for ftvro, yoivog for Jo?- 
i/o? or oivog. 

A 1 

I] D. da for /?J ; cfa/cw from ykvxvg. 

Z, D. fAadog for /na£6g ; 2 odor from o£w. 

0, L. Dews from Seog, inde from i'v&ev ; daughter from -Su- 

ydirjg, door from v() s oa ; murder for murther, Bedlam for 

Bethlem. 
2, I. odjui? for oot/u^ ; D. ?d|§& for Yo^ey, xexadpivog for 

xtxacjfievog ; medius from ptoog. 
ZJ P. xafiduvafui* for x«r' duvapiv ; mendax from mentior ; 

S. fodos from £oto, ciudad from civitas. 
It is added, t/&oo from aofrj, dvdgog for dvyog ? medulla from 

fivelog ; prodes for proes, redeo for reeo, mec? forme. 
It is dropt, /ojk-i? for dicoxi], aifACOP for daiptov ; ros from 

SpOOOQ. 

/^, A. A^oJ? for kaog; talentum from idlavrov ; exerceo from 
arceo. 



1 z/ is commutable with the other Dentals # and r, to 
which may be added f, A, and i>. 

2 Or, in other words, omitting n, for C is composed of dg. 

3 See p. 26, n. 2. To prevent the position of r after w, 
d is inserted in French in tendre from leroer, viendrai from 
i>enir. Thus we say Deanery for Deanry ; and the vulgar,, 
Henery for Henry. 

20* 



234 

H, I. t(5av for ??<Tcn', t^poc for £^p0£; /era from g?,o. 

/, L. Afwsne 1 from Jioi qua : ;nare for wart, sibe for 5162. 

O, D. o^iJ for aoT; genu from pv, ^edes from node*. 

T, L. pejero from j?/ro. 

/2, L. stamen from (sti$fimv. 

It is added, A. eoipaxa for oOpaxa, i&tho for -&ekco ; I. atfeA- 
<r*0£ for ddt/.qog; Aar^i vog from LatimisJ* * Avtwvzi- 
vog from Antoninus ; lateo from ).u{ico, pileus from ixV/.ug. 

It is dropt, ,«o<; for a /0 ^/ !• #«£* f° r *,<3aA* ; A. >;ooj* for 
r t gojeg : rwo from /pt'co, /160 from Af/iw, wwofrom vivwj 
•maritus for m-areitus, Vertumnus for Vertumenos? 



E, JE. tpp£d for #17?;. 

X ia the Old Doric, £tu%gov for o/ux(m5*. 4 

iy 

_^, I. 7T<j7 t yua for ttoc?/ ( ««, oocfh] for (Joqlei, oorjp for ojpav. 5 
E, I. Traoi/.fju for {SuGiktcc, iineno: for emir a ; P. rtOr ( vui 

for Ti&tvai. 
Ai* B. naXrjog for rca/.aiog. 
El. D. x^fiwg for i'/.elvog. 
Ev, L. Ulysses from 'OJVacrfi'c. 

It is added, P. 1713^ for >/*>; D. oV*?; for cm ; ones from ax/$ 
It is dropt, A. £?//£*/ for ur,utv : Afars from ' Agr k g ; audi- 

bam for audiebam. 



1 Originally A/Wa. 

2 Originally Lateinus. 

3 The Greek Passive form is found in many other words, 
thus alumnus for alomenos, fortuna for fortumena, autumnus 
for auctomenos ; so catechumen from KaxriyovLitvog. 

4 This change may be traced in our Western Dialect. 

5 The Attic adopts this Doric change in Aft*/??, f?~, ruti 1 *]. 
yoriiai and yj3r ( (j&ui. 






235 

e 

A, M. yjv&og for xpsvdog, IlQOfxri&evg from fnqdog. 

J£, A. dvd\ur for dvofii]; 1 I. mml&aTcci for mmiofjiivoi eiai 

T, I. xi&oiv for ^roif. 

It is added, JL ntnov&a for mnovu ; D. dt,%&a for <%o?. 

It is dropt, D. £<jAos for io&kog ; minuo from [uvv&oo* 



A, A.tccvtI hr Tama ; machina from [AfjX<xvy<> simul from 

« ( «a, sine from aViv ; contingo for contango. 
E^ I. nolcog for noXaog ; D. a^os for #£0£ ; w from S^ />^'co 

from TiAf'xco, /egitw from Xtyexe, animus from (xpefxog ; 

puppim for puppem. 
H, anciently, iitejpa for jpegcc ; vestis from lod^tjg. 
iV, D. *V$o? for h'vdov* 
O, A. <fe'i>p£ for ^^o ; cinis from novig, imhzr from ofuSQog, 

caulis from xat'Ad?, legimus from l.tyopev. 
T, D. f.ioiQa for poioa ; dulcis from yAuxi/s, garrio from /a- 

puco ; optimus for optumus* 
6v, L. awimt from dvt/iov. 2 
It is added, I. * J^**/ for S^usi/ ; to?(7£ for to?? ; P. %tivog for 

Itvog? nagcu for jra^a ; A. a>i for *V ; mina from /two: ; 

KaioaQtia from Ccesarea ; peculii from peculi* 



1 Perhaps this mode arose from an imperfect pronuncia- 
tion, which in this case we should call lisping* Thus the 
# was by the Dorics pronounced d and f, as the English th 
is by foreigners, dat and *atf for that 

2 Probably from olv^ovq^ which was shortened into aW- 
pot, and became the Genitive animi in the same manner as 
the Nom. Plural is formed from ctvepoi. 

3 This is a most convenient letter for Poets, an advan- 
tage equalled only by the power of doubling the consonants. 
They use at pleasure ipeJo for £{a*q, eivtxa for JWx«, £it»$ 
for lews, einco for 67rw, &tm for fiea), xkeioj for xXew, etc. 

4 Till the end of the reign of Augustus, the Gen. of 



236 

It is dropt, A. ig for eig ; T). Itytv for Uynv ; Medea from 
Mydeia, dexter a from dat»n£Qa, est from £<yr£, me/ from 
piki, legunt from A*';/oi>T£; pepper from iteneQV ; in- 
quam for inquami, sum for swmt, gradus for graduis, 
doctum for docitum. 1 

K 

T, L. misceo from fiiGyw ; actum for agtum, lece anciently 

for Zege, macistratus for magistrates* 
77, I. ;«o?o£ for nolog. 
2, L. cwra from at^. 

T, D. 6x« for or* ; P. xaxx^qpaA??*' for xar' x^qpaA^V. 
X, I. dizof.t(/.v for deyo^ai ; lancea from hdypj. 
It is added, specus from gtisoq, nunc from p?7i/. 
It is dropt, Ttzkrjcog for xtik?}Kwg ; 2 Aodie for Aoc cfo'e. 

7^, L. st7eo from Giyaw. 

•A, L. Ulysses from 'OdvcosvQ, lacryma from daxQvpa. 

7, F.fille fromj^/za- 3 

JV, A. Mtqov for vitqov, 7tIsi>[awv for Tivev^mv ; P. akXeyco 

for avaleyw ; lympha from vv^r^ Palermo from TlavoQ- 

[*og. 



Nouns in iws and iwm was in i, as Cornell, consili* peculi ; the 
only difference then between the Genitive and the Vocative 
was in the Accent, the Gen. of FaZeriwswas Val'eri, the Voc. 
Vdleri. Afterwards the i was doubled in the Genitive. 

1 C had the sound of k ; hence docitum was easily abbre- 
viated to doktum or doctum ; thus, audacter for audaciter. 

2 In this case the preceding vowel is sometimes shorten- 
ed, as (jeftacig for fieffrjx-wg. 

3 Hence the reason will appear why in French I is moiril- 
y l'ee in fille, famille, and not in milk, ville. 



237 

jP, L. lilium from leiQiov ; intelligo for interlego. 
1\ P. xdkfoni for xaTcU*7i£. 

It is added, relligio for religio ; syllable from syllabd\ 
It is dropt, a/?w for A*//?w ; juu/ea; from qvkXct, 

M 

B, D. Ttptftiv&og for TtQtpivftog. 

M, lafifiuvo) for XavjSavoj ; L. musam from [tovoav, Deitm 

from #*oV, esscm from £/?7i>. * 
17, iE. [ictrt'oj for naitw ; somnus from vnvog. 
It is added, egefji^og for tgefiog^ oppQiiAog foropgipog, nlp- 

nXr^it for ntnlt]^ /noayog for oo%og, iio%Xog for u%log ; 

.Mars from '' ' Agiqg, mons from opo£. 
It is dropt, i'a for ^u/a ; sct/no from dx/^Trcoz/, imitor from 

(Aipoviicti,; circueo for circumeo. 
It is transposed, forma from [AQQcpri, num from -u(ox>. 

iV" 

/, D. cmV for a**i. 

^, D. ??*>#£ for ?JA#£. 

Jf, L. ne from /u?J ; quendam for quemdam^ tanquam for tam- 

P, L. plenus from Tthiprjg, donum from do* gov, mons from 

opo£, /70715 from nogog. 
2, D. *V for *s, &ri for Am* ; «#C. retixpcov for TiTvqjtug ; 

housen anciently for houses. 
7] D. xai/j/6i;(Ja? for xazavevoag ; joimis from nlrvg. 
It is added, D. mVeo for mco ; vrjdvftog for tjdvfiog ; JTarou' 

for Co^o ; pango from nayw, cincihnus from yclnivvog, 

magnus from peyag ; totiens for fotae* ; lantern from /a- 

ferna. 



1 T^f was anciently put for i> before /?, fi, 7i, qp, o e , as rr;^ 
u6\w. Thus in Latin inscriptions, tm perpetuum. On the 
same principle it is put for i> and t in words compounded of 
c?i/a and xar« before /?, (i, 7r, qp, as ctficpccdov^ xu(i(ii£ag. 



I 



238 

It is dropt, I. piiCoa for pclCova; JE. xvtfdvxo) for the At- 
tic xvipdvxojv, hence L. amanto ; draco from dpdxcov, 
Plato from IlXdxojv. 

It was anciently preserved in Composition, inrideo for irri- 
deo, conludo for colludo. 



Z, L. rixor from i@i£oj. 

K, D. iotvog for xotvog; sextus from txxog. 

-£, A. £t/«* for out/; 1 Jljax from ^«£, /m# from niaaa ■; 

Ulyxes for Ulysses. 
It is added, comix from xop&>i/?7. 
It was preserved in Composition, effociunt for effugiunt. 2 

O 

^, D. xixxoga for xtaoagzg; notefiogfrom naXd^irj, as /?wg- 

wa from ^w^tims ; c/owio from dccpd). 
E, A. Itkoya for leksycc ; tiouws from Woe, oJewwi from J'Aca- 

oy ; anciently voster for vester, 
I, L. o?/i for */& 
T, L. ftost from i^£, anchora from ayxvQct ; anciently dede* 

ront for dederunU servom for servum, colpa for culpa. 
Si, L £o?? for*Cw?5 ; iE. o^a for cope*. 
It is added, P. (£o'co£ for q>wg ; D. ftovydxriQ for ftvydxriQ, 

tiXriXov&a for tifo]lv&a ; Avyovvxog from Augustus, 

oovduQLov from sudarium ; 3 opacus from nayyg. 
It is dropt, D. ^uiW for povGa, whence mi^a ; o7-wa* for o7- 

o^uaj ; &i from o*, Rentes from bdovxtg, nomen from 6V0- 



- 



1 The Doric puts £ for a in the Future of Verbs in fco, 
gooj, and rroj, as v.a&il;oj for xa&iout. 

2 iTis formed of xs ; the iEolian and Latin Dialects trans- 
pose the letters, as oxivog for £*Vo£, ascra for d'£iprj. 

3 This derivation exhibits a curious mixture of both lan- 
guages : voo, vdwg, sudor, sudarium, oovdaQiov. 



239 

/wa, Zephyri from £tcpVQOi, ab from cnro, fors from <£0- 
0O£,gew$ from yevog, mens from fttvog, mors from fiOQog- 

n 

B, L. papae from (tafiai ; scripsi for scribsi. l 

K, D. nvajuog for nvapog ; lupus from Ai;xo?. 

jj/, D. onnaTCi for OfAfictrcc. 

T, D. GTiddiov for ozddcov ; iE. niGGvpfg for reaGaQsg, ne^i- 

ne for ntvxs, W. pymp ; P. yidnneGOv for xar«7Z£(70z> ; 

jt?auo from rciw?. 
0, I. inQnQ for ecpiirjg ; purpura from noQcpvQcc. 
*P, L. /raZex from x//i;AAa. 
It is added, Zo/ra's from A a a? ; sumpsi, sumptum, for sums?, 

sumtum. 
It is dropt, Zato from 7rAarv?. 



^4, L. meridies for medidies, auris from audio* 
A, D. cpavQog for yavkog ; cpgdyellov from Jiagellum. 
JV, L. dz'rws from ditvog, legere from Xtyecv ; or, in the Com- 
parative, from cw. 
A. ctQQiiv for agatjv ; D. xAfO(> for xA*o£ ; tarm from 
tvQOig, celer from xekyg, cruor from x^uos, fori from 
%&toi, legero from A^co, i. e. A^Vaco. 2 
P. x<*V (>o'o*> for xar' po'oi> ; parricida for patricida. 
is added, wurws from i/i?o?, musarum from povodojv, tram 

from ia. 
is dropt, D. aioftlajv for aio%()ioDV, tigti for ngori ; Zecfas 

from kixxQOv, 
is transposed, D. xgadla for xagdlcc ; rapax from a^maf , 
ccrno from xpiVcw, repo from JgTrcu, tfener from xbqt\v» 



1 This change probably arose from the supposition that 
was always expressed by /?s. But keixpxo from Af//?o) is 

s/jSffw, as from ItLno) it is letnaio. Thus scribsi as proper- 
comes from 5cri6o as re/m from re/?o. See page 74. 

2 The Greek form is preserved in faxo, adaxo, and in Ze- 
ro, etc. 



240 



A, L. rosa from podov. 

Z, L. patrisso from 7iarp/£a>. 

0, D. 2^os for OeoQ, 'Aoavu for '^-friivrj, oqgoq for og&og, 

dog for ($o#* ; /ore* for /ouef/?. 
Jf, A. TieqaGjuac for necfa^fiav. 
iV, D. Isyofieg, L. legimus from tiyopsv ; JE. ytkd't'g for y*- 

Aa/V or ytlav. 
JST, A. Tt&vrivri for Te&v^'Srj ; sesto for sextus, visit for mi/. 
P, L. aroos anciently for arbor, quaesere for quaerere> 
1\ L. 055a from o'ara. 
.X, L. cri5i5 from i'yyog. 
It is added, J JE. oo>s for j/g, hence L. sw^ ; Gfiinoog for jiu- 

xpoV, x^Aaoj for x^Ac5, neXoixeo&a for nfkojiit&cc, arjfue- 

qov for r^iegov, tomr* for in ere ; super from vnig^- 

nos from ^cu ; Scarpanto for Carpathus* 3 



1 In old Inscriptions we find conjunxs, vixsit, uxsor, etc. But 
probably the engravers of Inscriptions were not more cor- 
rect in Italy than they are in England. In France their ig- 
norance is still more glaring ; the word Hotel is written Au- 
te\ Ostel, Otel, Othel, Otelle. Eau is written Au and O. 

2 The aspirate is generally expressed in Latin by s : a- 
lig, satis ; a'AAo/ta^ salio ; akg, sal ; £, se ; tdog, sedes ; ?£, 
sex ; imci, septem ; i'ziw, sequor ; 6'ottoj, serpo ; ijfxc, semi ; 
Tarr^u* sisto ; olxog, sulcus ; i>#cop, sudor; vkrj'OT vkfy, syl- 
va ; vnig, super ; vno\ sub ; vnvog^somnus ; vg$ sus. 

Sometimes the Soft assumes s ; akoog, saltus ; */, si ; d- 
(aI, sum ; tvog, senex ; egoj, sero ; /xco, sica ; owelog, socius. 

3 S or St is frequently prefixed to the ancient names of 
Grecian places, because the Preposition and the Article 
have been taken as a part of the name. Hence from */| 
rriv A!olv, to Dia, they have formed Standia ; from Lemnos, 
Stalimene ; from Cos, Stanco; from Thebes, Stibes; etc. Thus 
Constantinople is called by eminence Stanboul, from uq xyv 
nofov ; Troas, Eski-Stanboul, u e. the old city. 






241 



It is dropt, A. vofud) for vomica) ; D. qlv for fftjuv, 7r«« for 
naooc; 1 I. (foflecci for qofleoai; P. orig for b grig; tego 
from oceyco, fallo from oqalkw ; dixe for dixisse. 



A, D. ftejuiTog for fit/ntdog; intus from tvdov, mutus from 

t-ivdog ; apwtf for apud ; />as£ for passed. 
©, I. «ur^ for av&ig ; /ateo from /.«#co, triumphus from 

&Qtaji($og. 
if, D. t^os for ixilvog ; Lutetia from Aavxtrlv.. 
A, L. safts from «A*£. 

27, D. arra for Hirna; studium from onovdri. 
2, A. ftaXaTta for &a).aaaa ; D. tu for at', c/cm for <£?/ff«, 

tiqotI for 7r£0£, keyovxL for leyovoi, hence, dropping 

f, the Latin legunt ; quotio for quasso* 
It is added, D. rot for o* ; A. mo fog for 7toAj£ ; /?Zedo from 

frA*x co, terra from ijpa ; lintevm for linum ; rettulit for 

retulit ; F. aime-t-il for aime i/, where £ is restored 

from the original amat 2 
It is dropt, D. r^yavov from tfJyai'OJ' ; perna from mtQva ; 

possum for potissum. 



A, JE. GVQKctg for (7aptfa£ ; Hecuba from c JE£ccfitj, triumphus 

from &Q!ct[4(jog ; further for farther. 

B, L. aufero for abfero. 
E, D. OfJLv\yvQr\g for opt] ytptjg ; turn from if o?, wnws from 

£*>oV, w/cvs from tlxog, scopulus from oxonekog ; faciun- 
dum for faciendum. 



1 The Cretan, Lacedaemonian, and Pamphylian dialects 
put the Aspirate for a, as tt«« for jicfciu, t uaJa for jnoioa. 

2 These expedients to prevent the hiatus are natural to 
all languages. Various letters are interposed for this pur- 
pose. Thus in English the vulgar add r to a word ending 
in a before a vowel, as idea-r-of for ic/ea o/l 

21 



242 

/, I. pvfiXog for plpXog i 1 carnvfex for carnifex, lubens for 
libens. 

A, D. avfxcc for ti'A^. 2 

O, iE. %*£ for 6>«o, ftevg for #*oV, hence the Greek termi- 
nation 0^ became ws in Latin ; ovv^a for avowee, hence 
avcovvftog, anonymous ; purpura from no gyv^a, Ulysses 
from Odvoaevg, animus from ttVff/off, 6m/6ws from /?o'A- 
j#os, /eg-wnf from A^o^r*. 

i2, L»fur from graJp, w/na from coXivt], brachium from /?£a- 

It is added, P. juovvog for juovog. 

It is dropt, P.^TQinoQ for ryinovg ; uo/o from £o?;Aw, parum 

from navgov ; saeclum for saeculum, Herck for Hercule ; 

sing/e from singulus. 



B, L'fremo from jffp*^^ triumphus from <}Qicc^og. 
©, D. <£??0 for x>?jp, hence yera;ybrw from #i/pa. 
A", L.Jleo from xkaioj. 

Tl, A. aoq.uQo.yov for ccGnapayov ; 3 Bosphorus from Bovno- 

@og, trophaeum from tqotiu7ov ; fire from nvQ, father 

from 7i carjQ ; ^br from ^>ro. 
X, L.Jios from #Ao'o£. 
It is added, iE. yylyog for p?yos, hence L. frigus; frango 

from QryvviAt,. 
It is dropt, ^// for i'qr*? 1 '' Sometimes it becomes a simple 

Aspirate, as tau from gp*il 

JT, G. tcZi from /yco. Hence in English, dropping the gut- 
tural, /. 



1 The modern Greeks pronounce v like t, i. e. like the 
French i grec, or y. 

2 This change has been adopted in the French language, 
thus autre from alter, chaud from calidus, haul from ato ; 
aw for a Ze. * 

3 The Attics generally change n into gr, and x into # af- 
ter a, as oqjoyyog for aTrd^/os, G%tUdeg for axekideg. 



243 



©, D. oQvt,%og for ogvi&og. 
K, L. anchora from uyxvQct. 

It is dropt, lama from yXouvu., aranea from apa/i^. 1 Some- 
times it becomes a simple Aspirate, as humi from %a^aL 

W 

JSqp, D. 9* for (jqpf, hence i/tte. 
It is dropt, apu&og for xpdpa&og. 

^/, I. ftwiipa for fiavfia ; P. q(3a>oj for yfidoj. 

J?, P. 7iAcocu for ttA^co. 

.//, A. ipQcr/tog for tQQrjywg ; pronus from nQ^prjg^ cor from 

/, A. dcpewxct for ctcpeTxcc. 

O, A. noXewg for jiotaos ; Stoicus from aroci. 

25 I. ftw for ^i;. 

^u, I. TQWfta for TQav[iu; plodo for plaudo, codex for caw- 

cte, sorfes for siaudes. 
Ov, A. ktw fov Xaou ; I. cay for o£y ; D. jucoaa for ftovGa; De- 

os from &eovg* 
It is added, P. ys Araco^ for yelojv. 
It is dropt, D. dipv&dv for d^vd^dcav ; comix from KopwV^. 



1 X was a guttural, a sound which does not exist in Lat- 
in. The French and Italian languages have rejected it, 
and in English it has totally ceased. 



244 



DIGAMMA. 



The old Dialects of Greece admitted few 
or no Aspirates. The Digamma was calcula- 
ted to prevent the hiatus, which the concur- 
rence of vowels would produce. 1 Aspirates 
were afterwards introduced into all the Dia- 



1 The form of this character was at first a Gamma re- 
versed, then a Gamma ; afterwards it assumed the shape of 
a double Gamma, F, whence it derives its name. Hence 
it has sometimes been written /] as Fa^iov for FafitOL, I¥- 
&6i> for Ft&av, Ttvxo for Fivxo, Mo\. for ^Wo, Dor. for t\- 
to, from iltoy &x. The Emperor Claudian ordered that it 
should be written J, or F reversed; but probably that form 
ended with the inscription on his tomb, TERMINAJ1T 
It has frequently been expressed by Z?, and sometimes by 
K, Mi M> P, $>> X. 

It cannot be ascertained with precision what was the 
pronunciation of the Digamma, which underwent some 
changes. In its origin it was probably a soft guttural sound, 
like the German g final in xtcenig. Such is the present 
Greek pronuciationof the Gamma, which may be exempli- 
fied in the word v.vyov, an egg^ pronounced of one, guttu- 
ralizing one. 

From a guttural the transition was natural to the sound 
of our W. In this state it passed into Italy, under the form 
of V, and retained this pronunciation during the rougher 
periods of the Latin language. 

The frequent recurrence of this sound produced an effect 
so harsh and inelegant, that in the most polished states of 
Greece it was changed into an Aspirate, and in the iEolic 



245 



leets, except the iEolic, which adhered to the 
Digamma. Hence it has preserved the name 



and Latin dialects it was softened into F or V, and became 
the Digamma. The Lacedaemonian dialect, a branch of the 
iEolic, always pronounced, and generally wrote, the Di- 
gamma like B, a letter which in modern Greece has the 
sound of V. 

The Italians, and the other nations, whose language is 
derived from the Latin, pronounce the Digamma V, in vino, 
vent, &c. like our V. In the southern provinces of Europe, 
the B and Vare nearly similar in sound; and that the same 
similarity existed in Latin appears by the deduction of fer- 
bui from/erueo, and by the promiscuous use of both char- 
acters in many words. 

The Latin V was frequently expressed in Greek by Z?, 
as BaQQwv from Varro. And the Greek B was changed in 
Latin into V, as fiado), vado. V was indeed also sometimes 
changed into ov; thus, Virgilius was written BiQylXiog and 
Ovi^ylkiog; Nervii, Nfgfiioi and Ntyovioi; but Vossius and 
other eminent critics give the preference to the more mod- 
ern form in B. 

The change of the sound of W into that of V is not con- 
fined to the Greek and Latin; in the rough Arabic language, 

^ is pronounced W ; but in the soft Persian, which may be 
called a polished dialect of it, it is sounded V. 

According to these principles, it is probable that the Di- 
gamma final, or before a consonant, was pronounced like 
our F, and before a vowel like our V- Indeed, V and F 
were so nearly similar, that Fotum and Firgo were written 
Votum and Virgo. Thus paotltvg is now pronounced vasi- 
lefs. The analogy subsists in the French nevj\ neuve, and in 
the English half, halves. But our pronunciation of the Greek 
and Latin languages is so different from that of ancient 
Greece and Rome, that it is perhaps as unnecessary, as it ia 
difficult, to fix the genuine sound of the Digamma. 
21* 



- 246 

of the iEolic. It has also with great propriety 
been called the Homeric Digamma. The 
great Poet adopted the original forms of the 
iEolic and Ionic Dialects, 1 which threw a ma- 
jestic air of antiquity on his poetry. This an- 
cient form Homer dignifies by the appellation 
of the language of the gods. Virgil, and among 
the moderns Tasso and and Milton, successive- 
ly imitated that practice by the introduction 
of antiquated expressions, which removed their 
language from the common idiom, and cast a 
venerable gloom of solemnity on their style. 
To that principle may, in a great measure, be 
attributed the frequent use of the Digamma 
by Homer. 

The use of the Digamma having been insen- 



The German g-, commonly expressed by gh in the En- 
glish language, has shared in South Britain the fate which 
the Digamma experienced in many parts of Greece, and is 
disused. The few instances, in which it is sounded, follow 
the principle of the Digamma F, as cough, enough,, laugh, 
rough, tough, trough. 

1 It is not to be imagined that Homer adopted arbitrarily 
the different Dialects. His was the pure appropriate dic- 
tion of Verse, the classical language of ancient Greece, the 
source of all that was sublime and beautiful in poetry, and 
the model of all succeeding poets. 



247 

sibly abolished by the introduction of Aspirates, 
transcribers of the works of Homer neglected 
to mark it, and at length the vestiges of its ex- 
istence were confined to a few ancient Inscrip- 
tions. The harmonious ear of the Poet had 
led him sedulously to avoid every hiatus of 
vowels ; but the absence of the Digamma made 
him inharmonious and defective. To remove 
in some degree this difficulty, his Commenta- 
tors interposed the final r, 1 or the Particles 
y\ S\ t ; but these could be only partially 
adopted, and were far from exhibiting the Po- 
et in all the charms of his original style. Num- 
berless passages remained in their naked de- 
formity, and exercised the conjectural sagacity 
of Grammarians and Commentators. Thus in 
the verse in the opening of the Iliad, 'Hgcocov 
avToug dt iXcogta revye xvvsggiv, aware of the in- 
harmonious effect of the concurrence of the 
two «, they cut off the former. The quantity 
of the latter created another difficulty. Some 



1 They have even by the addition of i>, altered the Case, 
and consequently the sense of some words. An instance of 
this appears in the last book of the Odyssey 312, where vwiv 
ioihmi has been put for vm/esoikne^ 



248 

doubled the A, and others asserted that e was 
lengthened before the liquid. But there were 
passages, to which even these and similar ex- 
pedients were inapplicable. A successful ef- 
fort was made by the great Bentley to remove 
these embarrassments. The restoration of the 
Digamma has at length vindicated the Poet 
and displayed the harmonious beauties of his 
original versification. To give the learner 
some clue to guide him through these intrica- 
cies, an alphabetical table is added of the 
words in Homer/ which either constantly, or 
generally, admit the Digamma in the initial 
Vowel. 





A 




ctvdavco, 


E 


ayco, 


\ 


to 


apaiog, 




ccyyu/Lii. 


i 


break, 


dpdoj, 


tap, 


adco^ 






aj» h 


tdvov, 


uh-j^ 






apioTor, 


iif€ipa 9 


ctMg, 






aprtZ; 


titer, 


aAcoui, 






aoru, 


i'&vog, 


ava*, 






auGiaAeog. 


elde'oj, 



1 Some words had originally the Digamma, but had lost it 
in the time of Homer; thns a >y\-:: is said by Dionysius of 
Halicarnassus to have been digammated, but no trace of it 
appears in Homer. 



249 



tl'dcokor, 
eixekog, 

ei'xco, to resemble, 

&Aap, 

eikvco, 
etkvpaco, 

UkOOy 

tipyoo, 

txa&ev, 

ixcig, 

ixaorog, 

i'xaiog. 



¥xr)kog p 

h'xijTi, 

exupog, 

ixcor, 

ikeog, 

ekixeg, 

iktxcoaeQy 

ik to 6 CO j 

iknlg, 

i'kncOy 

ekco, 

ekcog, 

ikcoptov, 

everoiy 

irrupt, 

" i 

eotxa, 

tog, 

e'nog, 



enco } 

egyor, 

egyco, 

i'pdcOy 

etpco, 

egpooy 

ipvco, to draw, 

ia&qg, 
i'o&og, 
i'ontpogj 

eOTtffy 

%Tagog 9 
ii^g, 

excQGtog, 

eco, to put On. 



1 Augments often retain the Digamma of the Verb, as *- 
okna from i'knoo, tenia from tnw, etc. Many words take 
a double Digamma, one before the Augment, the other be- 
fore the Verb, as vvkti fffowojg, ins it a, JtfoXnct, etc. 

In many compounded words, the Digamma is placed in 
the middle, as ngtfHdoj, dfcixrjg, xanottgyog, etc. It is in- 
serted in several simple words, as ojig, vXf*i, etc. 

It has been before observed, that v and v were substitut- 
ed for the Digamma. Hence to ' AxQtfdrig or 'jdTQffiStjg' 
succeeded *ATQtidf}g ; to A/a 6g, % Ayaiog* Thus aw, a/ai 
made aoow in the future, changed into uvaco ; xpdco, ipdfm 
into ipavooo, etc. So yj Jew, ^iiaw, etc, 



250 



H 

rjdco, 
vjfrog, 
fyog, 
?}xa, adv. 

#*, 



I'xeAog, 
'iXiog^ 

iV£Q, 
IVLOV, 

ibv, 
lov&ag^ 

iGog, 
ioxcoy 

Irvg, 

r 
t(f>i< 

Vcptog, 

up, 



tear), 
icaxrf. 



o 



oagag y 

Qlxog, 
oTvog, 






ovAafiog, 

ouAog, 

ovpov. 



SI 



cog. 



The Latin Dialect naturally adopted the JEr 
olic Digamma, which it expressed generally 
by V, as will be seen in the following list : 



aicov, 

aogvog^ 
ayaiog, 



vagor ; 
aevnm ; 
vulpes ; 
avernus ; 
Achivus ; 



fjioco, 



aveo; 

vivo ; 
j3o€s 9 boves ; 
cJiog, divinus ; 
iideco, video ; 



251 



sl'xari, viginti ; 
i'Aco, volvo ; 
i/ico, vomo ; 
ivdtxw vindico ; 
I'rsioi, veneti; 
ivztpos, venter ; 
^^vergo; 
epos, servus ; 
ipw, verto ; 
iaihjg, vestis ; 
ioneya, vespera ; 
tWcr, Vesta ; 
iios 9 vetus ; 

ilog, viscus ; 
ibv, viola ; 
&, vis ; 
ftp, ivi ; 
*&'<», cavo ; 
xepaog, cervus ; 
xkeig, clavis ; 
xopog, corvus ; 
Aaiog 9 laevus ; 
Xagrj, larva ; 



Aeiog, levis ; 
Aouco, lavo ; 
Avw 9 solvo ; 
fidAtf, malva; 
fidopog, Mavors ; 
/idea, moveo ; 
vaio?,n&vm; 
vavg, navis ; l 
vdos, novus ; 
vixto, vinco ; 
oixos, virus ; 
otvog, vinum ; 
otg 9 ovis ; 
oAco 9 volvo ; 
o%£os 9 vulgus ; 
ba>, voveo ; 
navpog, parvus ; 
ngito, privo ; 
QicD) rivus ; 
oxcuog, saevus ; 
tcuos, pavo ; 
vkr) y sylva; 
vg>, uvesco ; 
doy 9 ovum, &c. 



1 Navg was probably pronounced nttfs, hence navis. 
Thus navQog, pafros, was transposed into parvus, vtvgov 
into nervus. 



252 

Sometimes by other letters, aoiolsg which 
are B, as &vc§, dubium ; qcoco, robiir ; vco, uber. 

C, as traga, cetera. 

F, as dyopd, forum ; o/tuAog, famulus ; aiAog, 
felis ; iveg, funes ; vcd, jSuo. 

R, as fiofy Boreas ; evco, uro ; i'Aaog, hilaris ; 
fiva^ murex ; fiouodcav, musarum ; w oc, nurus, 
etc. 1 

In English the Digamma has become W, as 
ve'og, new ; vinum, wine ; vicus, wick ; fistula, 
whistle ; vespa, wasp ; via, way. It is pro- 
nounced, without being written, in the word 
one. 

V, as vaog, nave, etc. 



1 The Digamma has been considered as a principal agent 
in the formation of Tenses in Latin ; thus, from amo, amai, 
was formed amavi ; from deleo, delei, delevi ; from cupio, cu- 
pii, cupivi ; from audio, audit, audivi. From amo, amavo, 
we have amabo ; from moneo, monebo. Perhaps this analogy 
may be carried to Plural Cases in bus. This termination 
was formerly more extensive ; hence we find in Plautus 
audibo, Dibus, hibus, etc. 

Another formation of the Latin Future has been sug- 
gested, — by the addition of PovlopaL or amo to the root of 
the Verb. Thus amabo is an abbreviation of amare fiovlo- 
ftiui, and regam of regere amo. Thus also in Italian, from 
amare ho, I have to love, is formed amero ; and in French, 
from fai a aimer, is formed faimerai. On the same prin- 
ciple the modern Greeks prefix •tff'Aco or tie to the Verb in 
the Future, as #*Aeu yyuipti, or tityQUtyei. And the Eng- 
lish Future will, originally wol, is the same as/?oi;A for/W- 
Ao/ucu, and vol for volo. 



253 

PRIMITIVES OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 

The original form of Verbs, in the opinion 
of many learned etymologists, consists of two 
letters, the former denoting the action, the lat- 
ter the Person. From these primitives, or 
radical elements, spreading out into all the ram- 
ifications of vowels and consonants significant- 
ly combined, was formed that copious variety 
•of words, which distinguishes the most perfect 
of languages. 

The five simplest combinations are aco, eco, 
ico, oa>, and vco. Of these the last letter denotes 
the Person, 1 and is changed into other letters 
to signify the different Persons, Numbers, 
Tenses, and Moods. The former will be 
found to indicate some of the principal func- 
tions of nature. 

"Aco signifies to breathe, tojloiv. 

"Eco, to produce, to clothe. 

"Ico, to send. 



1 The first Person of the Active has the force, and the 
abbreviated form, oftyci; that of the Passive, of fit. The 
most simple change of the former into the latter formed the 
Middle Voice. Thus tco, I produce, I send, into existence : 
t£[4i or tipi, I produce myself, I send myself into existence, or 
simply J exist, I am. " Ew, I chthe ; rffAca, I clothe myself. 
From the same principle the origin of the Passive Voice 
may be deduced. , 



254 

*Oco, to bear. 

"Tco, to pour, to rain. 

After these Duads, the next combination 
consisted of Triads, formed by the addition of 
a vowel inserted, or a Consonant prefixed or 
inserted* 

1. A Vowel inserted; ovm, to breathe; law, 
to permit ; law, to send ; otw, to bear, to think. 

2. A Consonant prefixed; law, to live; diw, 
to bind; ww, to go ; now, to drink; cpvco, to 
produce. 

3. A Consonant inserted ; ayw, to drive, to 
lead; i'doo, to eat ; ixw,to come ; opw, to excite; 

vdco, to flow. 

From these original combinations the for- 
mation of Verbs and their derivatives will be 
easily deduced. 1 Thus from ayw are formed 



1 It is remarkable that the oriental Primitives generally 
end in Consonants. Thus from the Hebrew, 

AR, to flow, are derived Aur, light, ariQ, ovQavoq, ogdoo, 
toga, aura, aurora, aurum. 

AT, to fly, Act, a bird of prey, dfrog. 

EL, to shine, tkrj, rjfoog, Gt'kag, a^vtj. 

OR, to rise, oqoj, oqoq* orior, origo, horreo, etc. 

Hence the study of Hebrew will not only enable the 
Christian to read the Scriptures with greater accuracy and 
satisfaction, but will supply the Philologist and the gener- 
al scholar with some of the most probable etymologies of 
many words in the Greek and Latin languages. 



255 

dyav, dydUco, dyity, dyei'pa,, dyopd, dypa, dyvid, 
etc. From /?«'» are formed /?«'£», fidihog, pal- 
vm, fiaiog, fidUw, etc. From &eco come Seog, 
deidco, dscASs, de/ico, dsafiog, deonoryg, devco, ddyp- 
fiat, dovAog, etc. 



256 

SYNOPSIS OF PARSING. 
ARTICLE. 

N— N— 

—is an Art. (Decline it.) Sing. G — &c. Du. G — &e. 

D— D— 

M N.~) to — or agrees with 

1 ) Sing. \£- G. | ) [- & 

it is the 2 } Per. Du. ) * ' Gend.D. } f agrees with, 

3) PI. )p* A. | case ( orisgoverned 

V.;-.:; v.J )by — R. 

NOUNS. 

Bias. 



. Com. 
is a 
Prop. 



1 v mas. \ 

Tvr cA r^ i Fem.f Gender from 

Noun, 2 > Declen. XT > ^ r n -. 
' ^ ( Neu. C — Decline it. 

3? Com.) 

N.^j to — Rule. 

1 ) Sing. ) G. j governed by — V 

is the 2 } Per. Du. ) D. } or \ R. 

3^ PI. ) A. | absolute with— ) 



V.J 
ADJECTIVE. 
Pos. 
is m Adj. of 2 J- terminationsCom.) state from - 

Sup. 



of 2} 

3* 
Pos. — ) N.} 

Comnare. it Com. — > Decline it — Sin. G. \ 
Sup.— t D.) 



&c, 

NO fto a- *) 

G. | j gree 

Gend.D. } Case { with } R. 
A. | j or g'd | 

V.J Lby- J 

PRONOUN. N.^i 

G. | 
■is a Pronoun, from — . Decline it, Sin. D. } 

V.J 

to — R. 




1) Sin.) J?) G.'| 

it is the 2 > Per. Du. ) N > Gend. D. } 



governed by 
— It 



257 



VERB. 



\t l ■ w ? Conjugate it in the voice to which it 
-is a Verb in ^ \% lougs . 

Ind."| Pres.^) 

Act. ) Sub. | Imp. | 

the Pass. } Voice Opt. } Mood Per. } Tense. 

Mid, ) lm. Plu. | 

Inf. J &c. J 

run it through \ 1 ^ Sin. ^ and agrees with — 

the tense to \ in 2 > Per. Du. > or 

vv'h it belongs J 3 ) PI. ) governed by — 



PARTICIPLES, 
Pres. "i 

F f Act - , 

is a Part, of the„ . ' !> Pass. \ Voice from the verb 



2 A. 

1 F. 

2 F. 



Act. ) 
Pass. ) 
Mid. ) 



Conjugate the Verb in the voice ) D u thp p ortir ; n i„ 
to which the Participle belongs. C 1Jecline tne Participle. 



it is the 2 > 


Per. Du, ) 


IV ( 

c.) 


;nu. 


D.y 


4 


PI, s 




A.) 

V.J 






ADVERBS. 








Pos. ) 






— is an adverb in the Com. } 


state from 






Sup. J 








Pos. — ) 








Compare it, 


Com.— J 
Sup.—) 


and qua! 

22* 


ines 


— R. 



258 



EXPLANATION OF GRAMMATICAL TERMS. 

Ab' solute (case), so called because it does not depend upon 
any other word in the sentence. 

Acatalectic, a verse which has the complete number of syl- 
lables, without defect or superfluity. 

Accents mark the elevation and depression of the voice, and 
are either acute ( ' ), oivg ; grave ( < ) fiayvg ; or both 
these united circumflex (~ ), inionoiptvog. The acute 
accent may be placed above either of the three last 
syllables of a word; the grave only on the last ; the 
circumflex on the last or last but one. 

Acute^ See Accent' 

Acutiton, a word accented on the last syllable. 

JE olic. See Dialect. 

Amphimdcer. See Foot. 

Amphibrachys. See FooU 

An apest. See Metre. 

An'omal or Anomaly, an irregular word. 

Antepenult, the last syllable but two. 

Antibac chius. See Foot. 

Antispas tic. See Metre. 

A'orist, an indefinite tense. 

Aphce'resis, a figure in grammar, which takes away a letter 
or a syllable from the beginning of a word. 

Apocope, a figure in grammar, by which the last letter or 
syllable of a word is taken away. 

Apostrophe in grammar is a note of contraction by the use 
of a comma, as the? for though. 

Appellative. See Patronymic. 

Aptote, a noun undeclined. 

Arsis, the acute accent with the rising inflection. 

Aspirate, the rough breathing ( e ), which has the force of A. 

Atonic, a word without an accent. 

Attraction. The case of a noun is sometimes changed by 
the attraction of some word near it. 



259 

Augment, the prefixing or change of a letter at the begin- 
ning of a verb ; two kinds — syllabic, when the verb be- 
gins with a consonant ; temporal, when the verb begins 
with a vowel ; as 

tvutw, i-xvnxov — where e is syllabic; 
dytovoj, y-KOVov — where q is temporal. 
Auxiliary, the verb itfil used with passive participles, is 

called an auxiliary. 
Bac chius. See Foot- > 

Buryton, a word not accented on the last syllable. 
Base, when a single metre remains before the tinal Paroemi- 
ac, that metre is placed in a separate verse, and is 
called a base. 
Boeotic. See Dialect. 

Car dinal, principal numbers, as one, two, &c. 
Catalectic, a verse in which a syllable is wanting. 
Characteristic. Conjugations of verbs are distinguished by the 
letter preceding cu or opai, which letter is called char- 
acteristic. In niy wv, pv, the formej letter is the char* 
acteristic 
Choriam bic. See Metre. 
Circumflex. See Accent. 
Crdsis, a change of vowels in contraction. 
Cretic. See Foot- 
Dactyl See Metre. 

Den tals, letters pronounced by the teeth ; viz. r, 8, <&. 
Deponent, a verb which has a passive form, but an active 

or middle signification. 
Diceresis, the separation of a diphthong into two syllables- 
denoted by two dots over the latter vowel, thus, avnvog. 
Dialect, a different manner of speaking or writing the same 
language in different provinces. The Greek language 
has the following dialects, the 
Attic used in Attica ; 

Ionic Ionia; 

.Doric — Dorica or Doris ; 

JE'olic iEolia. 

The Poetic style admitted all the dialects, and bad eeir 
tain peculiarities of its own. 



260 

Digamma, the ^Eolians, instead of the aspirate, used the di- 
gamma, similar in sound to a V or W. It is so called, be- 
cause its figure resembles two gammas, one over the oth- 
er ; thus f — Thus f e Onega for ianefjcic 
Dimeter- See Metre. 
Dip tote, a noun which has only two cases. 
Doric: See Dialect. 

Du'ad, a word consisting of two syllables. 
Elegy, a poem on a mournful subject. 
Elision, the omission of the former of two vowels. 
Ellipsis is where one or more words are wanting to com- 
plete the sense. 
Enatlage, a figure in grammar, by which one pronoun, or one 

mood or tense of a verb, is put for another. 
Enclitic inclines and throws the accent on the preceding 

word, with which it is joined and blended. 
Epic, a poem, which represents the actions and sufferings 

of illustrious persons. 
Epigram, a short poem, terminating in a point of wit. 
Etymot ogy.Afea.ts of words and their derivations. It is some- 
times called analogy. 
Epitrite. See Foot. 
Euphony, agreeable sound. 
Expletives are particles which have no distinct signification, 

but serve to fill up and embellish a sentence. 
Foot, a certain number of syllables, constituting a distinct 
part of a verse. For the several kinds of feet see page 
194. ( 
Frequentative, verbs which signify the frequent repetition 

of an action. 
Grave. See Accent 

Graviton, a word not accented on the last syllable. 
Guttural, a letter sounded in the throat, 
Hemistich^ half a verse. 

Heroic, a poem, which describes the actions of heroes ; a 
Heroic verse consists of six feet — and is also called Hexa- 
meter. 
Heteroclite, a noun that varies from the common forms of 
declension. 



261 

Hiatus, the opening of the mouth, caused by the succes* 
sion of an initial to a final vowel. 

Hith'pael, a Hebrew conjugation. 

Iambic See Metre. 

Idiom, a mode of speaking peculiar to a language or dialect 

Impure, a vowel is so called, when it follows a consonant. 

Infiec tion, variation of a noun or verb. 

Initial, a letter at the beginning of a word. 

Ionic a majore, > gee M < 

Ion xc a rnmore, ^ 

Labial^ a letter pronounced by the lips, as n, ft, cp. 

Liquids, the letters /, m, n, r, s,f, are called iiquids, be> 
cause they flow softly and easily after a mute in the 
same syllable. 

Me tre, (or verse,) is a certain number of long and short syl- 
lables disposed according to rule ; — for the different 
kinds of metres see page 195. 

Molossus. See Foot* 

Mon optote, a noun that has but one case. 

Mute, a letter which without a vowel can make no sound ; 
as n, ft, d. 

Ordinal (numbers) are such as express the order of things, 
as first, second, etc 

Oxyton, a word accented on the last syllable. 

Paeon. See Foot. 

Paeon ic. See Metre. 

Patatals* letters pronounced by the palate ; as x, y, %. 

Parago'ge, a figure of speech, by which a letter or syllable 
is added to the end of a word, as dicier for did. 

Part icle, a word unvaried by inflection. 

Paroe miac, a Dimeter Catalectic verse. 

Pastoral, a poem representing the actions and conversations 
of shepherds, called also Bucolics. 

Patronymic, the name of the father applied with some va- 
riation to his descendants. 

Penult ima, the last syllable but one. 

Periphrasis, the use of several worcjs to express the mean- 
ing of one. 






262 

Postpositive, those conjunctions are called postpositive, which 
are placed after the verbs with which they are con- 
nected. 

Prae-antepenult , the last syllable but three. 

Prefix, a particle put before a word. 

Prepos itive, those conjunctions which are placed before the 
verb with which they are connected, are called pre- 
positive. The first vowels of the proper diphthongs 
are also called prepositive. 

Prim itive, an original word. A word not derived. 

Privative, a Particle which takes away, or reverses the 
meaning of the verb to which it is prefixed. 

Proceleusma tic. See Foot. 

Pure, a vowel is called pure when it follows another vowel, 
with which it is not mixed or united in sound. 

Pyrrhic. See Foot. 

Quantity, the measure of time in pronouncing a syllable. 

Radical, the letters of a verb which remain the same. 

Reduplication, the repetition of the initial consonant in the 
continued augment. 

Root, the first person singular of the present tense of the in- 
dicative mood, is called the root or theme of the verb, 
because from it the other principal parts are formed. 

Spon dee. See Foot. 

Subjunctive, the last vowels of proper diphthongs are called 
subjunctive. 

Sub' script is a small iota (t) placed under co in certain cases 
of nouns, and under y in certain persons of verbs. 

Sytlabic. See Augment. 

Synaeresis, the contraction of two vowels. 

Syncope, a figure of speech, by which a letter or syllable 
is taken from the middle of a word. 

Synopsis, many particulars represented at one view\ 

Syzygy. See Metre. 

Temporal. See Augment. 



263 

Tetrameter, an Iambic verse of four measures or eight feet. 

Theme. See Root. 

Thesis, the grave accent with the falling inflection is called 
thesis* 

Triad, a word consisting of three letters. 

Tribrach. See Foot. 

Trimeter, an Iambic verse of three measures, or six feet. 

Trip tote, a noun which has three cases. 

Verbal, nouns are called verbal, which are formed from tens- 
es of the indicative, by dropping the augment and 
changing the termination ; as dvvctfug from dvpctficu* 



264 



GREEK GRAMMATICAL TERMS. 



Ahiaxwri, accusative. 
'^MonctViQ, transitive. 
'Apei&8ola, immutables. 
'AvTMvvfAia, pronoun. 
'Aopiorog, aorist. 
^Anagt^qarog^ infinitive. 
' AnofttTWQv, deponent. 
*'Aq#QQVj article. 
' AQi$pog> number. 
*A{jO£vmov> masculine. 

Avlri<H$> augment. 

AvTonu&eg, intransitive. 
*Aq:o)vcc, mutes. 

Bagvg, grave. 

Bayviovov, having a grave 
on the last syllable. 

Ftvog, gender. 

Aaovg, aspirate. 

Aw&t(5ig, voice. 

Aiygovov, doubtful. 

AoTwrj, dative. 

AvUog, dual. 

*' EyvXioig, mood. 

*'£x&liipig> elision. 

9 Ev(Qyr)iMV> active. 

'JEveoTWQ, present. 

'Eviwg, singular. 

9 JEm&tT0v, adjective, epithet. 

* En I $&[*<*, adverb. 
JRv&ela, nominative. 
Evw*n> optative. 
*Eq*lMGxiMv, drawn, as v. 
*H\iiq)Mva> semi-vowels, .the 

liquids and a. 
Qtiwov, simple, positive. 



GtjXvaoVf feminine. 
KfoxtMri, vocative. 
Kl'iGig, declension, conjuga- 
tion. 
KgaGig, crasis. 
Kvgcov ovopu, proper name. 
MtXhwv, future. 
MtlXwv ia6t oliyov, paul$- 

post-future. 
Mtof] GTLynnj half-stop. 
Mtoog, middle. 
Mtxo%n, participle. 
'Ovoi^a, noun. 
*Ovoiia6Ti*Yi, nominative. 
'Olvg, acute. 
'O^vrovov, oxyton. 
'Og&rj? nominative. 
'OgiaTMrj, indicative. 

Ovdtregov, neuter. 

Jla&riTMr h passive. 

UaQavtutiivog, perfect. 

HaQaTUTMog, imperfect. 

UaQolvrovov, having an a- 
cute on the penultima. 

IlaQwyiwzvog, past. 

IIzQi<G7i(x}{i£vov, Laving a cir- 
cumflex on the last. 

Ilkccyvog, oblique. 

IHnfrvvTwog, plural. 

Uvtvua, a bread ^g. 

TloooTyg, quantity. 

TlgofcGig, preposition. 

Ilgonccgokvrovov, having an 
acute on the ante-penul- 
tima. 



265 



JjQoniQtanMfxevov^ having a 
circumflex on the penult. 

IlQOGriyoQMQv, substantive. 

IlQOOiaTMri, imperative. 

JlQOGMdiu, accent. 

ITqogwtzqv^ person. 

Utwgiq, case. 

'jPijficci verb. 

-Zro^f?«, letters. 

2Tiyiir h stop. 

SvynQiTMov, comparative. 

2Jv£vyla, conjugation. 

2JvXka(3j, syllable. 

JZvXXccpMti syllabic (aug- 
ment.) 

2£v(Aq)tova, consonants. 



JZvvaXoMpy, contraction. 
JZvvdtGfxog, conjunction. 
2!vviCr t aig^ contraction in 

verse. 
TeXsia arty^y, a full stop. 
Tovog, accent. 
'Tyod, liquids. 
' 2 neQ&€Tw6v, superlative. 
'TniQOvvTtliHog, pluperfect. 
'Tnoociyfiij, comma. 
" TnoTanTixrj, subjunctive. 
0covtj€VTa^ vowels. 
J£qo wK*7\temporal (augment.) 
Xgovog, time, tense. 
*£MoV, soft. 



m 






INDEX. 



FAGS, 



Accents, ♦ , 


15,200 


Accusative, . 


.* • . .24 


Syntax of, 


, , * . . 160 


Active Voice, 


. 62 


Adjectives, ' . 


. . .34 


Adverbs, 


. . - .142 


Syntax of, 


..... 16& 


JEolic Dialect, 


.... 225 


Anapestics, 


.198 


Apostrophe, . 


. 16 


Article, .... 


. . v . 18 


Syntax of, 


. 148 


Attic Dialect, . 


. . . . 217 


Augment, .. 


, , . .69 


Breathings, 


. « .14 


Gases, . . 


. - - . - .17 


Changes of letters, 


. 231 


Characteristics, 


. .61 


Comparison, . 


.... 45 


Composition, Prosody of, 


• 187 


Conjunctions, 


, 179 


Consonants, . 


.... 13 


Contracted Verbs, , 


* 97 


Contraction, . 


26 


Prosody of, 


. 187 


Dative, ... 


. ' 17 


— — Plural, . ... 


* 25 


Syntax of, , -, . 


. 157 



268 



Declensions, 

Deponents, 

Dialects, 

Digamma, . m ' 

Digammated words,' 

Diphthongs, , ., [ 

Doric dialect, 

Dual in ov, tjv, 

£Tj.mi, to clothe one's self, 

El pi, 

— —Dialects of, * 
Mfu, to go, . 

Enclitics, 

Explanation of grammatical terms, 
Hpai, . 
Feet, . 

®Wh .... 

First Aorist, Active, 

Passive, . 

Middle, . 

First Future, Active, 

Passive, . 

■ Middle, . 

Formation of the Tenses, 
Genders, 

Genitive, Syntax of, 
Greek grammatical terms, 
Iambics, 
iv^i, to go, , 
lypii to send, « 
Imperfect, Active, . 

-Passive, . 

Active in pi, . 

- Passive in pi, 

Infinitive, Syntax of, 
Ionic dialect, . 
Irregular Nouns, 

Adjectives, . * 

-Verbs, 






269 



*— — Verbs in ja, . 

Letters, . . 

Metres, 
Middle Voice, 
N added, 

Nominative and Verb, 
Numbers, 
Numerals, 

Participles, Syntax of, 
Parts of Speech, 
Passive Voice, 

Syntax of, 

Patronymics, . 
Perfect Active, * 

Passive, . 

Middle, > 

Pluperfect Active, . 

Passive, . 

Middle, . 

Poetic Dialect, 
Prepositions, . 

Metrical, 

Primitives, 
Pronouns, . » 

Dialects of, 

Prosody, 

Relative, Syntax of, 

Second Aorist, Active, 

Passive, . 

Middle, . 

Active in \u, . 

Middle in \xi, . 

Second Future, Active, 

Passive, . 

Middle, . 

Stops, . 
Substantives and Adjectives, 
23* 



102 

123 

122 

11 

195 

92 

14 

145 

16 

50 

167 

16 

81 

162 

33 

77 

88 

94 

78. 

90 

96 

226 

171 

178 

253 

52 

228 

183 

149 

78 

92 

96 

108 

113 

80 

92 

96 

16 

146 



270 



Synopsis of parsing', 
Syntax, . 
Trochaics, 
Verbs, . 

in Si, 

in MI, 

Verbal Nouns, 

Vocative, 

Vowels, 



£56 

145 

197 

56 

61 

102 

141 

25 

12 






271 



ABBREVIATIONS. 



^73 


<x7tO 


& 


iJW 


GUJ 


av 


<&> 


og 


$ 


yap 


8 


ov 


7f 


yy 


<sfe* 


7t8pt 


#> 


ysv 


&- 


pa 


% 


y? 


& 


F* 





& 


es 


P° 


<ft 


& 


& 


<rS 


Afe 


Sta 


* 


«$cu 


« 


St 


oar 


acr 


f 


e? 


if 


ar 


QM 


lx 


% 


<?£ 


QA> 


iv 


s 


tat 


m 


im 


^y 


rav 


<% 


U 


<£ 


«^ 


dj 


6V 


«*> 


TTO 


lw 


yjv 


$ 


#0$ 


% * 


xcu 


CUJ 


W 


M 


M, 


t 


i;7i0 






H3l 891 



» 4 

ft 
iff. 



>.•', 



*^^V** \°*'^ , \< v * %'*^?r?\Jl 











: **** 










•^ ** 



"W 








>> 



■ : 



iHECKMAN lgJ| Sf^V x* 
BINDERY INC. PI U, J? % — ^ 



^GrV 1 ^ A* *fv^^/> # « ism 



^FEB 89 



1 



N. MANCHESTER, 
INDIANA 46962^ 



* * a 










